GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual

3.1.3 Related definition .......................................................................................................30

3.1.4 Address definition.......................................................................................................30
3.2 Rapid Positioning G00...................................................................................................................... 33
3.3 Linear Interpolation G01....................................................................................................................... 34
3.4 Arc and Helical Interpolation G02, G03.......................................................................................... 36
3.5 Dwell G04............................................................................................................................................. 41
3.6 Plane Selection Command G17, G18 and G19 .............................................................................. 42
3.7 Conversion of Inch and Metric G20 and G21.................................................................................... 42
3.8 Reference Point Return G28 ................................................................................................................. 43
3.9 Return from Reference Point G29 ........................................................................................................ 44
3.10 The 2nd, 3rd and 4th Reference Point Return G30............................................................................. 45
3.11 Skip Function G31 .............................................................................................................................. 47
3.12 Tool Nose Radius Compensation C (G40, G41 and G42) .................................................................. 49
3.13 Tool Length Compensation (G43, G44, G49) ................................................................................. 52
3.14 Workpiece Coordinate system G54~G59......................................................................................... 55
3.15 Compound Cycle Command............................................................................................................... 57
3.15.1 Brief for canned cycle...............................................................................................57
3.15.2 Description for canned cycle ....................................................................................61
3.15.3 Continous Drilling .....................................................................................................82
3.15.4 Cautions for canned cycle ........................................................................................86
3.15.5 Examples for modal data specified in canned cycle .................................................88
3.15.6 Examples for canned cycle and tool length compensation.......................................89
3.16 Absolute and Incremental Commands G90 and G91.......................................................................... 91
3.17 Workpiece Coordinate System Setting G92........................................................................................ 91
3.18 Feed per min. G94, Feed per rev. G95................................................................................................ 91
3.19 G98, G99 ............................................................................................................................................ 92
3.20 Chamfering Function....................................................................................................................... 93
3.20.1 Linear chamfering ....................................................................................................93
3.20.2 Circular chamfering ..................................................................................................95
3.20.3 Exceptional Cases ...................................................................................................97
3.21 RIGID TAPPING................................................................................................................................ 98
3.21.1 Rigid Tapping ...........................................................................................................98
3.21.2 Peck Rigid Tapping...................................................................................................99
3.21.3 Address Explanation ..............................................................................................101
3.21.4 Technic Specification ..............................................................................................101
3.21.5 Specify a Rigid Tapping Mode ................................................................................102
3.21.6 The cancellation of rigid tapping mode...................................................................103
3.21.7 F and G Signals .....................................................................................................104
3.21.8 Alarm Message ......................................................................................................105
3.21.9 Program Example ..................................................................................................105

CHAPTER 4 CONTROL FUNCTION of ADDITIONAL AXIS ............................................................ 106

4.1 General................................................................................................................................................ 106
4.2 Axis Name .......................................................................................................................................... 106
4.3 Axis Display ....................................................................................................................................... 106
4.4 Axis Startup ........................................................................................................................................ 107
4.5 The Additional Axis is Linear Axis..................................................................................................... 107

VIII
 Contents

4.6 The additional axis is rotation axis..................................................................................................... 108

4.7 The zero return D of rotation axis .......................................................................................................110
4.8 The Function of Cs Axis......................................................................................................................111

CHAPTER 5 MACRO PROGRAM ..............................................................................................................116

5.1 Macro Call...........................................................................................................................................117

5.2 Variables ............................................................................................................................................. 120
5.2.1 Null Variables ...........................................................................................................125
5.2.2 Local Variables .........................................................................................................125
5.2.3 Common Variable .....................................................................................................126
5.2.4 System Variables......................................................................................................127
5.3 Arithmetic and Logic Operation......................................................................................................... 130
5.3.1 Tranditional Format ..................................................................................................131
5.3.2 Macro Statement ......................................................................................................135
5.3.3 Priority of Operations................................................................................................137
5.3.4 Bracket Nesting ........................................................................................................138
5.4 Branch and Repetition ........................................................................................................................ 138
5.4.1 Unconditional Branch (GO TO statement)................................................................138
5.4.2 Conditional Branch (IF statement)............................................................................138
5.4.3 Conditional Expression.............................................................................................139
5.4.4 Repetition˄WHILE Statement˅..............................................................................140
5.5 Macro Statement and NC statement ................................................................................................... 141
5.5.1 Macro Programming and Registering.......................................................................141
5.5.2 Limitation ..................................................................................................................141

CHAPTER 6 CUTTER COMPENSATION ................................................................................................ 142

6.1 Application for Cutter Radius Compensation .............................................................................. 142

6.1.1 Brief..........................................................................................................................142
6.1.2 Compensation value setting .....................................................................................142
6.1.3 Command format......................................................................................................143
6.1.4 Compensation direction............................................................................................143
6.1.5 Caution.....................................................................................................................144
6.1.6 Example for application ............................................................................................144
6.2 Offset Path Explanation for Cutter Radius Compensation ................................................................. 145
6.2.1 Conception for inner side or outer side.....................................................................145
6.2.2 Tool movement in start-up ........................................................................................146
6.2.3 Tool movement in offset mode..................................................................................147
6.2.4 Tool operation in offset cancellation mode................................................................152
6.2.5 Interference check....................................................................................................154
6.2.6 Command of compensation vector cancel temporarily.............................................156
6.2.7 Exceptional case ......................................................................................................157

IX
 GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual

X
 Contents

Volume Ċ OPERATION
CHAPTER1 OPERATION MODE AND DISPLAY ........................................................................163
1.1 Panel Division.....................................................................................................................163
1.1.1 State indication .........................................................................................................164
1.1.2 Edit keypad...............................................................................................................164
1.1.3 Menu display ............................................................................................................165
1.1.4 Machine panel ..........................................................................................................166
1.2 Summary of Operation Mode .............................................................................................169
1.3 Display Interface.................................................................................................................170
1.3.1 Position interface......................................................................................................173
1.3.2 Program interface.....................................................................................................175
1.3.3 Tool offset, macro variable and tool life management interface................................177
1.3.4 Alarm interface .........................................................................................................181
1.3.5 Setting interface .......................................................................................................183
1.3.6 BIT PARAMETER, DATA PARAMETER, PITCH COMP interface ............................188
1.3.7 CNC DIAGNOSIS, PLC STATE, PLC VALUE, machine soft panel, VERSION
MESSAGE interface..........................................................................................................190
1.4 List of general operations ...................................................................................................193
CHAPTER 2 POWER ON OR OFF AND PROTECTION .............................................................199
2.1 System Power On...............................................................................................................199
2.2 System Power Off...............................................................................................................199
2.3 Overtravel Protection..........................................................................................................200
2.3.1 Hardware overtravel protection ................................................................................200
2.3.2 Software overtravel protection..................................................................................200
2.4 Emergency Operation.........................................................................................................200
2.4.1 Reset........................................................................................................................201
2.4.2 Emergency stop .......................................................................................................201
2.4.3 Feed hold .................................................................................................................201
2.4.4 Power off ..................................................................................................................201
CHAPTER 3 MANUAL OPERATION..............................................................................................202
3.1 Coordinate axis moving ......................................................................................................202
3.1.1 Manual feed..............................................................................................................202
3.1.2 Manual rapid traverse...............................................................................................202
3.1.3 Manual feedrate override adjustment .......................................................................203
3.1.4 Manual rapid override adjustment ............................................................................204
3.1.5 Relative coordinate clearing .....................................................................................204
3.2 Other Manual operations ....................................................................................................205
3.2.1 Spindle CCW, CW, stop control ................................................................................205
3.2.2 Spindle Jog...............................................................................................................205
3.2.3 Cooling control .........................................................................................................205
3.2.4 Lubrication control ....................................................................................................205
3.2.5 Spindle override adjustment .....................................................................................206
CHAPTER 4 MPG/STEP OPERATION ........................................................................................207
4.1 Step Feed ...........................................................................................................................207
4.1.1 Increment selection ..................................................................................................207
4.1.2 Moving direction selection ........................................................................................208
4.2 MPG (Handwheel) Feed.....................................................................................................208
4.2.1 Increment selection ..................................................................................................208
4.2.2 Moving axis and direction selection..........................................................................209
4.2.3 Explanation items .....................................................................................................209
CHAPTER 5 MDI OPERATION .......................................................................................................210

XI
 GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual

5.1 Code Words Input ..............................................................................................................210

5.2 Code Words Execution....................................................................................................... 211
5.3 Parameter Setting ..............................................................................................................212
5.4 Data Modification................................................................................................................212
5.5 OUT Key Start ....................................................................................................................213
CHAPTER 6 PROGRAM EDIT AND MANAGEMENT ................................................................215
6.1 Program Creation ...............................................................................................................215
6.1.1 Creation of the block number ...................................................................................215
6.1.2 Input of the program content...............................................................................215
6.1.3 Search of the character............................................................................................217
6.1.4 Insertion of the character .........................................................................................219
6.1.5 Deletion of the character ..........................................................................................221
6.1.6 Modification of the character ....................................................................................221
6.1.7 Deletion of a single block .........................................................................................221
6.1.8 Deletion of the blocks...............................................................................................221
6.1.9 Segment deletion .....................................................................................................223
6.2 Program annotation............................................................................................................224
6.2.1 Annotation for program name...................................................................................224
6.2.2 Block annotation.......................................................................................................226
6.2.3 Alter program annotation ..........................................................................................226
6.3 Deletion of the Program .....................................................................................................226
6.3.1 Deletion a single program ........................................................................................226
6.3.2 Deletion of all programs ...........................................................................................227
6.4 Selection of the Program...................................................................................................227
6.4.1 Search method.........................................................................................................227
6.4.2 Scanning method .....................................................................................................228
6.4.3 Cursor method .........................................................................................................228
6.4.4 Select file by using file list ........................................................................................228
6.5 Execution of the Program..................................................................................................229
6.6 Rename of the Program ....................................................................................................229
6.7 Copy of the Program ..........................................................................................................229
6.8 Program positioning ...........................................................................................................230
6.9 Program preview ................................................................................................................230
CHAPTER 7 AUTO OPERATION .................................................................................................232
7.1 Auto Run .............................................................................................................................232
7.1.1 Selection of the program to be run ...........................................................................232
7.1.2 Program start ...........................................................................................................233
7.1.3 Stop of the auto run..................................................................................................233
7.1.4 Auto run from an arbitrary block ...............................................................................235
7.1.5 Adjustment of the feedrate override, rapid override .................................................236
7.1.6 Spindle override adjustment .....................................................................................237
7.2 DNC running ......................................................................................................................237
7.3 Running state .....................................................................................................................237
7.3.1 Single block execution .............................................................................................237
7.3.2 Dry run .....................................................................................................................238
7.3.3 Machine lock ............................................................................................................238
7.3.4 MST lock ..................................................................................................................238
7.3.5 Block skip.................................................................................................................239
7.3.6 Optional stop ............................................................................................................239
7.4 Memorizing at power-down ................................................................................................239
7.4.1 Program interruption in non-DNC auto operation .....................................................239
7.4.2 Interruption at power-down on DNC auto operation .................................................240
CHAPTER 8 MACHINE ZERO RETURN OPERATION..............................................................241
8.1 Machine Zero .....................................................................................................................241
8.2 Machine Zero Return Steps ................................................................................................241

XII
 Contents

CHAPTER 9 DATA SETTING, BACKUP and RESTORE ...........................................................243

9.1 Data Setting ...................................................................................................................243
9.1.1 Switch setting ...........................................................................................................243
9.1.2 Graphic setting .........................................................................................................243
9.1.3 Parameter setting .....................................................................................................245
9.2 The Password Setting and Alteration..................................................................................251
9.2.1 Entry of the operation level.......................................................................................252
9.2.2 Alteration of the password ........................................................................................253
9.2.3 Lower level set .........................................................................................................254
9.3 Data Restore and Backup ..................................................................................................256
CHAPTER 10 ADVANCE OPERATION .......................................................................................258
10.1 Operation path..................................................................................................................258
10.2 Operation instructions.......................................................................................................260
10.3 Attentions..........................................................................................................................261
CHAPTER 11 FLASH OPERATION .............................................................................................262
11.1. File list .............................................................................................................................262
11.2. Introduction of general file operation function ..................................................................263
11.2.1 Open and close file folder .......................................................................................263
11.2.2 Copy the file by one key(current list in C diskĸĺcurrent list in U disk)..................264
11.2.3 CNC file search ......................................................................................................265
11.2.4 Open CNC file ........................................................................................................266

XIII
 GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual

VOLUME ċ INSTALLATION

CHAPTER 1 INSTALLATION LAYOUT....................................................................................271

1.1 GSK980MDa Connection................................................................................................................... 271
1.1.1 GSK980MDa back cover interface layout ................................................................271
1.1.2 Interface explanation................................................................................................271
1.2 GSK980MDa Installation ................................................................................................................... 272
1.2.1 GSK980MDa external dimensions ...........................................................................272
1.2.2 Installation conditions of the cabinet ........................................................................272
1.2.3 Protection methods against interference ..................................................................272
2.1 Connection to Drive unit .................................................................................................................... 275
2.1.1 Drive interface definition...........................................................................................275
2.1.2 Command pulse and direction signals .....................................................................275
2.1.3 Drive unit alarm signal..............................................................................................275
2.1.4 Axis enable signal ENn ............................................................................................276
2.1.5 Pulse disable signal SETn .......................................................................................276
2.1.6 Zero signal nPC .......................................................................................................276
2.1.7 Connection to drive unit ...........................................................................................277
2.2 Connection of 4th axis ........................................................................................................................ 278
2.2.1 4th axis interface definition.......................................................................................278
2.2.2 Connection of 4th axis interface as linear axis ..........................................................279
2.2.3 Connection of 4th axis interface as rotary axis..........................................................280
2.3 Connection of spindle port.................................................................................................................. 280
2.3.1 Definition of signal....................................................................................................280
2.3.2 Spindle zero signal ...................................................................................................280
2.3.3 Linear axis................................................................................................................281
2.3.4 Connected with inverter ...........................................................................................281
2.3.5 Connection of spindle interface as rotary axis..........................................................282
2.3.6 Connection of spindle interface as “CS” axis............................................................282
2.3.7 SVC Signal explanation ...........................................................................................282
2.4 Connection to Spindle Encoder........................................................................................................... 283
2.4.1 Spindle encoder interface definition .........................................................................283
2.4.2 Signal Explanation ...................................................................................................283
2.4.3 Connection of spindle encoder interface ..................................................................283
2.5 Connection to Handwheel................................................................................................................... 284
2.5.1 Handwheel interface definition .................................................................................284
2.5.2 Signal explanation....................................................................................................284
2.6 Connection of GSK980MDa to PC ..................................................................................................... 285
2.6.1 Communication interface definition ..........................................................................285
2.6.2 Communication interface connection .......................................................................285
2.7 Connection of Power Interface............................................................................................................ 286
2.8 I/O Interface Definition˖................................................................................................................ 287
2.8.1 Input Signal ..............................................................................................................287
2.8.2 Output signal ............................................................................................................289
2.9 Machine Zero ...................................................................................................................................... 290
CHAPTER 3 PARAMETER .............................................................................................................299
3.1 Parameter Description (by sequence) ................................................................................................. 299
3.1.1 Bit parameter............................................................................................................299

XIV
 Contents

3.1.2 Data parameter ........................................................................................................308

3.2 Parameter description (by function sequence).................................................................................... 314
3.2.1 Axis control logic.......................................................................................................314
3.2.2 Acceleration & deceleration control ..........................................................................316
3.2.3 Machine protection ...................................................................................................317
3.2.4 Thread function ........................................................................................................318
3.2.5 Spindle control..........................................................................................................318
3.2.6 Tool function .............................................................................................................319
3.2.7 Edit and Display .......................................................................................................320
3.2.8 Precision compensation ...........................................................................................320
3.2.9 Communication setting.............................................................................................321
3.2.10 Machine zero return ...............................................................................................322
3.2.11 Rotary axis function ................................................................................................325
4.1 Emergency Stop and Stroke Limit ...................................................................................................... 328
4.2 Drive unit Unit Setting........................................................................................................................ 328
4.3 Gear Ratio Adjustment ....................................................................................................................... 329
4.4 Acceleration&deceleration Characteristic Adjustment........................................................................ 330
4.5 Machine Zero Adjustment .................................................................................................................. 332
4.6 Spindle Adjustment............................................................................................................................. 333
4.6.1 Spindle encoder........................................................................................................333
4.6.2 Spindle brake............................................................................................................333
4.6.3 Switch volume control of spindle speed .................................................................334
4.6.4 Analog voltage control for spindle speed ..................................................................334
4.7 Backlash Offset................................................................................................................................... 334
4.8 Step/MPG adjustment ......................................................................................................................... 335
4.9 Other Adjustment................................................................................................................................ 336
CHAPTER 5 DIAGNOSIS MESSAGE .....................................................................................337
5.1 CNC Diagnosis ................................................................................................................................... 337
5.1.1 Signal diagnosis from machine to CNC....................................................................337
5.1.2 Axes moving state and data diagnosis signal of CNC ..............................................337
5.1.3 MDI panel keys diagnosis.........................................................................................338
5.1.4 CNC internal state ....................................................................................................339
5.2 PLC state ............................................................................................................................................ 340
5.2.1 X address (fixed addresses).....................................................................................340
5.2.2 Y address (fixed addresses).....................................................................................342
5.3 PLC Data............................................................................................................................................ 342
CHAPTER 6 MEMORIZING SCREW-PITCH ERROR COMPENSATION FUNCTION ...................343
6.1 Function Explanation ...................................................................................................................... 343
6.2 Specifications ..................................................................................................................................... 343
6.3 Parameter Setting........................................................................................................................... 343
6.3.1 Screw-pitch compensation .......................................................................................343
6.3.2 Screw-pitch error origin ............................................................................................343
6.3.3 Offset interval ...........................................................................................................344
6.3.4 Compensation value.................................................................................................344
6.4 Cautions for Offset Setting ................................................................................................................. 344
6.5 Examples of Offset Parameters Setting............................................................................................ 344

XV
 GSK980MDa Milling Machine CNC System

APPENDIX

Appendix 1. Dimensions of Additional Panel AP01 ......................................................................... 351

Appendix 2 Dimensions for Additional Panel AP02......................................................................... 351

Appendix 4 Alarm Information .............................................................................................................. 352

Appendix 5 Function Configuration of Standard Ladder Diagram ................................................. 357

5.1 Information for Ladder Diagram ........................................................................................................ 357

5.1.1 Introduction .............................................................................................................. 357
5.1.2 Information of Current Version ................................................................................. 357
5.2 ADDRESS DEFINITION................................................................................................................... 358
5.3 FUNCTION CONFIGURATION....................................................................................................... 361
5.3.1 Spindle CCW and CW Control ................................................................................. 361
5.3.2 Spindle JOG ............................................................................................................. 362
5.3.3 Switch Value Control for Spindle Speed ................................................................ 363
5.3.4 Cycle Start and Feed Hold ....................................................................................... 364
5.3.5 Cooling Control ........................................................................................................ 365
5.3.6 Lubricating control.................................................................................................... 365
5.3.7 Optional Block Skip .................................................................................................. 366
5.3.8 Machine Lock ........................................................................................................... 367
5.3.9 MST Lock ................................................................................................................. 367
5.3.10 Single Block ........................................................................................................... 367
5.3.11 Dry Run .................................................................................................................. 367
5.3.12 Optional Stop.......................................................................................................... 368
5.3.13 Stroke Limit and Emergency Stop .......................................................................... 368
5.3.14 Tri-color Indicator ................................................................................................... 369
5.3.15 Reset and Cursor Return ....................................................................................... 369
5.3.16 Rigid Tapping ......................................................................................................... 370
5.3.17 Spindle Exact Stop ................................................................................................. 370
5.3.18 External MPG control ............................................................................................. 371
5.4 Standard Ladder Diagram................................................................................................................... 371

XVI
VOLUME I PROGRAMMING
 GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual

2
 Chapter 1 Programming Fundmentals

CHAPTER 1 PROGRAMMING FUNDMENTALS

Volume I Programming
1.1 Introduction
GSK980MDa Milling Machine is a new generation of CNC system developed by GSK
Company. As the upgraded version of GSK980MD, it supports milling, boring and drilling cycle. It
employs 32 bits high-capability CPU and very large scale programmable device FPGA, applies
real-time multi-task control technology and hardware interpolation technology, and is able to
perform ȝm level precision motion control and PLC logic control. GSK980MDa is the optimum
choice for upgrading CNC milling machine.

Characteristics˖
9 Five axes control (X, Y, Z ,4th and 5th); 3 axes linkage; optional interpolation precision
(1ȝm/0.1ȝm); maximum speed 60m/min; optional axis types (linear axis or revolving axis)
for the 4th and 5th axes; CS axis control available for the 4th and 5th axes.
9 Electronic gear ratio: (1̚32767):(1̚32767)
9 Screw-pitch error compensation, backlash compensation, tool length compensation, tool
abrasion compensation and tool nose radius compensation.
9 Embedded with PLC can be downloaded to CNC from PC.
9 DNC function supports for real-time program transmission for machining.
9 Compatible with G commands in GSK980MC, GSK928MA and GSK980MD. 26 kinds of
canned cycles, such as drilling/boring, circular/rectangular groove rough-milling, full
circle/rectangular finish-milling, linear/rectangular/arc continuous drilling.
9 Spindle encoder tapping and rigid tapping can be detected during tapping cycle, so that
high precision machining can be performed.
3
 GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual

9 Metric/inch programming; automatic chamfering function and tool life management function.
9 Chinese, English, Russian and Spanish display selected by the parameters.
9 Full screen program editing; 40MB program capacity for storing up to 40000 of part
Volume I Programming

programs.
9 USB data communication; CNC system upgrading, machining programs reading through U
disk and bidirectional transfer between CNC and U disk.
9 Alarm log; multi-level passwords for equipment maintenance and management.
9 Bidirectional transfer between CNC and CNC, CNC and PC; upgrade of CNC software and
PLC programs;
9 The installation dimensions and the electric ports are compatible with GSK980MD,
GSK980MC.
Specifications

Controlled axes: five axes (X,Y,Z,4th and 5th); (for the 4th and 5th axes)
optional axis types (linear axis or revolving axis) and CS contouring
control available;
Interpolation functions: linear interpolation (for X, Y, Z, 4th and 5th axes);
helical interpolation (for X, Y and Z axes); circular interpolation (for arbitrary 2
axes).
Position command range: -99999999̚99999999; least command increment:
1ȝm/0.1ȝm; (selected via parameters)
Electronic gear ratio: command multiplier 1̚32767, command frequency
divisor 1̚32767
Motion control
Rapid traverse speed: maximum 60000mm/min
Rapid traverse override: F0, 25%, 50%, 100% four levels real-time tuning
Cutting feedrate: maximum 15000mm/min (feed per min.) or 500mm/r. (feed
per rotation)
Feedrate override: 0̚150% sixteen-level real-time tuning
Manual feedrate: 0̚1260mm/min sixteen-level real-time tuning
MPG feed: 0.001, 0.010, 0.100,1.000mm four gears.
Acceleration/deceleration type: S-type for rapid traverse; exponential-type for
cutting feed.
Automatic chamfering
65 kinds of G codes˖G00, G01, G02, G03, G04, G10, G11, G17, G18, G19,
G20, G21, G28, G29, G30, G31, G40, G41, G42, G43, G44, G49, G54, G55,
G56, G57, G58, G59, G65, G66, G67, G73, G74, G80, G81, G82, G83, G84,
G Code
G85, G86, G88, G89, G90, G91, G92, G94, G95, G98, G99, G110, G111,
G112, G113, G114, G115, G134, G135, G136, G137, G138, G139, G140,
G141, G142, G143
31 kinds of arithmetic, logical operations and skip can be achieved by macro
Macro
command G65
command
Macro statement command. eg:IF,WHILE,GOTO
Operation Seven operation modes: EDIT, AUTO, MDI, DNC, MACHINE ZERO,
mode MPG/STEP and MANUAL.
Tapping Tapping function: lead 0.001̚500mm or 0.06̚25400 pitch/inch

4
 Chapter 1 Programming Fundmentals

Encoder tapping: settable line number of encoder˄0 or100p/r̚5000p/r˅; no

detect for spindle encoder (when the line number is set to 0)
Rigid tapping: by rotary axis

Volume I Programming
Drive ratio between encoder and spindle:˄1̚255˅˖˄1̚255˅
Backlash compensation: 0̚2.000mm
Pitch error compensation: 255 compensation points per axis; compensation
Precision
amount of each point: ±0.255mm.
compensation
Tool compensation: 32 groups tool length compensation, tool wear
compensation, cutter compensation C
Special M commands (redefinition unallowed): M02,M29, M30, M98,
M99,M9000̚M9999.
M command Other M ƑƑ commands are defined or disposed by PLC program.
M commands defined by standard PLC program: M00, M03, M04, M05 M08,
M09, M10, M11, M32, M33
tool number T01̚T32 (32 numbers at most); manual tool change or auto-tool
change selected by the parameters; auto tool change sequence set by PLC
T command
program.
Tool life management; 32 groups, 8 kinds/groups of tool life management data
Speed switching value control: S ƑƑ command is defined or disposed by PLC
program; the standard PLC programs S1, S2, S3 and S4 directly output; The
Spindle speed output of S1,S2, S3, and S4 are closed by S0.
control Speed analog voltage control: the spindle speed per minute commanded by S
codes; output 0̚10V voltage to spindle converter; spindle stepless speed
changing supports 4 spindle mechanical gears
9 kinds of basic commands; 23 kinds of function commands; 2-level PLC
program involving up to 5000 steps (2ȝs processing time for each step). 8ms
refresh cycle for the first level program; Ladder diagram edit software and
PLC function
communication software downloadable
Integrated machine panel: 44 points input (key), 44 points output (LED)
Basic I/O: 41 points input/ 36 points output
Displayer: 480×234 lattice, 7’’ wide-screen multi-color LCD,
Display
Display modes: Chinese, English, Russian, Spanish display selected by
interface
parameters; machining path displayable
Capacity: 40MB for up to 40000 part programs; custom macro program call; 4
Program edit nesting-levels of subprogram
Edit modes: full-screen editing; absolute/incremental programming
CNC system upgrade
Part programs reading in USB
USB
Bidirectional files transfer between CNC and USB (including programs,
parameters, PLC backup and recovery)

Clock display Clock, date and week display.

bidirectional transfer between CNC and PC, CNC and CNC (involving
Serial programs, parameters, tool compensation data); download and upgrade of
Communication system software and PLC program serial ports

5
 GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual

Matching drive AC servo or step drive device by using the pulse+direction signal input. (DA98
unit or DY3 series)
Volume I Programming

G Code Table
Code Function Code Function Code Function
Positioning (rapid Workpiece coordinate
G00 *G54 G92 Coordinate system setting
traverse) system 1
Workpiece coordinate
*G01 G55 *G94 Feed per min.
Linear interpolation system 2
Circular/helical Workpiece coordinate
G02 G56 G95 Feed per rotation
interpolation (CW) system 3
Circular/helical Workpiece coordinate Return to initial plane in
G03 G57 *G98
interpolation (CCW) system 4 canned cycle
Workpiece coordinate Return to R point in canned
G04 Dwell, exact stop G58 G99
system 5 cycle
Tool life Workpiece coordinate Inner circle groove
G10 G59 G110
management system 6 roughing (CCW)
Tool life Macro program/ macro Inner circle groove
G11 G65 G111
management end code roughing (CW)
Macro program modal
*G17 XY plane selection G66 G112 Inner circle finishing (CCW)
call
Macro program modal
G18 ZX plane selection *G67 G113 Inner circle finishing (CW)
call cancel
Circular outer finish milling
G19 YZ plane selection G73 High-speed peck drilling G114
(CW)
Outer circle finishing
G20 Inch input G74 Counter tapping cycle G115
(CCW)
Rectangular groove
G21 Metric input *G80 Canned cycle cancel G134
roughing (CCW)
Reference position Drilling cycle (spot Rectangular groove
G28 G81 G135
return drilling cycle) roughing (CW)
Return from Drilling cycle (stepped Rectangular groove inner
G29 G82 G136
reference position hole boring cycle) finishing (CCW)
2nd, 3rd, 4th,
Rectangular groove inner
G30 reference position G83 Peck drilling cycle G137
finishing (CW)
return
Rectangular outer finishing
G31 Skip function G84 Tapping cycle G138
(CCW)

Cutter Rectangular outer finishing

*G40 G85 Boring cycle G139
compensation (CW)
cancel
Cutter Rectangular continuous
G41 G86 Drilling cycle G140
compensation left drilling (CW)
Cutter Rectangular continuous
G42 G88 G141
compensation right Boring cycle drilling (CCW)

6
 Chapter 1 Programming Fundmentals

Tool length
Arc continuous drilling
G43 compensation + G89 Boring cycle G142
(CW)
direction

Volum e I Program m ing

Tool length
Absolute
G44 compensation – *G90 G143 Arc continuous drilling
programming
direction (CCW)
Tool length
Incremental
*G49 compensation G91
programming
cancel
Note:m ark “ *” m eans initial state.

PLC Codes List

Code Function Code Function Code Function
LD Normal open contact
SET Setting SPE Subprogram end
read
LDI Normal closed
RST Resetting Binary addition
contact read ADDB
OUT Output coil CMP Comparison setting SUBB Binary subtraction
AND Normal open contact
CTRC Counter ALT Alternative output
in series
ANI Normal closed
TMRB Timer DIFU Differential up
contact in series
Normal open contact Binary code
OR CODB DIFD Differential down
in parallel transformation
ORI Normal closed Binary rotational
ROTB MOVE Logical AND
contact in parallel control
ORB Serial block in
MOVN Data copy PARI Parity check
parallel
ANB Parallel block in
DECB Binary decode LBL Program skip numbering
series
first level program
END1 JMPB Jump CALL Subprogram call
end
Second level Subprogram
END2 SP
program end numbering

1.2 Program Execution

1.2.1 Program Execution Sequence
The current program can only be run in automatic mode. GSK980MDa cannot run more than 1
program at the same time, so only one program can be performed at a time. The cursor is ahead of the
first block when a program is opened, and can be moved in EDIT mode. In automatic mode, when the

machine is in stop state, the cycle start signal ( key on the panel or external cycle start signal)
enables the program to be run from the block where the cursor is located. Usually, blocks are executed
in sequence programmed in advanced. Program stops running till M02 or M30 is executed. The cursor

7
 GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual

moves along with program execution. The program execution sequence or state will be changed in
following conditions:

z
Volum e I Program m ing

Program running stops when key or the Emergency Stop button is pressed;

Program running stops when the CNC alarm or PLC alarm occurs;

z When the system is switched in EDIT or MDI mode, program stops running after the current

block is executed. After switching to automatic mode again, when key on the panel is
pressed or external cycle start signal is ON, the program runs from the block where the
cursor is located.

z If the operation mode is switched to MANUAL/MPG/STEP/MACHINE ZERO RETURN

mode when the program is running, the execution dwells;after switching to automatic mode

again, when key on the panel is pressed or external cycle start signal is ON, the
program runs from where it stops.

z The execution dwells when key is pressed or external pause signal is cut off;

program starts running from where it stops when key on the panel is pressed or
external cycle start signal is ON;
z The program dwells at the end of each block when the single block switch is on;after

pressing key or switching on external cycle signal, program continuously runs from
the next block;
z Blocks with mark “/”is skipped when the skip switch is ON.
z The obj ect block is executed when command G65 or macro program skip (GOTO) is
specified.
z When M98 or M9000~M9999 command is performed, the corresponding subprogram or
macro program is called;M99 is executed at the end of the subprogram or macro program,
after returning to the main program, the subsequent block (the one after the block in which
the subprogram is called) is executed. (return to a specified block, if it is commanded by
M99);
z When M99 command is specified in the middle of a main program which is not called by
other programs, the current program is repeatly executed after returning to the head of the
program.

1.2.2 W ord Execution Sequence within Block

When multiple words (such as G, X, Y, Z, F, R, M, S, T,) are in one block, most of M, S, and T
words are interpreted by NC and sent to PLC for processing. Other words are processed by NC
directly. M98, M99, M9000~M9999 and S word (which specify the spindle speed in r/min, m/min) are
directly processed by NC as well.
When G words share the same block with M00, M01, M02 and M30, M words are executed after
G words, and NC sends corresponding signals to PLC for processing.
When the G words share the same block with the M98, M99, M9000~M9999, these M words are
performed by NC after G words (the M signal not sent to PLC).

8
 Chapter 1 Programming Fundmentals

When G words and M, S, T words share the same block, PLC program (ladder diagram)
determines the execution consequence (executed at the same time or G words before M, S, T words).
Refer to the manual from tool builder for relevant words execution sequence.

Volum e I Program m ing

1.3 Basic Axes Increment System
The increment system consists of the least input increment (for input) and least command
increment (for output). The least input increment is the minimum unit for programming moving
distance. The least command increment is the minimum unit for moving the tool on the machine. Both
increments are represented in mm,inches.or deg.
The basic axes herein means X, Y, Z axes. The basic increment system includes IS-B and IS-C
types which can be selected by bit ISC of parameter NO.038.

038 ISC
ISC =1˖The increment system is IS-C(0.1U)˗
=0˖The increment system is IS-B(1U)
In different increment system, different pulse output type enables different output speed.
(Selected by bit ABPx of parameter NO.039)
039 ABP5 ABP4 ABPZ ABPY ABPX
ABPx =1˖The impulse mode of axis is AB phases;
=0˖The impulse mode of axis is impulse and direction.

1.3.1 Speed ofIncrem ent System s

Speed
Output m ode
1 u˄IS-B˅ 0.1u˄IS-C˅
Metric machine Inch machine Metric machine Inch machine
system system system system
(mm/min) (inch/min) (mm/min) (inch/min)
Pulse + direction 60,000 6,000 6,000 600
AB quadrature 240,000 24,000 24,000 2,400
phase

1.3.2 Unit ofIncrem ent System s

In different increment system, the least input/output increment varies with metric/inch system.
The specific data is shown as follows:
1 u˄IS-B˅ Least input Least com m and
increm ent (forinput) increm ent (foroutput)
0.001 (mm) 0.001 (mm)
Metric Metric input (G21)
0.001 (deg) 0.001 (deg)
machine
0.0001 (inch) 0.001 (mm)
system Inch input (G20)
0.001 (deg) 0.001 (deg)
Inch 0.001 (mm) 0.0001 (inch)
Metric input (G21)
machine 0.001 (deg) 0.001 (deg)

9
 GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual

system 0.0001 (inch) 0.0001 (inch)

Inch input (G20)
0.001 (deg) 0.001 (deg)
Volum e I Program m ing

0.1u˄IS-C˅ Least input Least com m and

increm ent (forinput) increm ent (for
output)
0.0001 (mm) Metric machine
Metric input
system
Metric machine (G21)
0.0001 (deg)
system
Inch input 0.00001 (inch)
(G20) 0.0001 (deg)
0.0001 (mm) Inch machine
Metric input
system
Inch machine (G21)
0.0001 (deg)
system
Inch input 0.00001 (inch)
(G20) 0.0001 (deg)
Least input increment (for input) is metric or inch can be set by G20 or G21.
Least command increment (for output) is metric or inch is determined by machine tool and set by
bit SCW of parameter NO.004.

1.3.3 Data Ranges ofIncrem ent System

Limited by pulse output frequency, the data ranges may vary due to different increment system.

Increm ent system Com m and data input ranges Data

form at
Metric input -99999.999 ~ 99999.999 (mm) 5.3
(G21) -99999.999 ~ 99999.999 (deg) 5.3
1 u˄IS-B˅
Inch input -9999.9999 ~ 9999.9999 (inch) 4.4
(G20) -9999.999 ~ 9999.999 (deg) 4.3
Metric input -9999.9999 ~ 9999.9999 (mm) 4.4
(G21) -9999.9999 ~ 9999.9999 (deg) 4.4
0.1u˄IS-C˅
Inch input -999.99999 ~ 999.99999 (inch) 3.5
(G20) -999.9999 ~ 999.9999 (deg) 3.4

Note˖5.3 in the table above indicates 5 integers and 3 decim als.Otherdata are alike.

1.3.4 Data Ranges and Unit ofIncrem ent System

z Speed param eter
Machine tool types decide the units of linear axes speed, i.e. mm/min for metric machine
system is;0.1inch/min for inch machine system.

The range of linear axis speed parameter is codetermined by machine tool type and increment
system.
For example:data parameter NO.070:upper limit of cutting feedrate.

10
 Chapter 1 Programming Fundmentals

Machine Increm ent Linear axis Rotary axis

Param eterrange
tool type system speed unit speed unit
Metric 1 u˄IS-B˅ 10~ 60000

Volum e I Program m ing

machine 0.1u ˄IS-C˅ mm/min
10~ 6000
system
deg/min
Inch 1 u˄IS-B˅ 5~60000
machine 0.1u˄IS-C˅ 0.1inch/min
5~6000
system

As rotary axes are not involved in metric-inch interconversion, the rotation speed unit is always
deg/min.
The switch between different increment systems may cause the excess of permitted running
speed set by data parameter. Therefore, at the first power-on after switching, the system
automatically modifies relevant speed parameters and gives an alarm.

z Increm ent param eter

The unit and range of linear axis speed parameter are codetermined by machine tool type and
increment system.
For example:parameter NO135:X axis software limit.
Machine Increm ent Linear axis Linear axis param eter
tool type system increm ent unit range
Metric 1 u˄IS-B˅ 0.001mm -99,999.999~ 99,999.999
machine 0.1u˄IS-C˅ 0.0001 mm
-9,999.9999~ 9,999.9999
system
Inch 1 u˄IS-B˅ 0.0001inch -9,999.9999~ 9,999.9999
machine 0.1u˄IS-C˅ 0.00001 inch
-999.99999~ 999.99999
system
As rotary axes are not involved in metric-inch interconversion, the rotary axis increment
parameter unit is determined by increment system types. The ranges of rotary axis increment
parameters are the same as that of metric machine tool.

Machine Increm ent Rotation axis Rotation axis

tool type system speed unit param eterrange
Metric, 1 u˄IS-B˅ 0.001deg 0~ 99999.999
inch 0.1u˄IS-C˅ 0.0001 deg
machine
0~ 9999.9999
tool
system

z Coordinate data˄G54̚G59˅
The unit of linear axis coordinate data is determined by metric/inch input system, namely, mm for
metric system, inch for inch system.
The ranges of linear axis coordinate data are codetermined by metric/inch input system and
increment system. It is the same as command data input ranges. Shown as follows:

11
 GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual

Increm ent system Linearaxis coordinate data range

Metric input -99999.999 ~ 99999.999(mm)
(G21)
Volum e I Program m ing

1 u˄IS-B˅
Inch input -9999.9999 ~ 9999.9999(inch)
(G20)
Metric input -9999.9999 ~ 9999.9999(mm)
(G21)
0.1u˄IS-C˅
Inch input -999.99999 ~ 999.99999(inch)
(G20)

As rotary axis is not involve in metric-inch interconversion, the unit of rotary axis coordinate data
is deg. The ranges of rotary axis coordinate data is the same as linear axis coordinate data ranges in
metric system.

Increm ent Rotary axis coordinate data

Input type
system range
Metric, 1 u˄IS-B˅ -99999.999 ~ 99999.999˄deg˅
inch input 0.1u˄IS-C˅ -9999.9999 ~ 9999.9999(deg)

z Tool com pensation data

The unit of tool compensation data is determined by metric/inch input system, namely, mm for
metric input, inch for inch input.
The range of tool compensation data is limited as 9999999, determined by inch input system and
increment system. It is smaller than command data. Shown as follows:

Increm ent Tool Tool

Input type system com pensation com pensation
data unit data range
Metric 1 u˄IS-B˅ ±9999.999
input 0.1u˄IS-C˅ mm
±999.9999
(G21)
Metric 1 u˄IS-B˅ ±999.9999
input 0.1u˄IS-C˅ inch
±99.99999
(G21)

z Screw-pitch errorcom pensation data

The unit and range of linear axis screw-pitch error compensation data is codetermined by
machine tool type and increment system.
Shown as following table:

12
 Chapter 1 Programming Fundmentals

Increm ent Linear axis Linear axis

Machine system screw-pitch error screw-pitch error

Volum e I Program m ing

tool type com pensation data com pensation data
unit range
Metric tool 1 u˄IS-B˅ 0.001mm -255̚255
machine 0.1u˄IS-C˅ 0.0001mm
-2550̚2550
system
Inch tool 1 u˄IS-B˅ 0.0001inch -255̚255
machine 0.1u˄IS-C˅ 0.00001inch
-2550̚2550
system

Rotary axes are not involved in metric-inch conversion. The unit of rotary axes screw-pitch error
compensation is determined by increment system. The range is the same as that of the metric
machine tool.

Machine Increm ent Rotary axis Rotary axis

tool system screw-pitch error screw-pitch error
system com pensation unit com pensation range
Metric, inch 1 u˄IS-B˅ 0.001deg 0̚255
machine 0.1u˄IS-C˅ 0.0001 deg
0̚2550
system

z Graphic setting data

The maximum and minimum data ranges of X, Y, Z set by graph is in accordance with the
command data ranges.

Increm ent system Graphic setting X,Y,Z ranges

Metric input (G21) -99999.999 ~ 99999.999 (mm)
1 u˄IS-B˅
Inch input (G20) -9999.9999 ~ 9999.9999 (inch)
Metric input (G21) -9999.9999 ~ 9999.9999 (mm)
0.1u˄IS-C˅
Inch input (G20) -999.99999 ~ 999.99999 (inch)

1.3.5 The Units and Ranges ofProgram Address Values

z Definition and ranges ofthe pitch ˖

Code 1 ȝ˄IS-B˅ 0.1ȝ˄IS-C˅ Unit

Input in F 0.001~500.000 0.0001~500.00 mm/pitch [lead]
m etric ˄G21˅ I 0.06~25400 0.06~2540 Pitch[lead]/inch
Inch input F 0.0001~50.00 0.00001~50.0 inch//pitch [lead]
˄G20˅ I 0.06~2540 0.06~254 Pitch[lead]/inch

z Speed F definition
G94:feed per minute, F unit:mm/min
G95:feed per rotation, F definition and ranges are as follows:

13
 GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual

1 ȝ˄IS-B˅ 0.1ȝ˄IS-C˅ Unit

Metric input˄G21˅ 0.001~500.000 0.0001~500.0000 mm/revolution
Volum e I Program m ing

Inch input˄G20˅ 0.0001~50.0 0.00001~50.0 inch/revolution

1.4 Additional Axes Increment System

In the least increment system (IS-B or IS-C), under the condition that the additional axes are not
involved in simultaneous control and j ust used for separate motion (such as feeding), and the
requirement for precision is not high, when the least increment is 0.01, the feedrate will be much
faster, greatly increasing the efficiency. Therefore, the additional axes least increment system is not
necessary to be in accordance with the current least increment system. To meet various requirements
of users, the system adds optional function to least increment system.
Additional axes increment system is set by state parameter No.026, No.028. Shown as follows:

026 A4IS1 A4IS0 RCS4 ROS4 ROT4

A4IS1, A4IS0˖Select increment system of 4th.
Increm ent System of4TH Least
A4IS1 A4IS0
input/output
0 0 Same to the X, Y, Z
0 1 IS-A 0.01
1 0 IS-B 0.001
1 1 IS-C 0.0001

028 A5IS1 A5IS0 RCS5 ROS5 ROT5

A5IS1, A5IS0˖Selecte increment system of 5th.
Increm ent System of5TH Least
A5IS1 A5IS0
input/output
0 0 Same to the X, Y, Z
0 1 IS-A 0.01
1 0 IS-B 0.001
1 1 IS-C 0.0001
Note:the least input/output in the table above are described without considering the
m etric/inch system and rotation axes.

1.4.1 Additional Axes in Current Increm ent System

When IS-B or IS-C is selected, the speed and range of additional axes are the same as
described in 1.3.

1.4.2 Additonal Axes in IS-A Increm ent System

When IS-A is selected, the maximum speed of additional axes can reach 100 times of that of
IS-B and IS-C. The relevant data and parameters ranges are the same as that of the current basic
axes increment system. (Refer to section 1.3)

14
 Chapter 2 MSTF Codes

CHAPTER 2 MSTF CODES

2.1 M Codes (Miscellaneous Function)

Volum e I Program m ing

The M codes are composed by code address M and 1~2 or 4 digits after the codes M is used
for controlling the program execution or outputting M code to PLC.
M ƑƑƑƑ
Codes value (00~99, 9000~9999ˈleading zero can be omitted)
Address
M98, M99 and M9000~M9999 are independently processed by CNC, and the M codes are not
output to PLC.
The function of M29 is fixed, namely, to output M codes to PLC.
The M02 and M03 are defined as program END codes by NC, meanwhile it also outputs M codes
to PLC for the I/O control (spindle OFF, cooling OFF control etc.).
The PLC program can not change the meaning of the above-mentioned codes when the
M98, M99 and M9000~M9999 are regarded as program CALL codes and the M02 and M30 are
regarded as program END codes. The codes of other M codes are all output to PLC program for
specifying the code function;please refer to the manual issued by machine tool manufacturer.
One block only has one M code. The CNC alarm occurs when two or more M codes are existed
in one block.
Table 2-1 M code table for program execution
Codes Functions

M02 End-of-Run
M29 Rigid tapping designation
M30 End-of-Run
M98 Subprogram call
Return from the subprogram;the program will be repeatly executed
If the code M99 is used for main program ending (namely, the curren
M99 program is not called by other programs).
M9000̚M9999 Call macro program (Program No. is larger than 9000)

2.1.1 End ofProgram (M02)

Format:M02
Function:The M02 code is executed in the Auto mode. The automatic run is ended after the other
codes of current block are executed;the cursor stops in the block in which the M02 is
located and does not return to the head of the program. If the program is to be
executed again, the cursor should return to the beginning of the program.
Besides the above-mentioned functions processed by CNC, the functions of code M02 also can
be defined by the PLC ladder diagram. The function defined by standard ladder diagram can be:the
current input state of CNC is not change after the code M02 is executed.

2.1.2 Rigid Tapping Designation M29

Format˖M29
Function˖In auto mode, after the execution of M29, the G74, G84 that followed is processed as೼㞾

15
 GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual

rigid tapping codes.

2.1.3 End ofrun (M30)

Volum e I Program m ing

Format:M30
Function:If M30 command is executed in the Auto mode, the automatic run is ended after the
other commands of current block are executed;the system cancels the tool nose radius
compensation and the cursor returns to the beginning of the program when the workpieces
number is added by one (whether the cursor returns to the head of the program is determined
by parameters).
The cursor does not return to the beginning of the program when the BIT4 of parameter No.005 is
set to 0;when it is set to 1, the cursor returns to the beginning of the program as soon as the
program execution is finished.
Besides the above-mentioned functions processed by CNC, the functions of code M30 also
can be defined by the PLC ladder diagram. The function defined by standard ladder diagram can
be: turn OFF the M03, M04 or M08 output signal after the M30 command is executed, and
meanwhile output M05 signal.

2.1.4 Subprogram Call M98

Format˖M98 PżżżżƑƑƑƑ
The called subprogram No.ా0000ሖ9999ి.The leading zero of
subprogram can be omitted when the called times are not input;
the subprogram No. should be 4 digits when the called times is
input;
Called times˄1-9999˅ ˈcalling for once,
the input can be omitted

Function:In Auto mode, when the M98 is executed, the subprogram specified by P is called after the
execution of other codes in the current block. The subprogram can be performed 9999 times at most.
M98 cannot be performed in MDI, or an alarm will occur.

2.1.5 Return from Subprogram (M99)

Format˖ M99 Pżżżż

The block No. (0000̚9999) when return to main program is

executed, the leading zero can be omitted.

Function:(in subprogram) as the other commands of current block are executed, the block specified
by P is performed continuously when the main program is returned. The next
block is performed continuously by calling current subprogram of M98 command when
returning to the main program;because of the P is not given. If the main program is ended
by using the M99 (namely, the current program is not called by other programs for
execution), the current program will be run circularly. So, the M99 command is disabled in
MDI.
Example:Fig. 2-1shows that the execution route of the subprogram is called (the P command within
M99). Fig. 2-2 shows that the execution route of the subprogram is called (the P command
is not in M99.
16
 Chapter 2 MSTF Codes

Volume I Programming
This GSK980MDa can calls quadruple subprogram, namely, the other subprogram can be
called from the
subprogram. (See Fig. 2-3)

17
 GSK980MDa Mi
ll
ing CNC System User Manual

2.1.6 Macro program call (M9000~M9999)

Format ˖ MƑƑƑƑ
9000̚9999
Volume I Programming

Command functi
on:Cal
lthe macro program whi
ch i
s corresponded by the command val
ue
˄O9000̚O9999˅ .
Macro program: Program 09000~09999 i s special space obl igated for the machine tool
manufacturer for usi
ng editi
ng and achi evi
ng specialfunction subprogram,whi ch is cal
led macro
program.Two-l eveloperati
on authority i
sneeded when edi ti
ng the program 09000~09999,the user
can notmodify orrun the macro program butthe macro cal l
ing command i fhi
sauthorityi
s3~5 level
.
So the M9000~M9999 commands are i nvali
din MDImode.

2.1.7 M command defined by standard PLC ladder diagram

The M commands other than the abovementi oned commands (M02, M30, M98,
M99, M9000~M9999) are defi ned by PLC.The M commands are defi ned by standard PLC
hereinafter.This GSK980MDa mi l
li
ng machine is used formachi
ne control.Aboutthe functi
on,
meani ng,controltime sequence and l
ogic etc.ofthe M command,referto the manualissued by
the machi ne toolbui
lder.
M command specifi
ed bystandard PLC l
adderdiagram
Command Function Remark
M00 Program pause
M03 Spi
ndl
e CCW
Functi
on i nterl
ock,
M04 Spi
ndl
e CW
state hol
d
*M05 Spi
ndl
e stop
M08 Cool
ing on Functi
on i nterl
ock,
*M09 Cool
ing off state hol
d

M32 Lubri
cati
ng on Functi
on i nterl
ock,
state hol
d
*M33 Lubri
cati
ng off

Note: The command with “ * ” specified by standard PLC is valid when the power is on.

2.1.8 Program stop M00

Format:M00
Command functi
on: the program is stopped after executi
ng the M00 command, the
“pause” i
s displayed; the program wi
llconti
nue when the key ofCycl
e Starti
s
pressed.

2.1.9 Spindle CCW, CW, stop control(M03, M04 and M05)

Format: M03;
M04;
M05;
Command functi
on:M03:spindle forward rotati
on (CCW );
M04:spindle reverse rotati
on (CW );
M05:spindle stop.

18
 Chapter 2 MSTF Codes

Note: The control time sequence and logic of M03, M04 and M05 are specified by standard
PLC program ,referto the Appendix ofthis m anual.

Volume I Programming
2.1.10 Cooling control (M08, M09)
Format: M08;
M09;
Command functi on:M08:cooling on;
M09:cool
ing off.
Note: The control time sequence and logic of M08 and M09 are specified by standard
PLC
program ,referto the Appendix ofthis m anual.

2.1.11 Lubricating control (M32,M33)

Format:M32;
M33;

Command functi on:M32:l

ubricati
ng on;M33:l ubri
cati
ng off.
Note: The control time sequence and logic of M32 and M33 are specified by standard PLC
program ,referto the Appendix ofthis m anual.

2.2 Spi
ndl
e Functi
on
The spindle speed is control
led by S command,there are two ways to controlspi ndle speed
forGSK980MDa.
Spindle speed switching value controlmode:the SƑƑ (2-di gi
tcommand val ue)command i s
processed by PLC program forexporti ng the swi
tchi
ng val
ue si gnalto machi ne,so thatthe step
speed change ofthe spindl eisachi eved.
Spindle speed analog vol tage controlmode:the actualspi ndle speed is specifi
ed by the
SƑƑƑƑ (4-digitcommand val ue),the NC outputsthe 0~10V analog vol tage si
gnalto the spindle
servo devi
ce orinverterforachi evi
ng the stepl
essspeed regulati
ng ofthe spi ndle.

2.2.1 Spindle Speed Switch Value Control

The spindle speed is on swi
tchi
ng val
ue controlwhen the BIT4 ofbitparameterNO.001 i s setto
0. One block onl y has one S command.The CNC al arm occurs when there are two or more S
commands di splayed in bl
ock.
W hen the S command shares the same bl ock with the command word, the performance
sequence is defined by PLC program.Fordetai ls,referto the manualissued by the machine
tool builder.
This GSK980MDa mi l
li
ng machi ne i
s used for machi ni
ng control when the spindle
speed swi tching value is controll
ed.The time sequence and logic forS command should be
referred by the manualissued by the machi
ne toolbui
lder.The fol
lowi
ng S command i
s defi
ned by
GSK980MDa standard PLC,forreference onl y.

19
 GSK980MDa Mi
ll
ing CNC System User Manual

Command format˖ SƑƑ

00̚04 (the leadi
ng zero can be omi
tted): 1̚4 gears
Volume I Programming

spi
ndl
e speed swi
tchi
ng val
ue control
.
In spi
ndl
e speed switchi
ng val
ue controlmode,the FIN si
gnalis returned afterthe setti
me is
del
ayed afterthe code si
gnalofS command i s sentto PLC.Now the ti
me i s cal
led executi
on ti
me
ofS code.

S code performs Del

ayti
me Subsequentcommand word orbl
ockperforms

The S01,S02,S03 and S04 outputstates are i

nvari
abl
e when the CNC i
s reset.
The S1~S4 commands are i neffecti
ve outputwhen the CNC i s switched on.An arbi trary
command i sperformed from S01,S02,S03 and S04,the correspondi ng S signaloutputiseffective
and held on,atthe same time the other3 S signaloutputare cancel l
ed.The S1~S4 outputare
cancell
ed when performing the S00 command,onl y one ofS1~S4 i
s effecti
ve i
n the meanti
me.

2.2.2 Spindle speed analog voltage control

The spi
ndl
e speed i
s anal
og vol
tage controlwhen the BIT4 ofcurrentbi
tparameteri
ssetto 1

Format˖S OOOO
0000̚9999 (l
eadi
ng zero can be omi
tted):Spi
ndl
e speed anal
og vol
tage
control

Command functi on: The CNC outputs 0~10V anal og vol tage to control the spi ndl e
servo or inverter for achi eving the stepl
essspeed regulati
ng ofthe spi
ndle when the spi
ndl e
speed i
sset.The S command val ue isnotmemori zed when the poweristurned off;and then the
parameterrecovers to 0 when the poweri sturned on.

The CNC owns four mechani cal spindle shifts function. Counti ng the correspondi ng
analog vol tage val ue specifi
ed bythe speed based upon the currentsetval ue (correspondi ng to
data parameterNo.101~No.104)ofthe top speed (outputanal og vol
tage i
s10V)ofthe spi ndle shift
when the S command i s performed,then outputthe voltage val
ue to spindle servo ori nverter,so
thatthe consistency ofactualspeed and requi red speed ofthe spi ndle are controll
ed.
The analog vol tage outputi s 0V when the CNC i s switched on.The outputanal og voltage
val
ue isinvari
able (Unl ess the cutti
ng feed i
n constantl
inearspeed controland the absolute value
ofX axis absolute coordinate value are changed)afterthe S command i s executed.The anal og
vol
tage outputis 0V when the command S0 i s executed.And the anal
og vol tage outputvalue is
i
nvariabl
e when the CNC i s resetoratemergentstop.

The parameterrel
ated to spi
ndl
e speed anal
og vol
tage control
:

20
 Chapter 2 MSTF Codes

Data parameterNo.099:the outputvoltage offsetforspindle top speed (the outputanalog

vol
tage is 0V);Data parameterNo.100:the vol
tage offsetforthe zero spi
ndle speed (the output
analog vol
tage i
s10V);

Volume I Programming
Data parameter No.101~No.104:The top speed for spi
ndl
e 1~4 shi
fts (the outputanal
og
vol
tage i
s 10V);

2.2.3 Spindle override

The spi ndl
e actual speed can be modi fi
ed by usi ng spi ndle override when the
spi
ndl e speed anal og vol tage controlis effecti
ve,the actualspeed modi fi
ed by spi ndl
e overri
de
i
slimi ted by the top speed ofcurrentspi ndle shi ft,and al
so iti
s control
led by the lowestspindl e
l
imitation val
ue and the top spi ndl
el i
mi tati
on val ue in constantl
inearspeed controlmode.
Thi s NC offers 8-levelspindle override (50% ~120% ,the change i s 10% perl evel).The actual
leveland the
modi fi
cati
ve mode of the spi
ndl
e overri
de are defi
ned by PLC l
adderdiagram.Referto the
manuali ssued by the machi ne tool bui lder when attempting to use i t. The
fol
lowing descripti
on i s GSK980MDa standard PLC l
adder di
agram functi
on, for reference
only.
The spi ndle overri
de defined by GSK980MDa standard PLC l adder di
agram has 8
level
s. The spi ndle actualreal
-ti
me speed can be adj
usted by usi
ng the spi
ndl
e overri
de key in
the command speed range of 50% ~120% , the spi ndle override wi l
l be memori zed when
the power i s turned off. Refer to the OPERATION of thi s manual for modi fi
cati
on
operati
on ofthe spi
ndle overri
de.

2.3 ToolFuncti
on
There i
s no toolfuncti
on i
n thi
sCNC system.

2.4 Feedi
ng Functi
on
2.4.1 Cutting feed (G94/G95, F command)

Format:G94F_;(F0001~F8000,l
eadi
ng zero can be omi
tted,forfeedrate permi
nute,mm/mi
n)
Command functi
on: The cutting feedrate i s specifi
ed by mm/mi n, G94 is modal G
command. If the currentmode i s G94 thati
tneedsno G94 anymore.
Format:G95F_;(F0.0001~F500,l
eading zero can be omitted)
Command functi
on:The cutting feedrate is offered by the uni tofmm/rev.,G95 i s modalG
command.The G95 command can be omi tted ifthe currentmode i s G95.W hen
the CNC performs G95 F_, the cutti ng feedrate i s control l
ed by feedrate
command based on the mul ti
plicati
on of F command val ue (mm/rev)
and currentspi ndle speed (rev/mi n).The actualfeedrate vari es wi
th the spindl
e
speed.The spi ndle cutti
ng feedrate perrevol uti
on is specifi
ed by G95 F_,the even
cutti
ng li
ne can be formed on the face ofworkpi ece.Itisnecessaryto installspindl
e
encoderwhen the G95 mode i s operated.

The G94 and G95 are modalG commandsatthe same group,one ofthem i
savai
labl
e onl
y.

21
 GSK980MDa Mi
ll
ing CNC System User Manual

The G94 isi

niti
alstate G command,so,i tdefaults the G94 when the CNC i s switched on.The
fol
lowi
ng bel
ow shows the conversi
on formula offeed val ue perrev.and feed val
ue permi n:
Fm = Fr×S
Volume I Programming

There i
nto:Fm :feed val
ue permi
nute (mm/mi
n);
Fx:feed value perrevol uti
on (mm/r);
S:spindle speed (r/min).
The feedrate val ue is set by the CNC Dat a parameter No.172 when the CNC i s
swi tched on, the F val ue isinvariabl e afterthe F command i s executed.The feedrate i
s0
afterF0 is executed.The F value isinvariabl e when CNC i s resetoratemergentstop.
Note: In G95 mode, the cutting feedrate will be uneven when the spindle speed is less than 1
rev./min. The following error will exist in the actual feedrate when the spindle speed
vibration occurs.
To guarantee the machine quality, it is recommended that the spindle speed selected
in machining is not less than the lowest speed of available torque exported by spindle
servo or inverter.

Cutti
ng feed:The CNC makes toolmovementpath and the path (l inearorci rculararc)defi ned by
command i nto consi stency (The ci rcular i nterpolati
on can be performed by
two axi s i n sel ected pl ane when i ti s circulararc,the hel i
calinterpolation is
formed by the thi rd axisl i
nearinterpolation l
inkage),by whi ch,the CNC control s
three di recti
ons movement for X axi s, Y axi s, Z axi s ,4th axis and 5th axis
at the same ti me. The i nstantaneous speed of movement path i n a
tangential di recti
on i s consistent wi th the F command val ue,so thi sis call
ed
CUTTING FEED or INTERPOLATION. The cutti ng feedrate i s suppl i
ed by F
command, whi ch i t is disassembl ed to each i nterpol
ation axi s accordi ng
to the programmi ng path when the CNC performs the i nterpolati
on command
(cutti
ng feed).

Li
near i nterpolation: The CNC can control the i nstantaneous speed i n the
directi
ons ofX axi s,Y axi s ,Z axi
s ,4th axi
s and 5th axis,so the vectorresul
tant
speed i n these fi
ve directi
onsare equalto the F command val ue.

xF
dx
d x2  d y2  d z2  d 42  d 52
fx

xF
dy
d x2  d y2  d z2  d 42  d 52
fy

xF
dz
d x2  d y2  d z2  d 42  d 52
fz

xF
d4
d x2  d y2  d z2  d 42  d 52
f4

xF
d5
d x2  d y2  d z2  d 42  d 52
f5

22
 Chapter 2 MSTF Codes

Fi
s vectorresul
tantspeed forthe i
nstantaneous speed i
n X,Y and Z axi
sdi
recti
ons

Volume I Programming
The dx i
sinstantaneous i
ncrementofthe X axi
s,the fx i
sinstantaneous speed ofX
axi
s.
The dy i
sinstantaneousi
ncrementofY axi
s,the fyi
sinstantaneousspeed ofY axi
s.
The dz i
sinstantaneous i
ncrementofZ axi
s,the fz i
sinstantaneous speed ofZ axi
s.
The d4 i
sinstantaneous i
ncrementof4th axi
s,the f4 i
sinstantaneous speed of4th
axi
s.
The d5 i
sinstantaneous i
ncrementof5th axi
s,the f5 i
sinstantaneous speed of5th axi
s.

Ci rcul
ari nterpolati
on (heli
cali nterpol
ation):Performing the arc i
nterpol
ation i
n sel ected plane,
the third axi s performs l
ineari nterpolati
on,so the F val ue i
s circul
arinterpolati
on speed.An
interpolation oflinear and circular arc has the fol
lowi
ng relation when the li
neari nterpol
ati
on
speed i s f:

Toolpath

There are 16 level

s feedrate overri
de (0~150% ,10% perl
evel
)are offered by NC.The actual
feedrate seri
es,
the memory performed ornotwhen the power i s turned offand the method ofoverri ding are
defi
ned by PLC l adderdi agram.Refer to the manuali ssued by the machi ne toolbuilder.The
functi
on descripti
on ofGSK980MDa standard PLC l adderdi agram isasfol l
ows,forreference onl y.
real-ti
me modi fi
cati
on forthe cutti
ng feedrate.The actualcutting feedrate can be adj
usted i n the
range ofcommand speed
0~150% ,here,the feedrate is memori zed when the poweri s turned off. How to operate the cutti
ng
feedrate adjustment,referto Chapter3 OPERATION ofthi s manual.

23
 GSK980MDa Mi
ll
ing CNC System User Manual

Rel
ated parameter:
Data parameterNo.070:the upperl i
mitvalue (X axis,Y axi
s,Z axis ,4th axis and 5th axis are
same)ofthe cutti ng feedrate.
Volume I Programming

Data parameterNo.071:the initial(termi

nal)speed ofexponenti alaccel erati
on ordecel erati
on
forcutti
ng feed.
Data parameterNo.072:forexponenti alaccel erati
on ordecelerati
on ti me constantofcutti ng
feed.
Data parameterNo.073:forinitialorterminalspeed ofexponenti alaccel erati
on ordecel erati
on
in manualfeed.
Data parameterNo.074:forexponenti alacceleration ordecelerati
on ti me constantofmanual
feed

2.4.2 Manual feed

Manual feed: This GSK980MDa can perform posi ti

ve/negati
ve movement of X,Y,
Z,4th or5th axi s by the currentmanualfeedrate i n the Manualmode.X axi
s,
Y axis ,Z axi
s ,4th axi
s and 5th axi
s can be moved atone ti me.

This NC offers 16 l
evel s (0~150% ,10% each ti me)manualfeedrate (override),see the fol
lowing
tabl
e 2-2.The actualfeedrate seri es and modifi
cati
on mode orthe like i
n manualfeeding,are defined
by PLC ladder di agram.Refer to t he manualissued by t
he machi
ne t
oolbuil
der
. The funct
i
on descr
i
pti
on of
GSK980MDastandar dPLC ladderdi agram is asfol
lows,forreference only.

Tabl
e 2-2

Feedrate
0 10 20 30 40 0 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150
override(%)

Manual feedrate
0 2.0 3.2 5.0 7.9 12.6 20 32 50 79 126 200 320 500 790 1260
(mm/min)

Note: The manual feedrate of X axis is diameter variation per minute;the feedrate defined
by GSK980MDa standard PLC ladder diagram is memorized when the power is turned off.

Related parameter:
Data parameterNo.073:forspeed lowerli
mi tofaccelerati
on ordecel erati
on i
n manualfeed.
Data parameterNo.074:forexponenti
alaccelerati
on ordecelerati
on ti
me constantin manualfeed.

2.4.3 MPG/Step feed

MPG feed:Thi s GSK980MDa can move positi
vel
y ornegativel
yi n X,Y,Z ,4th or5th axis by
currentincrementi
n the MPG mode.Onlyone ofthe axi
s can be moved atone ti
me.
Step feed:Thi s GSK 980MD can move posi ti
vel
y ornegatively forX,Y,Z ,4th or5th axi
s by
currentincrementi
n the Step mode.One ofthe axi
scan be moved onl yatone ti
me.
Only one mode i
s effecti
ve forthe MPG orstep mode atone ti
me,i
tis up to Bi
t3 ofCNC bi
t
parameterNo.001.
Thi
s NC offers 4 steps (0.001mm, 0.01mm,0.1mm and 1mm) MPG/step i ncrement.The
actualMPG/step i
ncrementseries,the sel
ecti
on ofi
ncrementand currenteffecti
ve axi
s orthe l
ike,
24
 Chapter 2 MSTF Codes

are defi
ned by PLC l
adderdi
agram.Referto the manuali
ssued bythe machi
ne toolbui
lder.
Rel
ated parameter: Data parameter No.073: for i
niti
al or termi
nal speed of exponenti
al
accel
erati
on ordecel
erati
on in manualfeed.

Volume I Programming
Data parameter No.074: for exponenti
al accel
erati
on or decel
erati
on ti
me
constantofmanualfeed.

2.4.4 Automatic acceleration or deceleration

Thi s GSK980MDa performs automati call
y accel erati
on ordecel erati
on i
n orderto achi
eve the
smooth transi ti
on ofthe speed atthe begi nning ofthe axi s movementorbefore the movementstops;
thi
s willdimi nish the i
mpactwhen the movementi s startorstop.Thi s GSK980MDa adopts ki nds of
acceleration ordecel erati
on asfol l
ows:
Rapi d traverse: l inear type front accel eration or
decelerati
on Cutti ng feed: exponenti al type rear
accelerati
on or decel erati
on Manual feed: exponenti al
type rear accel erati
on or decel eration MPG feed:
exponentialtype rear accel erati
on or decel erati
on Step
feed:exponenti altype rearaccel eration ordecel erati
on

W hen the cutti

ng feed i
s performed,thi
s GSK980MDa adopts exponenti
alrearaccel
erati
on or

25
 GSK980MDa Mi
ll
ing CNC System User Manual

decel eration,an arc transiti

on wi llbe formed forthe accel erati
on ordecel erati
on atthe meeting point
ofthe path forthe adj acenttwo cutti ng feed bl ocks,when the BIT5 ofthe bi tparameterNo.007 i s set
to 0. A contour error exi sts between the actualtoolpath and the programmed path when the
Volume I Programming

positioning is notenough accurate atthe meeti ng pointofthe two paths.

In orderto avoid this kind oferror,the exactstop command (G04;)can be i nserted between the
two bl ocks orthe BIT5 ofthe CNC bi tparameter No.007 i s setto 1.Now,the previ ous block is
decel erated to zero speed and i tisposi ti
oned to the end ofthe block,and then the nextcutti
ng feed
block is performed.The fol lowi ng block can be performed because each bl ock is accel erati
ng
from the i niti
al speed and then decel erating to zero at l ast. If the program ti me i s
increasi ng,itmaycause the l owermachi ning effi
ciency.
The SMZ ofbi tparameterNo.007 i s setto 0,the transiti
on between two adj acentbl ocks is
processed accordi ng to the table 2-3.
Tabl
e 2-3
Previous block Rapid Cutting Without
Next block Position feed move
Rapid positioning X X X

Cutting feed X O X

Without move X X X

Note: X: The subsequent block is performed after the previous block is accurately
positioned at the end of the block.
O: Each axis speed is transmitted according to the acceleration or deceleration
between the adjacent blocks;an arc transition is formed at the meeting point of
the tool path.
(Inaccurate posi
ti
oni
ng)

Example (The BIT3 ofthe bi

tparameteri ssetto 0)
G91 G01*-100;(X axi s move negati
vely)
Z-200; (Z axis move negati
vely)
Y-300; (Y axis move negati
vely)

Programmedpat
h

Actualmovementtoolpath

Fi
g.2-12

26
 Chapter3 G Command

CHAPTER3 G COMMAND
3.1 G COMMAND BRIEF

Volume I Programming
The G command i s composed by the command address G and the 1 to 3
digi
ts command val ue after the command G.Many ki nds ofoperations are speci
fi
ed such as
toolmovementrel
ati
ve to workpi
ece,coordi
nate set,etc.See Table 3-1 forG commands.
G ƑƑƑ

Command val
ue (00~143,the l
eadi
ng zero can be omi
tted)

Command addressG

The G command wordscan be cl assi

fi
ed into 12 groupssuch as00,01,02,03,05,06,07,08,09,
10 ,12 and 14.Theyshare the same bl ockexceptfor01 and 00 groups,di fferentgroupsG commands
can be defi ned atthe same block.The l astG command i s val
id when two ormore same group G
commands are i ntroduced at the same bl ock. Di fferent G command groups wi thout common
parameter(command word)can be defi ned atthe same bl ock,and thei
rfunctionsare simultaneously
val
i d regardless ofsequence.Ifthe G command orthe opti onalG command otherthan Tabl e 3-1 i
s
empl oyed,al arm occurs.

Tabl
e 3-1 G command word l
ist
Command word Group Function Remark

G04 Dwel
l,exactstop
G28 Machi
ne zero return
G29 Return from reference poi
nt
G30 2nd,3rd and 4th reference poi
ntreturn
Non-modalG
G31 Ski
p functi
on
00 command
G92 Coordi
nate system set
G65 Macro
G00 (i
niti
alG command) 01 Rapi
d traverse
G01 Li
neari
nterpol
ati
on
G02 Ci
rcul
ari
nterpol
ati
on (CW )
G03 Ci
rcul
ari
nterpol
ati
on (CCW )
G73 Peck dri
ll
ing cycl
e
G74 Left-hand (counter)tappi
ng cycl
e
G80 (i
niti
alG command) Canned cycl
e cancel
lati
on ModalG
G81 Dri
ll
ing cycl
e (spotdri
llcycl
e) command
G82 Dri
ll
ing cycl
e (counterbore cycl
e)
G83 Peck dri
ll
ing cycl
e
G84 Tappi
ng cycl
e
G85 Bori
ng cycl
e
G86 Dri
ll
ing cycl
e
G88 Bori
ng cycl
e

27
 GSK980MDa Mi
ll
ing CNC System User Manual

G89 Bori
ng cycl
e
G110 Ci
rcul
argroove i
nnerrough-mi
ll
ing CW
G111 Ci
rcul
argroove i
nnerrough-mi
ll
ing CCW
Volume I Programming

G112 Ci
rcul
argroove i
nnerfi
ne-mi
ll
ing CW
G113 Ci
rcul
argroove i
nnerfi
ne-mi
ll
ing CCW
G114 Exci
rcl
e fi
nish-mi
ll
ing CW
G115 Exci
rcl
e fi
nish-mi
ll
ing CCW
G134 Rectangl
e groove rough-mi
ll
ing CW
G135 Rectangl
e groove rough-mi
ll
ing CCW
G136 Rectangl
e groove i
nnerfi
nish-mi
ll
ing CW
G137 Rectangl
e groove i
nnerfi
nish-mi
ll
ing CCW
G138 Rectangl
e outerfi
nish-mi
ll
ing CW
G139 Rectangl
e outerfi
nish-mi
ll
ing CCW
G17 (i
niti
alG command) XY pl
ane sel
ecti
on
G18 ZX pl
ane sel
ecti
on ModalG
G19 02 YZ pl
ane sel
ecti
on command
G90 (i
niti
alG command) Absol
ute programmi
ng ModalG
G91 03 Rel
ati
ve programmi
ng command
G94 (i
niti
alG command) Feed permi
nute ModalG
G95 05 Feed perrevol
uti
on command
G20 Data i
nch i
nput Modal power
06 down memori
ze
G21 Data metri
cinput

G40 (i
niti
alG command) Toolnose radi
us compensati
on cancel
lati
on
G41 Toolnose radi
uscompensati
on l
eft ModalG
G42 07 Toolnose radi
uscompensati
on ri
ght command
G43 Tooll
ength offseti
n + di
recti
on
G44 Tooll
ength offseti
n -di
recti
on ModalG
G49 (i
niti
alG command) 08 Tooll
ength offsetcancel
lati
on command
G140 Rectangl
e path seri
all
ypunch CW
G141 Rectangl
e path seri
all
ypunch CCW
G142 Arcpath seri
all
ypunch CW Non-modalG
09 command
G143 Arc path seri
all
y punch CCW
G98 (i
niti
alG command) Return to i
niti
alpl
ane i
n canned cycl
e ModalG
G99 10 Return to R pl
ane i
n canned cycl
e command
G67 (i
niti
alG command) Macro program cal
l ModalG
G66 12 Cancelmacro program cal
l command
G54 (i
niti
alG command) W orkpi
ece coordi
nate system 1
G55 W orkpi
ece coordi
nate system 2
G56 W orkpi
ece coordi
nate system 3
G57 W orkpi
ece coordi
nate system 4
14 ModalG

28
 Chapter3 G Command

G58 W orkpi
ece coordi
nate system 5
G59 W orkpi
ece coordi
nate system 6

Volume I Programming
3.1.1 Modal, non-modal and initial state
The G commands can be setto 12 groups such as 00,01,02,03,05,06,07,08,09,10 ,12
and 14.Therei nto,G commands of00 group are non-modalG commands,thatofotherG group
are modalcommands.G00,G80,G40,G49 ,G67 and G94 are i niti
alG commands.
Afterthe G command i s executed, the functi on defi
ned orstatus i s valid unti
litis changed
by otherG command where i n the same group, thi s kind of command i s called modal G
command. After thi s G command i s performed and before the functi on defi ned or status is
changed, thi s G command need not be i nput agai n when the next bl ock performs thi sG
command.
Afterthe G command i s performed,the functi on defined orstatus i s valid foronce,The G
commandword shoul d be i
nputagai n whi l
e every time the G command i s performed,thi s ki
nd of
command i s called non-modal G command.
The modalG command i s val i
d wi thout performi ng its function or state after the system is
powered on,thi si s caled initial G command.Ifthe G command i
l s notintroduced afterthe poweri s
turned on,then the i ni
ti
alG command i s executed.The i nitialcommands ofGSK980MDa are G00,
G80,G40,G49,G67 and G94.

3.1.2 Examples
Exampl
e1
O0001˗
G17 G0 X100 Y100;ΰMove to G17 plane X100 Y100 at the rapid traverse rate; modal
command G0 and G17 validα
X20 Y30; ΰMove to X20 Y30 at the rapid traverse rate; modal command G0 can be
omittedα
G1 X50 Y50 F300; ΰLinear interpolation to X50 Y50, feedrate is 300mm/min; modal
command G1 valid)
X100; ΰ Linear interpolation to X100 Y50, feedrate is 300mm/min; the Y
coordinate is not input, use current value Y50; keep F300, the modal
command G01 can be omittedα
G0 X0 Y0Ι ΰMove to X0 Y0 at the rapid traverse rate, modal G command G0
validα
M30Ι

Example 2
O0002Ι
G0 X50 Y5Ι ΰMove to X50 Y5 at the rapid traverse rateα
G04 X4Ι ΰTime delay for 4 secondsα
G04 X5Ι ΰTime delay again for 5 secondsΔ
non-modal command G04 should be

29
 GSK980M Da Mi
ll
ing CNC System User Manual

input again˅
M30Ι
Volume I Programming

Example 3: (the first operation after the power

is turned on) O0003Ι
G90 G94 G01 X100 Y100 F500; ΰG94 feed per minuteΔfeedrate is 500mm/minα
G91 G95 G01 X10 F0.01; ΰG95 feed per revolution, input the F value againα
G90 G00 X80 Y50Ι
M30Ι

3.1.3 Related definition

The words or characters which are not specially described in this manual are as follows:
Start point: the position before performing the current block;
End point: the position after performing of the current block;
X: the end point absolute coordinate of X axis for G90, the incremental value of X axis
against current point for G91;
Y: the absolute coordinate of Y axis at the end for G90, the incremental value of Y axis
against current point for G91;
Z: the absolute coordinate of Z axis at the end for G90, the incremental value of Z axis
against current point for G91;
F: Cutting feedrate.

3.1.4 Address definition

Usage of the address in system is as follows:

Address Function Rounding

Value range
-9999.999~9999.999 Decimal
Punching number of 1 and 3rd side for
Absolute value for part
A rectangle serial punch(G140/G141)
negative omitted
4thˈ5th axisˈaxis name address -9999.999~9999.999 Round-off
-9999.999~9999.999 Decimal
Punching number of 2nd and 4th side for
Absolute value for part
rectangle serial punch(G140/G141)
B negative omitted
Radius for arc serially punch (G142/143) -9999.999~9999.999 Round-off
4thˈ5th axisˈaxis name address -9999.999~9999.999 Round-off
-9999.999~9999 Decimal
Punching number for arc serially punch
Absolute value for part
C (G142/143)
negative omitted
4thˈ5th axisˈaxis name address -9999.999~9999.999 Round-off
D Tool radius offset number 0~32 Decimal

30
 Chapter 3 G Command

alarm
E Unused

Volume I Programming
Decimal
G94 feed per minute 0~15000
efficiency
F G95 feed per rotation 0.0001~500 Round-off
Tooth pitch in G74,G84
0.001~500 Round-off
(unit˖G21, mm/r; G20 , inch/r)
G command in Decimal
G G code
system alarm
Length offset number Decimal
0~32
alarm
H
Decimal
Operation command in G65 0~99
alarm
Distance from arc start point to center point
in -9999.999~9999.999 Round-off
X direction
-9999.999~9999.999
G110~G115:radius value of circle Absolute value for Round-off
negative
I
-9999.999~9999.999
G134~G139:width of rectangle in X direction Absolute value for Round-off
negative
0.06~25400
G74,G84˖inch screw˄unit˖tooth/inch˅ Absolute value for Round-off
negative
Distance from arc start point to center point
in -9999.999~9999.999 Round-off
Y direction
G112,G113: distance from start point to -9999.999~9999.999
center point Absolute value for Round-off
negative
-9999.999~9999.999
J G114,G115:distance from start point to circle Absolute value for Round-off
negative
-9999.999~9999.999
G134~G139:width of rectangle in Y direction Absolute value for Round-off
negative
-9999.999~9999.999
G140,G141:length of 2nd side of rectangle Absolute value for Round-off
negative
Distance from arc start point to the
K -9999.999~9999.999 Round-off
center point in Z direction
G110,G111,G134,G135: cutting increment -9999.999~9999.999
in Absolute value for Round-off
XY plane each time negative

31
 GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual

G136~G139: distance from start -9999.999~9999.999

point to rectangle side in X axis direction Absolute value for Round-off
negative
Volume I Programming

-9999.999~9999.999
The length of linear chamfering Absolute value for Round-off
negative
Punching number for linear serial punch (use -9999.999~9999.999 Decimal
L together with the canned cycle punch) Absolute value for part
negative omitted
Decimal
Tool life management, tool life value 0~ 999999 part
omitted
M miscellaneous function Decimal
0~99
alarm
M
M code subprogram call Decimal
9000~9999
alarm
Program number Decimal
0~231
alarm
N
Tool life:tool life unit Decimal
0 or other number
(0-time, non-0 -time) alarm
O Program number 0~9999
Delay time in G04 (ms) -9999999~ 9999999 Decimal
Ignore negative alarm
Decimal
W hat kind of number reference return in G30 2~4 part
omitted
P Skip sequence or alarm number in G65 Decimal
0~9999
alarm
M98 subprogram call (times+program name) Decimal
0~99999999
alarm
Sequence number of M99 subprogram return Decimal
0~9999
alarm
-9999.999~9999.999
Specifying G73 and G83 cut-in value per time Absolute value for Round-off
Q negative
-999999999 Decimal
The value of operation in G65 ~999999999 alarm
Radius value of arc -9999.999~9999.999 Round-off
R plane value of canned cycle command -9999.999~9999.999 Round-off
R
-999999999 Decimal
The value of operation in G65 ~999999999 alarm
Analog spindle Decimal
0~9999
alarm
S
Shift spindle Decimal
0~99
alarm

32
 Chapter 3 G Command

Number of tool 0~32# parameter set Decimal

value alarm
T
Decimal

Volume I Programming
Tool compensation number
0~32
alarm
-9999.999~9999.999
Corner radius value of arc corner Absolute value for Round-off
negative
U
Corner radius value of rectangle -9999.999~9999.999
in G134~G139 Absolute value for Round-off
negative
Distance to unmachined surface, in rapid -9999.999~9999.999
V cut of rough milling command Absolute value for Round-off
G110,G111,G134 and G135 negative
First cutting-in value in Z direction in -9999.999~9999.999
W rough milling command G110,G111,G134 Absolute value for Round-off
and G135 negative

Delay time in G04 (s) -9999.999~9999.999

Absolute value for Round-off
X
negative
X axis coordinate value -9999.999~9999.999 Round-off
Y Y axis coordinate value -9999.999~9999.999 Round-off
Z Z axis coordinate value -9999.999~9999.999 Round-off

3.2 Rapid Positioning G00

Format: G00 X Y Z ;
Function: X, Y and Z axes simultaneously move to end points from start at their rapid traverse
rates. See Fig.
3-1.
Two axes move at their respective speeds, the short axis arrives at the end
firstly, the long axis moves the rest of distance independently, and their
resultant paths are possibly not linear.
Explanation: G00, which is initial G command;
The value ranges of X, Y and Z are indicated as -9999.999~+9999.999mm;
X, Y and Z axes, one of them can be omitted or all of them can be omitted. When one
of them is omitted, it means that the coordinate value of start and end points are
same. The start and end points share the same position when they are omitted at the
same time.

Command path figure:

Tool positions at the rapid traverse rate independently for each axis. Usually, the tool path is not
linear.

33
 GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual
Volum e I Program m ing

X, Y and Z axes are separately set by the system data parameter No.059, No.060
and No.061 at their rapid traverse rate, the actual traverse rate can be modified by the rapid
override keys on the machine panel.
The rapid traverse acceleration or deceleration time constant of X, Y and Z axes are separately
set by the system data parameter No.064, No.065 and No.066.
Example: tool traverses from point A to point B. See Fig.3-2.

G90 G0 X120 Y253 Z30; (absolute coordinate programming)

G91 G0 X160 Y-97 Z-50; ΰrelative coordinate programmingα

3.3 Linear Interpolation G01

Format: G01 X_Y_Z_F_;
Function: Movement path is a straight line from start to end points.

Explanation: G01, which is modal G command;

The value range of X, Y and Z are indicated as -9999.999~+9999.999mm;
X, Y and Z axes which one of them can be omitted or all of them can be omitted.

34
 Chapter 3 G Command

When one of them

is omitted, it means that the coordinate value of start and end points are consistent.

Volume I Programming
The start and end points share the same position when they are omitted at the same
time.
F command value is vector resultant speed of instantaneous rates in X, Y and Z axes
directions, the actual feedrate is the product of override and F command value;
F command value is invariable after it is performed till the new one is executed. The
following G
command with F command word uses the same function.

The value range is indicated as follows:

Command function G94 (mm/min) G95 (mm/rev)

Value range 1~15000 0.001~500

Command path figure:

The linear interpolation is performed from point O to point A: G01 X Į Yȕ ZȖ F
f ˗

The feedrate specified by F is the tool movement speed along the line. The speed of each axis
is as follows:

Note: The F initial default value is set by data parameter No.172 when the power is turned on.

35
 GSK980MDa Mi
ll
ing CNC System User Manual

3.4 Arc and Helical Interpolation G02,G03

Form at˖
Volum e I Program m ing

Circular interpolation:
Arc in the XY plane:
G02 R__
G17 X__ Y__ F__
G03 I__ J__

Arc in the XZ plane:

G02 R__
G18 X__ Z__ F__
G03 I__ K__

Arc in the YZ plane:

G02 R__
G19 Y__ Z__ F__
G03 J__ K__

Helical interpolation
Arc interpolation in XY plane,Z axis linear interpolation linkage;
G02 R__
G17 X__ Y__ Z__ F__
G03 I__ J__

Arc interpolation in XZ plane,Y axis linear interpolation linkage;

G02 R__
G18 X__ Z__ Y__ F__
G03 I__K__

Arc interpolation in YZ plane,X axis linear interpolation linkage;

G02 R__
G19 Y__ Z__ X__ F__
G03 J__ K__

Function: Only two axes of circular interpolation can be linked for controlling tool movement
along with the arc on the selected plane in any time. If the 3rd axis is specified simultaneously in
linear interpolation mode, it will be linked by linear interpolation type to constitute helical
interpolation. G02 movement path is CW from start to end points. G03 movement path is CCW
from start to end points.
.

36
 Chapter 3 G Command

Explanation:

Volume I Programming
G02 and G03 are modal G commands;
R is arc radius,the value range are indicated as -9999.999̚9999.999mm;
W hen the circle center is specified by address I,J and K,they are corresponding with
the X,Y and Z axes separately.

I is the difference between the center point and the arc start point in the X axis
direction, I= center point coordinate X- X coordinate of arc start point; the
value range are indicated as -9999.999̚9999.999mm;

J is the difference between the center point and the arc start point in the Y axis
direction, J=center point coordinate Y- Y coordinate of circle arc start
point; the value range are indicated as -9999.999̚9999.999mm;

K is the difference between the center point and circle start point in the Z axis direction,
K=center point coordinate Z- Z coordinate of circle start point;the value range are
indicated as -9999.999̚9999.999mm.
Note W hen I, J and K are for whole-circle that they have signs according to the
direction. And they are positive values when I,J and K share the same directions with X,Y
and Z axes;otherwise they are negative ones.

Item Specified content Command Meaning

G17 Specifying XY plane arc
G18 Specifying ZX plane arc
1 Plane specification G19 Specifying YZ plane arc
G02 CW
2 Rotating direction G03 CCW
End point in the part
G90 mode Two axes of X,Y and Z
End point coordinate system
3
G91 mode Two axes of X,Y and Z Distance from start to end points
X axis distance from start point to the
I center point (with sign)
Y axis distance from start point to the
Distance from start point J center point(with sign)
to circle center point Z axis distance from start point to the
4 K center point (with sign)
Arc radius R Arc radius
5 Feedrate F Feedrate along the arc

“Clockwise” and “Counterclockwise” are defined when XY plane(ZX plane, YZ

plane) is viewed in the positive-to-negative direction of the Z axis (Y axis,X axis) in the
Cartesian coordinate system,see the following figure:

37
 GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual
Volume I Programming

The end point of an arc is specified by using the address X, Y or Z, and

is expressed as an absolute or incremental value according to G90 or G91. The
incremental value is the distance value from start to end points of an arc. The arc center is
specified by address I, J and K against the X, Y and Z respectively. The
numerical value following I, J and K, however, is a vector component from start
point of an arc to the center point, which is an incremental value with sign. See the
following figure:

The F command is circular interpolation rate in helical interpolation, in

order to achieve the linkage interpolation between linear axis and arc, the speed
of linear interpolation by the 3rd axis has the following relationship to the F command:

Helical interpolation path is as follows:

38
 Chapter 3 G Command

Volume I Programming
I,J and K have signs according to the direction. The circular center also can be specified by
radius R other than I,J and K,as follows:
G02 X_ Y_ R_ ;
G03 X_ Y_ R_ ;

Now,the following two arcs can be described,one arc is more than 180°,the other is less than
180°. The arc radius which is less than 180°is specified by the positive value;the arc radius which is
more than 180°is specified by the negative value. The radius is either positive or negative when the
arc command is equal to 180°.

(Example)Arc ķ less than 180°

G91 G02 X60.0 Y20.0 R50.0 F300.0;
Arc ĸ more than 180°
G91 G02 X60.0 Y20.0 R-50.0 F300.0;

39
 GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual

(Example for the programming)

Volume I Programming

To program the above paths using the absolute mode and incremental mode respectively:

(1)Absolute mode
G92 X200.0 Y40.0 Z0 ˗
G90 G03 X140.0 Y100.0 I-60.0 F300.0 ˗
G02 X120.0 Y60.0 I-50.0 ˗
Or G92 X200.0 Y40.0 Z0 ˗
G90 G03 X140.0 Y100.0 R60.0 F300.0 ˗
G02 X120.0 Y60.0 R50.0 ˗

(2)Incremental mode
G91 G03 X-60.0 Y60.0 I-60.0 F300.0 ˗
G02 X-20.0 Y-40.0 I-50.0 ˗
Or G91 G03 X-60.0 Y60.0 R60.0 F300.0 ˗
G02 X-20.0 Y-40.0 R50.0 ˗

The feedrate of circular interpolation is specified by F command;it is the speed of the tool along
the arc tangent direction.
Note 1:I0,J0 and K0 can be omitted;but,it is very necessary to input one of the addresses I,J,
K or R,or the system alarm is generated.
Note 2: The X,Y and Z can be omitted simultaneously when the end and start points share
same position. W hen the center point is specified by address I,J and K,it is a 360°arc.
G02 I_; (Full circle)
The circle is 0°when using R.
G02 R_; (not move)
It is recommended that programming uses R. In order to guarantee the
start and end points of the arc are consistent with the specified value,the system
will move by counting R again according to the selected plane,when programming using
the I,J and K.

40
 Chapter 3 G Command

Volume I Programming
Plane selection Count the radius R value again
G17 R I2  J2
G18 R I2  K2
G19 R J2  K2

Note 3: The error between the actual tool feedrate and the specified feedrate is ±2% or less.
The command speed is movement speed after tool radius offset along the arc.
Note 4: The R is effective when address I,J and K are commanded with the R,but the I,J and
K are disabled at one time.
Note 5: The axis not exists is specified on the set plane,the alarm occurs.
Note 6: If the radius difference between start and end points exceeds the permitted
value by parameter (No.100),a P/S alarm occurs.

3.5 Dwell G04

Format: G04 P_ ;or

G04 X_ ;

Function: Axes stop,the current G command mode and the data,status are invariable,
after delaying time specified,the next block will be executed.
Explanation: G04,which is a non-modal G-command;

G04 delay time is specified by command words P_,X_;

See the following figure table for time unit of P_ and X_ command value:

Address P X
Unit 0.001 s s
Available In 0̚9999999 0~9999.999

Note:
z X can be specified by the decimal but P not, or the alarm will be generated.
z When the P and X are not introduced or they are negative value, it
means exact stop between the
z The P is effective when the P and X are in the same block.
z The operation is held on when feeding during the G04 execution. Only
the delay time execution is finished, can the dwell be done.

41
 GSK980MDa Mi
ll
ing CNC System User Manual

3.6 Pl
ane Sel
ecti
on Command G17,G18 and G19
Format˖
Volume I Programming

G17 … … XY pl
ane
G18 … … ZX pl
ane
G19 … … YZ pl
ane

Function˖The pl
ane ofarci
nterpol
ati
on and toolradi
uscompensati
on are chosen byusi
ng the G
code
Explanation˖G17, G18 and G19 are modal G commands, the pl
ane wi
ll not be
changed when a blockwi
thoutanycommand i
nsi
de.
Command example˖
G18 X_ Z_ ˗ ZX pl
ane
X_ Y_ ˗ i
nvari
abl
e pl
ane (ZX pl
ane)
Note:
Note 1: The plane selection command can share the same block with other group G
commands.
Note 2: The move command is regardless of the plane selection. For example, the Z
axis is not On XY plane, the Z axis movement is regardless of the XY plane in command G17
Z_ .
G17 Z_ ˗

3.7 Conversi
on ofInch and Metri
cG20 and G21

Format˖
G20/G21˗

Function: The i
nputuni
tei
theri
nch ormetri
cis chosen byG code.
Explanation˖

Uni
tsystem G codes Mi
n. setuni
t
Metri
c G20 0.0001 i
nch
Inch G21 0.001 mm

The G code shoul d be placed i

n frontofthe program when inch and metri
cis swi
tched each
other. Before the coordi
nate system i
s set,i
tisspeci
fied bya si
ngl
e bl
ock command.
The fol
lowi
ng uni
tsystems varyaccordi
ng to the G code fori
nch ormetri
cconversi
on.
(1)Feedrate command val
ue byF.
(2)Command val
ue rel
ated to the posi
ti
on.
(3)Offset.
(4)1 scal
e val
ue forMPG.
(5)Step amountval
ue.
(6)currentcoordi
nate val
ue.

42
 Chapter3 G Command

Note 1: The G code for inch or metric conversion when the power is turned on is the same as
that at the power off.
Note 2: Changing G20 and G21 are unallowed during programming. Or the alarm occurs.

Volume I Programming
Note 3: When the unit systems between the machine and input are different, the max. error is
0.5 of the min. move unit;and the error is not be cumulated.
Note 4: As the inch input (G20)and the metric input (G21)switches each other, the offset
should be suited to the reset of the input unit.

3.8 Reference Poi

ntReturn G28
Format: G28 X_ Y_ Z_;
Function: The mi ddle pointposi
ti
on specifi
ed by X,Y and Z i s reached from the
startpointatthe rapid traverse rate,then i
treturns to the reference
point.
Explanation: G28 i s a non-modalG-command;
X: The absol ute coordinate of mi ddle point i n X axi s i s indi
cated
by G90, the mi ddl
e poi nt i
ncrement against current point i
n X axisis
i
ndicated byG91;
Y: The absol ute coordinate of mi ddl
e poi nt i n Y axi s i s indi
cated
by G90, the mi ddle point increment against current point i
n Y axisis
i
ndicated byG91;
Z: The absol ute coordinate of mi ddl
e poi nt in Z axi s i s indi
cated
by G90, the mi ddle point increment against current point i
n Z axisis
indicated byG91.
One ofthe command address X,Y and Z orallofthem can be omitted,as fol
lows:

Command Fun
G28 3 axeshol
d on atthe i
niti
alposi
ti
on,the nextbl
ock conti
nued.
G28 X X axi
s reference poi
ntreturn,Y and Z axes sti
lli
n the ori
ginalposi
ti
on
G28 Y Y axi
s reference poi
ntreturn,X and Z axes sti
lli
n the ori
ginalposi
ti
on
G28 Z Z axi
s reference poi
ntreturn,X and Y axes sti
lli
n the ori
ginalposi
ti
on
G28 X Z X and Z axes reference poi
ntreturn si
mul
taneousl
y,Y axi
sin the ori
gina
G28 X Y X and Y axes reference poi
ntreturn si
mul
taneousl
y,Y axi
sin the ori
gina
G28 Y Z Y and Z axes reference poi
ntreturn si
mul
taneousl
y,X axi
sin the ori
gina
G28 X Y Z X,Y and Z reference poi
ntreturn si
mul
taneousl
y

Process for command action (See the fi

gure 3-10):
(1) Posi ti
oning from current posi ti
on to intermedi
ate point of command axi s at the
rapid traverse rate (From poi ntA to B)
(2)Posi ti
oning to the reference poi
ntfrom i
ntermediate poi
ntatthe rapi
d traverse rate (From
pointB to R)
(3)Ifthe machi ne tooli
s unl
ocked,the zero return i
ndi
catorl
ights up when the reference poi
nt
return i
s fi
nished.
43
 GSK980MDa Mi
ll
ing CNC System User Manual
Volume I Programming

Note˖
z After power-on, i f G28 i s executed pri or to the manualmachi ne zero return, the
process ofG28 machi ne zero return shoul d be consi stentwi th manualmachi ne zero
return,and the decel eration si gnaland one-rotati on signalshoul d be detected. The
G28 machi ne zero return hereafter wi ll not detect the decel erati
on signal and
one-rotati on signal ,butdi rectly posi ti
on to zero point.
z Duri ng the process ofpoi ntAĺB and BĺR,the two axes move attwo i ndependent
speeds,therefore,the pathsmaynotbe l inear.
z Afterthe executi on ofG28 machi ne zero return,the bi t7 ofparameterNo.22 deci des
whethercancelcuttercompensati on ornot.
z In compensati on mode, i f command G28 i s speci fi
ed, the compensati on wi ll be
cancel led in the i ntermedi ate poi nt. The compensati on mode iscancel l
ed automatical l
y
afterreference poi ntreturn.
z Ifzero poi ntswi tch is notequi pped on the machi ne tool ,G28 command and machi ne
zero return are di sabled.
z The i ntermedi ate poi nt can onl y be establ ished duri ng the movement from the
intermedi ate poi ntto the reference poi ntwhi ch isfollowed the movementfrom the start
poi ntto the i
ntermedi ate poi nt.
z Afterthe modi fication ofparameters whi ch setthe zero return poi nt,manualreference
poi ntreturn is necessary;G28 command can be executed l ater.

3.9 Return from Reference Poi

ntG29
Format: G29 X_ Y_ Z_;
Function: W hen a rapi
d traverse i
s performed from the currentpointto mid poi
nt,i
tposi
ti
ons to
the speci
fi
ed positi
on byX,Y and Z atthe rapi d traverse rate.
Explanation:
X: The absol ute coordinate ofaim poi ntin X axi si si ndicated by G90;the ai m
pointi
ncrementagai nstthe mid pointin X axisisi ndi cated byG91;
Y: The absol ute coordinate ofaim poi ntin Y axisisi ndi cated by G90;the ai
m poi nt
incrementagai nstthe mid pointin Y axisisi ndicated byG91;
Z: The absol ute coordi
nate ofai m pointi n Z axisisi ndicated by G90;the aim poi nt
incrementagai nstthe mid pointin Z axisisindicated byG91;
One ofthe command addressX,Y and Z oral lofthem can be omi tted,see the fol
lowi
ng figure:

44
 Chapter3 G Command

Command Functi

Volume I Programming
G29 X,Y and Z axesare i
n the ori
ginalposi
ti
on,the nextbl
ock conti
nued
G29 X Onl
yX axi
sperformsthe command returni
ng from the reference poi
nt
G29 Y Onl
yY axi
sperformsthe command returni
ng from the reference poi
nt
G29 Z Onl
y Z axi
s performs the command returni
ng from the reference poi
nt
G29 X Z Onl
yX and Z axesperform the command returni
ng from the reference poi
nt
G29 X Y Onl
y X and Y axes perform the command returni
ng from the reference poi
nt
G29 Y Z Onl
yY and Z axesperform the command returni
ng from the reference poi
nt
G29 X Y Z X,Y and Z perform the command returni
ng from the reference poi
nt

Process for command action:

(1)The command axi s di

rection performs posi
ti
oni
ng atthe i
ntermedi
ate poi
ntspeci
fi
ed by
G28 (from poi
ntR to B),the acti
on i
s ķĺĸ.
(2)The posi ti
oni
ng is performed from i
ntermedi
ate pointto specifi
ed point(from poi
ntB to C),
movi
ng to the i
ntermedi
ate and command poi ntata rapi
d feedrate,the acti s Ĺĺĺ.
on i

Note:
Note 1:G29 is specified after G28, if an intermediate point is not specified by any of axes, the
system alarm will be generated.
Note 2: It is incremental distance against the intermediate point in G91 coordinate
programming.
Note 3: Current position is reference point when the G29 command is followed to G28 or
G30, it returns from reference point directly; or, it returns from current position if G29
command is not followed by G28 or G30.

3.10 The 2nd,3rd and 4th Reference Poi

ntReturn G30
Reference pointis a fi
xed pointon the machi ne. By parameters (145#-~164#)i
tcan setfour
reference poi
nts i
n the machi ne coordi
nate system.

45
 GSK980MDa Mi
ll
ing CNC System User Manual
Volume I Programming

Format˖
G30 P2 X_ Y_ Z_ ;the machi
ne 2nd reference pointreturn (P2 can be omi
tted)
G30 P3 X_ Y_ Z_ ;the machine 3rd reference poi
ntreturn
G30 P4 X_ Y_ Z_ ;the machi
ne 4th reference pointreturn
Function: From the startpoint,afterthe i
ntermedi
ate poi
ntby X,Y and Z is reached ata rapid
traverse rate,the machi ne 2nd,3rd and 4th reference points are returned. The
command word P2 can be omi ne 2nd reference poi
tted when the machi nt i
s
returned.
Explanation: G30,whi
ch i
s a non-modalG-command;
X: X axi
scoordi
nate fori
ntermedi
ate poi
nt;
Y: Y axi
scoordi
nate fori
ntermedi
ate poi
nt;
Z: Z axi
scoordinate fori
ntermedi
ate poi
nt;
One ofthe command address X,Y and Z orallofthem can be omi
tted,see the
fol
lowi
ng fi
gure:

Command Function
G30 Pn X Machi ne nth reference poi
ntreturn forX axi
s,Y and Z axes i
n
the ori
ginalposi
tion
G30 Pn Y_ Z_ Machi ne nth reference poi
ntreturn forY and Z axes,X axi
sin
the ori
ginalpositi
on
G30 3 axes i
n the ori
ginal posi
ti
on, the next
block

G30 Pn X_ Y_ Z _ X, Y and Z axes return to the machi

ne nth
reference

Note 1:n is 2, 3 or 4 in above table;

Note 2: Deceleration and zero signals check are not needed when the machine 2nd,
3rd and 4threference points are returned to.

46
 Chapter3 G Command

Command action process (see the fol

lowi
ng fi
gure,an i ne 2nd reference
nstance ofmachi
poi
ntreturn):

Volume I Programming
(1)Posi ti
oning to i ntermediate poi
ntofthe specifi
ed axis from currentposi
ti
on ata rapi d
traverse rate (from poi
ntA to pointB);
(2)Posi ti ng to the 2nd reference posi
oni ti
on setby data parameterNo.94 and No.96 atthe
setti
ng speed bydata parameterNo.150 and No.152 (from poi
ntB to poi
ntR2)

(3)W hen the reference pointreturns i

fthe machine i
s unl
ocked,the Bi
t0 and Bi
t1 ofthe
reference pointreturni
ng end signalZP21 are HIGH.

Note 1: After returning the machine reference point by manual or the G28 command is
performed, the machine 2nd, 3rd and 4th reference point return function can be
employed only, or the 2nd, 3rd and 4th reference point operation of G30 command ,
the system alarm will be generated.
Note 2: From point A to B or from point B to R2, the 2 axes are moved at their separately rate,
so the path is not straight line possibly.
Note 3: After machine 2nd, 3rd and 4th reference point returned by the G30 command, the
system tool length compensation cancellation is defined by bit 7 of the parameter
No.22.
Note 4: The 2nd, 3rd and 4th reference point operation of G30 command can not be
executed if the zero switch is not installed on the machine tool.
Note 5: The workpiece coordinate system is set after the machine 2nd, 3rd and 4th reference
point are returned.

3.11 Ski
p Functi
on G31
As G01 l i
nearinterpolati
on is performed,i fan externalSKIP si gnali
s vali
d during execution of
thi
s command,executi on ofthis command i si nterrupted and the nextblock i
s executed. The ski p
functi
on is used when the end ofmachi ning i
s notprogrammed butspeci fi
ed with a si
gnalfrom the
machi ne,forexampl e,in gri
nding. Iti
s used also formeasuri ng the di
mensions ofa workpiece.
Format˖
G31 X__ Y__ Z__
Explanation˖
1. G31,whi
ch i
sa non-modalG-code,i
tiseffecti
ve onl
yin the bl
ocki
n whi
ch i
tisspeci
fi
ed.
2. G31 can notbe speci
fi
ed i
n the toolcompensati
on C and chamferi
ng,orthe al
arm wi
ll
47
 GSK980MDa Mi
ll
ing CNC System User Manual

be generated. It is very necessary to cancel the tool compensati on C and

chamfering firstl
y before the G31 command i sspeci fi
ed.
3. Errori
sall
owed i n the positi
on ofthe toolwhen a skip signalisi
nput.
Volume I Programming

Signal˖The SKIP si
gnali nputison the fixed address X1.0 (XS40-9).
Parameter˖
0 1 3 SKPI G31P
SKIP 1: HIGH l
evelSKIP i
s val
id;
0: LOW l
evelSKIP i
s val
id.
G31P 1: G31 i
s fori
mmedi
ate stop as the SKIP si
gnali
sval
id;
0: G31 i
s fordecel erati
ng stop asthe SKIP si
gnali
sval
id.
1. The next block to G31 is incremental command 1: i t moves wi
th i
ncremental
value from the posi
tion i
nterrupted bythe skip si
gnal.
Exampl
e: G31 G91 X100.0 F100 ˗
Y50.0 ˗

ᅲ䰙⿏ࡼ

2. The next block to G31 is absolute command for one axis: The command
axis moves to the speci
fi
ed posi
ti
on,and the axi
snotspeci
fi
ed keepsatthe ski
p si
gnali
nput
positi
on.
Exampl
e: G31 G90 X200.0 F100 ˗
Y100.0 ˗

3. The next block to G31 is absolute command for 2 axes:W hereverthe ski
p si
gnali
nputi
s,
the toolmovesto speci fi
ed positi
on ofnextbl ock.
Exampl
e: G31 G90 X200.0 F100 ˗
X300.0 Y100.0 ˗

48
 Chapter3 G Command

Volume I Programming
3.12 ToolNose Radi
usCompensati
on C (G40,G41 and G42)
Format:
G17 G41
G18 D__
G42
G19

Functions˖
Toolnose radi
uscompensati
on functi
on
To cancelorperform the toolradius compensati
on vectorby usi
ng the commands G40,G41
and G42. They are combi ned wi th the commands G00, G01, G02 and G03 for
specifyi
ng a mode whi ch can be confi rmed the compensati on vector val
ue, di
recti
on
and the di
recti
on oftoolmovement.

G codes Functions
G40 Toolradi
us compensati
on cancel
lati
on
G41 Toolradi
us l
eftcompensati
on

G42 Toolradi
us ri
ghtcompensati
on

G41 or G42 drives the system i

nto compensati
on mode; G40 cancel
s the system
compensati
on mode.
Explanation˖
z Compensati
on pl
ane
The compensation pl
ane can be confi rmed based upon pl
ane sel
ecti
on command;
the tool compensati
on C iscal
cul
ated i
n thi
splane.

Plane selection Plane compensation

G17 XˉY pl
ane
G18 ZˉX pl
ane
G19 YˉZ pl
ane

z Compensati
on val
ue (D code)
This system can be setfor32 compensati on values atmost. Two digits speci
fi
ed by D code
i
n the program,i scall
ed seri
alnumberofcompensati on value,the compensation value shoul
d be set
byMDI/LCD uni t.
D code determi nes the compensati on value in tool offset page according to the bit 1 of
parameterNo.003,i tis veryimportantto noti
ce thatthe val
ue applied i
sdiameterorradi us.

49
 GSK980MDa Mi
ll
ing CNC System User Manual

Setti
ng range ofcompensati
on val
ue i
sasfol
lows:

Mi
ll
imeterInput
˄mm˅ Inch i
nput˄i
nch˅
Volume I Programming

Compensati
on val
ue 0̚+9999.999mm 0̚+999.999 inch

z Compensati on vector
The compensati on vectoris two-di mensi onalvector;i tis equalto the compensati on val ue
specifi
ed wi
th D code. The compensati on vectori s calcul ated in controlunit,its di
recti
on i
s real-ti
me
modified al
ong wi th the toolpath i n each bl ock. You can cal cul
ate how much compensati on is
needed for toolmovementwhen the compensati on val ue is appli
ed in cont
rolunit. Compensati on
path (tool center path) = programmed path ǂҏt ҏ ool radi us (or di ameter) (determi ned by
compensation direction).
Note:
z Compensati on operation i s executed i n the pl ane sel ected by G17,G18,G19. For
exampl e,when XY pl ane i s selected,(X,Y)or(I,J)i s used to carry outcompensati on
operation and vector operati on. The coordi nate val ue whose axi sin not in the
compensati on pl
ane is notaffected bythe compensati on.
z In 3-axi sl i
nkage control ,compensati on onl y performed forthe toolpath proj ected on
the compensati on plane.
z The al teration of compensati on pl ane shoul d be executed posteri or to the
compensati on mode cancel l
ed. Otherwi se,the system wi l
lgive an alarm and machi ne
stops.
z W hen the cutter compensati on is cancel l
ed by G40, movement amount shoul d be
specified,otherwi se,an al arm wi l
loccur.
z In the canned cycl e G codes,G40,G41,G42 codesare di sabled.

50
 Chapter3 G Comm and

Volume I Programming
Example :
Block (1)is named start;the compensation cancel l
ation mode becomes compensation mode by
G41 in this block. Atthe end ofthis block,toolcenteris compensated in the direction thattool
radius is verticalto nextprogram path (From P1 to P2). Toolcompensation val ue is specified
with D07, so set the compensation number to 7, then the G41is indicated with toolpath
compensation l eft.
After the compensation begins, tool path compensation performs automatically when creating the
workpiece as P1ĺP2……P8ĺP9ĺP1.
N00 G92 X0 Y0 Z0˗
N01 G90 G17 G00 G41 D7 X250.0 Y550.0 ˗ ˄The compensation val
ue shoul
d be
pre-set with compensation number˅
N02 G01 Y900.0 F150 ˗
N03 X450.0 ˗
N04 G03 X500.0 Y1150.0 R650.0 ˗
N05 G02 X900.0 R-250.0 ˗
N06 G03 X950.0 Y900.0 R650.0 ˗
N07 G01 X1150.0 ˗
N08 Y550.0 ˗
N09 X700.0 Y650.0 ˗
N10 X250.0 Y550.0 ˗
N11 G00 G40 X0 Y0 ˗

51
 GSK980MDa Mil
ling CNC System User Manual

3.13 ToolLength Compensation (G43,G44,G49)

G17 G43
Volume I Programming

Function˖
G18 H__
G44
G19

Tooll
ength compensation function.

Explanation˖
G43 and G44 are modalG codes;theyare effective before meeting otherG codesin the
same group.

The end point specified by Z axis moves an offset val ue, as above figure G17
plane is sel ected. Difference between supposed and actualmachined toollength val
ue ispre-setat
the offset storage when the program is appl ied. Different l
ength tool can be empl oyed by
changing tool l ength compensation val ue, so, program change is notneeded.
Differentoffsetdirections were specified by G43 and G44,the offsetnumberis specified by H
code.

Offsetaxis
The offsetaxes are verticalto the specified pl
anes (G17,G18 and G19)
Specifying pl
ane Offsetaxes
G17 Z axis
G18 Y axis
G19 X axis
Toolposition offsetfortwo ormore axes can be used to specify the offsetaxis and the offset
axis changed by 2~3 blocks
(Exampl
e)X and Y axes compensation
G19 G43 H_ ;… X axis offset
G18 G43 H_ ;… Y axis offset,composed with the previous bl
ock,X and Y axes are
compensated.

52
 Chapter3 G Command

Offsetdirection

Volume I Programming
G43: Positive offset
G44: Negative offset
Compensation axes can be regarded as Z, Y and X. Either absol ute or
incremental command, the end pointcoordinate val ue specified by Z axis movementcommand
in program adds the offsetspecified by H codes in G43 (setin the offsetstorage),orsubtracts the
offsetspecified byH code in G44,final l
y,the val
ue calculated isregarded asthe end pointcoordinate.
The fol
lowing command is indicated forZ axis move omitting:W hen the offsetis positive,G43 is
foran offsetin the positive direction;G44 is foran offsetin the negative direction.
Itreversel
ymoveswhen the offsetisnegative val
ue.

Specifying the offset

An offset number is specified by H code and its corresponding offset adds
or subtracts Z axis movement command val ue in program to get a new Z axis movement
command val ue. The offsetnumberisH00~H32.
Offsetvalue corresponded with offsetnumberis pre-setin the offsetstorage by using the
panelofLCD/MDI. Setting range foroffsetis as fol
lows:
Millimeter input˄mm˅ Inch input˄inch˅
Offset -9999.999̚+9999.999 -999.9999̚+999.9999

Offsetnumber00,i.e. H00 corresponds to the 0 offset. Itis disabl

ed to setoffsetval
ue to H00.

Tool length compensation cancellation

G49 orH00 can be specified when the toollength compensation is cancel led. W hen two or
more axes compensations are cancell
ed,al lofthe axes compensation wil lbe cancelled ifthe G49
is appl
ied. Compensation val
ue ofthe verticalaxis forcurrentl
y specified pl
ane is cancel led with
H00. AfterG49 orH00 isspecified,the system immediatelycancel sthe compensation val ue.
Note:
1. In the bl
ock thattoollength compensation is specified,G02ˈG03,G04,G92 and G31 cannotbe
specified atthe same time,otherwise,an alarm willoccur.
2. Tooll ength compensation command can be specified in the bl ock in which canned cycl e is
specified. Butafterthe canned cycl
e is executed,the toollength compensation is disabl
ed and is not
modal .

Example˖

Normal Modal Expl

anation (H1=10.0mmˈH2=20.0mm)
G43 H1 Setting H1,toollength compensation in the positive
G44 G01 X50 Y50 Z50 direction.
G43 H1
H2 Linear interpolation, setting H2 tool l ength
G44 H2
G90 G00 X100 Y100 compensation in negative direction
G44 H2
Z100 Position to X100 Y100 Z100(Z80) with H2
compensation offset.

53
 GSK980MDa Mil
ling CNC System User Manual

In the same bl
ockwith G02,G03,G04,G31,G92
G43 H1 Setting H1 tooll
ength compensation in the positive
G43 H1
G49 G02 X50 R25 H2 direction.
Volume I Programming

G43 H1
Alarm occurs.
In the same bl
ockwith canned cycl
e code
G43 H1 Setting H1 tooll
ength compensation in the positive
G44 G81 X50 R5 Z-70 G43 H1 direction.
H2 G44 H2 Setting H2 tooll ength compensation in the negative
G90 G00 X100 Y100 G44 H2 direction. Startsthe canned cycl e from H2.
Z100

Specified in the canned cycl
e
G43 H1 Setting H1 tool l ength compensation in the positive
G90 G81 X50 R5 Z-70 direction.
G49 H2 Compensation offsetwith H1;enters into canned cycl e
G43 H1
G49 G0 X75 Y75 Z75 mode.
G43 H1
H0 The tooll ength compensation (G49,H2) in the canned
G43 H1
cycle is ineffective, and the previous bl
ock remains
G49 H0
modal .
Cancelal lthe axis compensations,and setH0 modal .
Position to X75 Y75 Z75(Z75).

Command Example:
Tooll
ength compensation (#1,#2 and #3 hol
e machining)

offset H01 = 4.0

N1 G91 G00 X120.0 Y80.0 ˗.....… . Ł

54
 Chapter3 G Command

N2 G43 Z-32.0 H01 ˗...........… … … ł

N3 G01 Z-21.0 ˗.........................… Ń

Volume I Programming
N4 G04 P2000 ˗............................ ń
N5 G00 Z21.0 ˗..........................…. Ņ
N6 X30.0 Y-50.0 ˗.......................…. ņ
N7 G01 Z-41.0 ˗.........................….. Ň
N8 G00 Z41.0 ˗..........................….. ň
N9 X50.0 Y30.0 ˗........................…..ʼn
N10 G01 Z-25.0 ˗........................…. Ŋ
N11 G04 P2000 ˗.........................… ŋ
N12 G00 Z57.0 H00 ˗.......................Ō
N13 X-200.0 Y-60.0 ˗...................... ō
N14 M30 ˗
Z, X or Y axis offsets a value at offset storage positively or negatively from the original end
position according to the above command. Offset axes can be specified with G17, G18 and G19,
offset direction can be specified with G43 and G44. Offset No. corresponding to the offset is
specified by H code.

3.14 Workpiece Coordinate system G54~G59

Format˖
G54 X Y Z ˗ Workpiece coordinate system 1
G55 X Y Z ˗ Workpiece coordinate system 2
G56 X Y Z ˗ Workpiece coordinate system 3
G57 X Y Z ˗ Workpiece coordinate system 4
G58 X Y Z ˗ Workpiece coordinate system 5
G59 X Y Z ˗ Workpiece coordinate system 6

Function˖
There are 6 workpiece coordinate systems for machine tool regardless of the G92, any of
coordinate system can be selected by G54~G59.

Explanation˖
X: New X axis absolute coordinate in current position;
Y: New Y axis absolute coordinate in current position;
Z: New Z axis absolute coordinate in current position.
These six workpiece coordinates are set by the distances (workpiece zero offset)
from machine zero to each coordinate system origin.

55
 GSK980M Da M illing CNC System User M anual
Volume I Programming

Examples˖
N10 G55 G90 G00 X100.0 Z20.0˗
N20 G56 X80.5 Z25.5˗
Rapidly positioning to workpiece coordinate system 3 (X=80.5, Z=25.5) from workpiece
coordinate system 2 (X=100.0, Z=20.0). For example, if N20 block is G91, it is incremental
movement. The absolute coordinates automatically become the coordinates in coordinate system
G56.

= 1* 

˄ ;=
*
;
1
1 *

˄ˈ˅
;
*

The absolute position for the figure is coordinate value under the current coordinate system.
Note˖
z Workpiece coordinate systems 1~6 is set up as soon as machine zero return is
executed after power-on. When the system is restarted, the coordinate system is the
one set by parameter No. 13 bit 17.
z Whether the relative position varies with coordinate system depends on status
parameter ʋ005 PPD. when PPD=0, it changes; when PPD=1, it does not change.
z When the workpiece coordinate system function is determined, usually, G92 is not

56
 Chapter 3 G Command

needed to set coordinate system. if G92 is used, coordinate system 1~6 will be moved.
Do not confuse with G92 and G54~G59, unless workpiece coordinate systems
G54~G59 are to be moved. When G54~G59 are in the same block with G92, G54~G59

Volume I Programming
are disabled.
z Workpiece coordinate system can be modified in the program run. The new coordinate
system is effective till the system is restarted.

If it performs G92 X100 Y100 commands when the tool is positioned a˄t 200ˈ160˅in the
G54 coordinate system; the offset vector A for workpiece coordinate system 1 is (X’
, Y’
). And the
other workpiece coordinate systems offset for vector A.

3.15 Compound Cycle Command

3.15.1 Brieffor canned cycle

Generally, the canned cycle is a machining movement completion from one block with G function
to the completion of multi-block specified. Canned cycles make it easier for the programmer to create
programs. With a canned cycle, a frequently-used machining operation can be specified in a single
block with a G function; without canned cycles, multiple blocks are needed, and canned cycles can
shorten the program to save memory.

3.15.1.1 Canned cycle list

G Operation at the
Drilling Retraction Application
codes bottom ofa hole
G73 Intermittent feed ņņ Rapid feed High-speed peck drilling cycle
G74 Feed Dwell, spindle CCW Feed Left-hand tapping cycle
G80 ņņ ņņ ņņ Canned cycle cancellation
G81 Feed ņņ Rapid feed Drilling, point drilling
G82 Feed Dwell Rapid feed Drilling, boring, counter boring
G83 Intermittent feed ņņ Rapid feed Peck drilling cycle
G84 Feed Dwell, spindle CW Feed Tapping
G85 Feed ņņ Feed Boring
G86 Feed Spindle stop Rapid feed Boring
G88 Feed Dwell, spindle stop manual Boring

57
 GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual

G89 Feed Dwell Feed Boring

Full-circle helical rough Round groove internal rough
G110 Intermittent feed Rapid feed
milling milling CCW
Volume I Programming

Full-circle helical rough Round groove internal rough

G111 Intermittent feed Rapid feed
milling milling CW
Feed Rapid feed Full-circle internal fine milling
G112 Full-circle fine milling
CCW
Feed Full-circle fine milling Rapid feed Full-circle internal fine milling
G113
CW
Feed Full-circle fine milling Rapid feed External round fine milling
G114
CCW
G115 Feed Full-circle fine milling Rapid feed External round fine milling CW
Rapid feed Rectangle groove internal
G134 Intermittent feed Rectangle rough milling
rough milling CCW
Rapid feed Rectangle groove internal
G135 Intermittent feed Rectangle rough milling
rough milling CW
Feed Rapid feed Rectangle groove internal fine
G136 Rectangle fine milling
milling CCW
Feed Rectangle fine milling Rapid feed Rectangle groove internal fine
G137
milling CW
Feed Rectangle fine milling Rapid feed Rectangle groove external fine
G138
milling CCW
Feed Rectangle fine milling Rapid feed Rectangle groove external fine
G139
milling CW

3.15.1.2 Canned circle explanations

Generally, a canned cycle consists of a sequence of the following operations, see

the right figure. Operation1
Operation 1… Positioning of axes X Startandendpoi
nts
and Y
Operation 2…Rapid traverse to point
Operation2
R plane Operation7

Operation 3…Hole machining; Rapidtraversefeedrate

Operation 4…Operation at the bottom Po i
n tR
Cuttingfeed
of hole;
Operation 6
Operation 5…Retraction to point R plane Operation3
Operation 6…Rapid traverse to the initial
Point
Operation4

3.15.1.3 G90/G91
The data mode corresponded with G90 and G91 are different. The point R plane and the
absolute position machined at the bottom of the hole are specified by R and Z values, when the

58
 Chapter 3 G Command

command is G 90. The specified R value is the distance relative to the initial plane, and the Z value is
the distance relative to the R point plane when the command is G91. See the Fig. 13.1 (B)
G90 (Absolute command) G91 (Incremental command)

Volume I Programming
Initialpointlevel

PointR plane PointR

PointZ (atthe
PointZ
bott
om ofhol e)
Absolute Relative

Fig. 13.1 (B) Absolute and incremental commands for canned cycle

3.15.1.4 Returning point level G98/G99

Tool can be returned to the initial plane or point R plane according to G98 and G99 during
returning. See the following figure Fig. 13.1 (C).
Normally, the initial hole machining is used by G99, the last machining is used with G98. The
initial level will not be changed when the hole machining is done by G99.

G98 (Return to initial level) G99 (Return to point R plane)

Initialpointlevel Initialpointlevel

PointR

Fig.13.1 (C) Levels for initial and point R

59
 GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual

Note ˖The initial point level is an absolute position for hole machining axis direction which is
indicated from the canned cycle cancellation to start.
Volume I Programming

3.15.1.5 Canned cycle cancellation

There are two ways for canned cycle cancel are listed below:
1. Canceling the canned cycle with the G80
2. The canned cycle is cancelled by the G00, G01, G02 and G03 command in group 01.
(1) When the canned cycle is cancelled by the command G80, if the G00, G01, G02 and G03 of
the 01 group are not specified, then the reserved modal command (G00 or G01) performs motion
before using canned cycle.
For example:
N0010 G01 X0 Y0 Z0 F800; ˄The modal command is G01 before entering the canned
cycle˅
N0020 G81 X10 Y10 R5 Z-50; ˄Entering canned cycle˅
N0030 G80 X100 Y100 Z100; (The modal G01 command reserved before canned cycle
performs cutting feed ˅
If the G01 is not specified in the abovementioned program N0010, but G00, the G00 performs
rapid positioning for N0030.
When both command G80 and commands G00, G01, G02 and G03 are specified in block,
actions are performed by the latter, G00, G01, G02 and G03.
For example:
N0010 G01 X0 Y0 Z0 F800; (The modal command is G01 before entering the canned
cycle)
N0020 G81 X10 Y10 R5 Z-50; (Entering canned cycle)
N0030 G00 G80 X100 Y100 Z100; (The G00 performs positioning at the rapid rate, and the
modal command G00 is saved)
Note: The cutting feedrate by F command is still held on even if the canned cycle is
cancelled.

3.15.1.6 General command format for canned cycle

Once the hole machining data is specified in the canned cycle, it is held until the canned cycle is
cancelled. So the hole machining data should be outright specified at the beginning of the canned
cycle, only the modified data is specified in the following canned cycle.
The general command format of canned cycle: G_ X_ Y_ R_ Z_ Q_ P_ F_ L;
All commands for canned cycle are listed in above-mentioned format. But it is not needed to
specify the above-mentioned format in each canned cycle. For example, the canned cycle can be
performed as long as the G command (hole machining) and any of X, Y, Z and R are specified;
additionally, Q or P is not available in some canned cycle G command (hole machining), the
command is disabled even if these data are specified, they are regarded as modal data memories
only.

60
 Chapter 3 G Command

Table 13.1.7 Command explanations for canned cycle

Specifying
Address Explanation for command address
content

Volume I Programming
Hole
G Refer to the canned cycle list.
machining
Hole position Specifying the hole position with the absolute and incremental value,
XˈY
data control is same with G00 position. Unit: mm;
See the fig.13.1 (B), the distance from initial point level to point R plane is
R specified by using the incremental value, or specifying the coordinate
value of the point R by absolute value. Unit: mm;
Hole depth. See the fig.13.1 (A), the distance from R point to the bottom
Z of a hole is specified by using the incremental value or specifying the
Hole coordinate value of the hole bottom by absolute value. Unit: mm;
machining Specifying each cut-in in G73 and G83 or translational value in G76 and
Q
data G87. Unit: mm;
Specifying the dwell at the bottom of a hole. Relation of time and the
P
numerical specified are same with G04. Unit: ms;
Machining cycle for Lholes is performed from start (start position of block)
L
to XY coordinate position.
F The cutting feedrate is specified, tooth pitch is indicated in G74 and G84.
A part of command of canned cycle such as G110, G111, G112, G113, G114, G115, G134,
G135, G136, G137, G138 and G139 are explained in the following chapters or sections.

3.15.2 Description for canned cycle

3.15.2.1 High-speed peck drilling cycle G73

Format: G98/G99 G73 X_ Y_ R_ Z_ Q_ F_ L_;
Function: This kind of cycle performs high-speed peck drilling, it performs intermittent cutting
feed to the bottom of a hole, and eliminating the chips from the hole simultaneously.
Explanation: Refer to the command explanation of canned cycle in Table 13.1.7.

Cycle process:
(1) Positioning to XY plane level at the rapid traverse;
(2) Down to the point R plane at the rapid traverse rate;
(3) Cutting feed for Q distance;
(4) Retract d distance in rapid traverse;
(5) Cutting feed for (Q+d) distance
(6) Machine to the Z axis hole bottom by cycling the (4) and (5);
(7) Return to the start point level or point R plane according to G98 or G99 at the rapid traverse.

61
 GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual

Command Path:
G98 Return to the initial plane at the G99 Return to the point R plane at the
rapid traverse rapid traverse
Volume I Programming

Initi
alpointl
evel

PointR plane PointR plane

PointZ PointZ

Related Explanation:
(1) This kind of cycle is peck drilling for Q value intermittent feeding along the Z-axis direction.
The Q value should be positive, the sign is ineffective even if the negative value is specified. If the Q
value is not specified, then it defaults 0.1mm. If a depth to be cut is less than the Q value, then cut to
the bottom of the hole without tool retraction at the rapid traverse for the first time.
(2) To remove chips from the hole easily, a small value can be set for retraction. This allows
drilling to be performed efficiently. The tool is retracted in rapid feed, the retraction amount d is set by
parameter No.51, the default is 1000, unit: 0.001mm.
(3) The command P is disabled, but its value is reserved as canned cycle modal value.

3.15.2.2 Left-handed tapping cycle G74

Format: G98/G99 G74 X_ Y_ R_ Z_ P_ F_ L
Function: This cycle performs left-handed tapping. In the left-handed tapping cycle, the
spindle rotates clockwise for tapping till the bottom of the hole has been reached, then
retracts by counter-clockwise after dwell.
Explanation: For canned cycle explanation, see the Table 13.1.7
Thereinto, the F is indicated for tooth pitch. The value range are indicated as 0.001~500.00mm
(metric), 0.06~25400 teeth/inch (inch)

Cycle process:
(1) Positioning to XY plane level at the rapid traverse;
(2) Down to the point R plane at the rapid traverse;
(3) Tapping to the bottom of a hole;
(4) The spindle stops;
(5) Pause for time P if dwell is specified;
(6) The spindle rotates CCW, and then retracts to point R plane;

62
 Chapter 3 G Command

(7) The spindle is stopped; pause for time P if dwell is specified;

(8) Spindle rotates CW;
(9) Return to the initial plane if it is G98.

Volume I Programming
Command Path:

G98 (Mode for returning to initial plane) G99 (Mode for returning to R point plane)

Initi
alpointl
evel

Spindle
Spindle
positi
vely PointR
PointR negati
vely
Spindle Spindle
positi
vely positi
vely

PointZ PointZ

Related Explanation:
(1) Tapping to the bottom of a hole it will not be returned immediately even if the P is omitted or
regarded as 0 in this cycle, it will be returned after a dwell time (2s), and this time is set by
system.
(2) The F is tapping modal value, the last tapping F value is taken when it is omitted, or alarm will
be generated if it does not exist.
(3) The metric or inch of the F value is determined by G20 (metric) or G21 (inch).
(4) The command Q is disabled in this cycle, but its value will be reserved as canned cycle modal
value.

3.15.2.3 Tapping cycle G84

Format: G98/G99 G84 X_ Y_ R_ Z_ P_ F_ L_ ;
Function: This cycle is used to machine a thread. The tapping is performed by spindle rotating
positively, when the bottom of a hole has been reached, the spindle is retracted in
the reverse direction.
Explanation: For command explanation of canned cycle, see the Table 13.1.7
Thereinto, the F is tooth-pitch. The value range is 0.001~500.00mm (metric), 0.06~25400
tooth/inch (inch).

Cycle Process:
(1) Positioning to the XY plane level at the rapid traverse;
(2) Down to the point R plane at the rapid traverse;
(3) Tapping to the bottom of a hole;
(4) Spindle stops;
(5) For dwell time P if it is commanded
(6) Spindle returns to the point R plane in reverse direction;

63
 GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual

(7) Spindle stops; for dwell time P if the P is commanded;

(8) The spindle is rotated in the positive direction;
(9) Returning to the initial point level if it is G98.
Volume I Programming

Command Path:
G98 (Mode for returning to initial point level) G99 (Mode for returning to point R plane)

Initi
alpointl
evel

Spindle Spindle
positi
vely negati
vely

PointR Dwell PointR Dwell

Dwell Dwell
Spindle Spindle
negati
vely negati
vely
PointZ PointZ

Related Explanation:
Please refer to the related explanation for G74 (Counter tapping cycle)

3.15.2.4 Drilling cycle,spot drilling cycle G81

Format: G98/G99 G81 X- Y_ R_ Z_ F_ L_ ;
Function: This cycle is used for normal drilling. Cutting feed is performed to the bottom of the
hole, the tool is then retracted from the bottom of the hole in rapid traverse.
Explanation: For the command explanation of canned cycle, see the Table 13.1.7.
Cycle Process:
(1) Positioning to the XY plane level position at the rapid traverse;
(2) Down to the point R plane at the rapid traverse;
(3) Cutting feed to the bottom of the hole;
(4) Returning to the initial point or point R plane at rapid traverse according to the G98 or G99;
Command Path:
G98 Return to the initial plane at the G99 Return to the R point plane at the
rapid traverse rapid traverse

Initi
alpointl
evel

PointR PointR

PointZ PointZ

64
 Chapter 3 G Command

Related Explanation:
The command Q or P is disabled in this cycle, but its value will be saved as canned cycle modal
value.

Volume I Programming
3.15.2.5 Drilling cycle,counter boring cycle G82
Format˖G98/G99 G82 X_ Y_ R_ Z_ P_ F_ L_ ˗
Function: Cutting feed is performed to the bottom of the hole. Hole depth precision is added
when the dwell is performed, and then the tool is retracted from the bottom of the hole
at rapid traverse.
Explanation: For the command explanation of these canned cycles, see the Table 13.1.7
Cycle process:
(1) Positioning to the XY plane level at the rapid traverse;
(2) Down to the point R plane at the rapid traverse;
(3) Cutting feed to the bottom of a hole
(4) Dwell for P time if it is commanded.
(5) Returning to the initial point or point R plane according to G98 or G99 at the rapid traverse;
Command Path:
G98 Return to the initial point level at the G99 Return to the point R plane at the
rapid traverse rapid traverse

Initi
alpointl
evel

PointR PointR

Dwell
Dwell PointZ PointZ

Related Explanation:
(1) They are basically the same as G81 (drilling and spot-drilling machining), it is up after dwell at
the bottom of a hole only (the dwell time is specified by P, the dwell will not be executed if it is not
specified, and the command action is same as that of G81). In the blind hole, the accuracy of hole
can be improved by the dwell.
(2) The command Q is disabled in this cycle, but its value will be reserved as the canned cycle
modal value.

3.15.2.6 Peck drilling cycle G83

Format: G98/G99 G83 X_ Y_ R_ Z_ Q_ F_ L_ ;
Function: This cycle performs high-speed peck drilling; it performs intermittent cutting feed to
the bottom of a hole while removing chips from the hole.
Explanation: The command explanation for canned cycle, see the table 13.1.7.
Cycle Process:
(1) Positioning to the XY plane level at the rapid traverse;

65
 GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual

(2) Down to the point R plane at the rapid traverse;

(3) Cutting feed for Q distance;
(4) Retract to the point R plane at the rapid traverse;
Volume I Programming

(5) Rapid feed to d distance to the end surface

(6) Cutting feed for (Q+d) distance;
(7) Cycling (4) (5) and (6) to the bottom of a hole along Z-axis;
(8) Return to the initial point or point R plane according to the G98 or G99 at the rapid traverse;

Command Path:

G98 returned to the initial plane at the G99 returned to the point R plane at the
rapid traverse rapid traverse

Initi
alpointl
evel

PointR plane PointR plane

PointZ Poi
ntZ

Related Explanation:
(1) Same as G73, after feeding for Q, it returns to the point R plane at the rapid traverse firstly,
and then rapid feeds to d mm to the end surface, then cutting feed is applied and the cycle is
performed in turn. The Q value should be positive, even if the negative value is specified, and
the sign is also disabled. Q value 0.001mm is defaulted if Q value is not specified; d, is set by
the parameter No.52, its default value is 1000, and the unit is 0.001mm. If the cutting depth is
less than the Q value, then cutting to the bottom of a hole at the first time, and rapid traverse
retraction is not performed.
(2) The command P is disabled in this cycle, but its value will be reserved as canned cycle modal
value.

3.15.2.7 Boring cycle G85

Format: G98/G99 G85 X_ Y_ R_ Z_ F_ L_ ;
Function: After positioning along X and Y axes, rapid traverse is performed to point R; the
boring is performed from point R to point Z thereafter. Cutting feed is performed to
return point R plane when the Z point has been reached the bottom of a hole.
Explanation: Command explanation for the canned cycle, see the table 13.1.7.

66
 Chapter 3 G Command

Cycle process:
(1) Positioning to the XY plane level at the rapid traverse;

Volume I Programming
(2) Down to the point R plane at the rapid traverse;
(3) Cutting feed to the bottom of a hole;
(4) Cutting feed to the point R plane;
(5) Returning to the initial point level if it is G98;

Command Path:
G98 (Mode for returning to initial point level) G99 (Mode for returning to point R plane)

Initi
alpointl
evel

PointR PointR

Poi
ntZ
Poi
ntZ

Related Explanation:
(1) This cycle is used to bore a hole. The command motion is basically same as the G81 (Drilling,
Spot-drilling cycle), the difference is that by the G81 it returns to the point R plane in rapid
traverse rate, while by the G85 it returns to the point R plane in feedrate when the cutting feed
reaches the bottom of a hole.
(2) The Q and P commands are disabled in this cycle, but its value is reserved as the canned
cycle modal value.

3.15.2.8 Boring cycle G86

Format: G98/G99 G86 X_ Y_ R_ Z_ F_ L_ ˗

Function: After positioning along X and Y axes, rapid traverse is performed to R point, and the
boring is performed from point R to point Z. The tool is retracted in rapid traverse and
spindle is rotated positively when the spindle is stopped at the bottom of the hole.
Explanation: For command explanation for canned cycle, see the table 13.1.7.
Cycle process:
(1) Positioning to the XY plane level at the rapid traverse;
(2) Down to the point R plane at the rapid traverse;
(3) Cutting feed to the bottom of a hole;
(4) The spindle stops;
(5) Returning to the initial point or point R plane at rapid traverse according to the G98 or G99;
(6) The spindle is rotated in the positive direction;

67
 GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual

Command Path:

G98 (Mode for returning to start point level) G99 (Mode for returning to point R plane)
Volume I Programming

Spindleposit
ively
Initi
alpointl
evel
Initi
alpointl
evel

Spindleposit
ively
PointR Poi
ntR

Spindlestop Spindlestop
PointZ Poi
ntZ

Related Explanation:
(1) This cycle is used to be bore a hole. The command operation is basically same with G81,
only spindle rotation status is different. After cut feeds to the bottom of a hole, the M05 is
executed (spindle stops), then the point R plane is retracted at the rapid traverse, the M03 is then
performed (spindle rotates positively) regardless of the currently spindle rotation status and the
positive or negative rotation are specified before the canned cycle.
(2) The command Q and P are disabled in this cycle, but its value is reserved as canned cycle
modal value.

3.15.2.9 Boring cycle G88

Format: G98/G99 G88 X_ Y_ R_ Z_ P_ F_ L_ ;

Function: A dwell is performed at the bottom of a hole, the spindle is stopping. If the manual
operation is applied now, tool can be removed manually. It is better to retract the tool
safely from the hole regardless of any kind of manual operation. It is rapidly retracted to
point R or initial plane when the automatic operation is performed again, the spindle is
stopped and G88 is finished.
Explanation: For the command explanation of the canned cycle, see the table 13.1.7.

Cycle process:
(1) Positioning to the XY plane at the rapid traverse rate;
(2) Down to the point R plane at the rapid traverse rate;
(3) Cutting feed to the bottom of hole;
(4) The spindle is stopped;
(5) P time is delayed if it is specified.
(6) Manual operation will be performed if the dwell is executed.
(7) Restoring the automatic mode, retracting to initial point or point R plane according to the G98
or G99 at the rapid traverse rate.
(8) The spindle rotates positively;

68
 Chapter 3 G Command

Command Path:

Volume I Programming
G98 (Mode for returning to initial plane) G99 (Mode for returning to point R plane)

Initi
alpointl
evel
Initi
alpointl
evel
Spindle
positi
vely

PointR Poi
ntR Spindle
M PG feedrat
e positi
vely
Spindlestops Spindlestops
afterdwell afterdwell M PG feedrat
e
PointZ Poi
ntZ

Related Explanation:
The command Q is disabled in this cycle, but its value is reserved as the canned cycle modal
value.

3.15.2.10 Boring cycle G89

Format: G98/G99 G89 X_ Y_ R_ Z_ P_ F_ L_ ;

Function: This cycle is used to bore a hole normally. This cycle performs a dwell at the bottom
of the hole; the tool is then retracted from the bottom of the hole at the rapid traverse
rate.
Explanation: For the command explanation of the canned cycle, see the table 13.1.7.

Cycle process:
(1) Positioning to XY plane at the rapid traverse rate;
(2) Down to the point R plane at the rapid traverse rate;
(3) Cutting feed to the bottom of a hole;
(4) For dwell time P if the P is specified;
(5) Cutting feed to the point R plane;
(6) Returning to the initial point level if it is G98;
(7) Returning to the initial point or point R plane at the rapid traverse according to the G98 or
G99;

69
 GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual

Command Path:

G98 (Mode for returning to initial G99 (Mode for returning to point R
Volume I Programming

point level) plane)

Initi
alpointl
evel

Poi
ntR
PointR

Dwell Poi
ntZ
Dwell PointZ

Related Explanation:
(1) G89 (Boring cycle) is basically same as the G85, a dwell is applied at the bottom of a hole
(Dwell time is specified by P, if it is not specified, the dwell is not applied, the command operation
is same to the G85)
(2) The command Q is disabled in this cycle, but its value is reserved as canned cycle modal
value.

3.15.2.11 Groove rough milling inside the round G110/G111

Format:
G110
G98/G99 X_ Y_ R_ Z_ I_ W _ Q_ K_ V_ D_ F_
G111
Function: From the beginning of the center point, arc interpolations are performed helically till
the round groove of programming dimension has been machined.

Explanation: For command explanation of the canned cycle, see the table 13.1.7.
G110: Groove rough-milling inside the round in CCW;
G111: Groove rough-milling inside the round in CW;
I: I is radius inside the round groove, it should be more than the radius of current tool.
W: The firstly cutting depth is from the R reference level to the undersurface along the Z
axis direction, it should be more than 0 (The first cutting position is over the bottom of
the groove, then bottom position is regarded as machining position);
Q: The cutting incremental value each time along Z axis direction;
K: The width increment of cut inside XY plane, it should be less than the tool radius, and
more than 0;
V: The distance to the end machining plane at the rapid traverse, it should be more than
0 when cutting;
D: Tool radius serial number, the value range is 0~32, 0 is the default of D0. The current

70
 Chapter 3 G Command

tool radius is determined by the specified serial number.

Cycle process:
(1) Positioning to the XY plane level at the rapid traverse rate;

Volume I Programming
(2) Down to the point R plane at the rapid traverse rate;
(3) Cut W depth downwards in cutting feedrate
(4) Mill a round face with radius I helically by K increment each time from center point to outside.
(5) The Z axis is retracted to the R reference surface at the rapid traverse rate;
(6) X and Y axes are positioned to the center at the rapid traverse rate;
(7) Down to distance V to the end machining surface along Z axis at the rapid traverse rate;
(8) Cut along Z axis for (Q+V) depth;
(9) Cycling the operations from (4) ~ (8) till the round surface of total depth is finished.
(10) Return to the initial plane or point R plane according to G98 or G99.
Command Path:

 Initi
alpl
ane
*


R pl
ane
 *
:  

9
4 


PointZ

71
 GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual
Volume I Programming

Related Explanation:
The P and L are disabled in this cycle, but the P value will be reserved as canned cycle modal
value.
For example: A round inside groove rough-milling is specified in canned cycle G111, see the
following
Figure

G90 G00 X50 Y50 Z50; (G00 positioning at the rapid traverse rate)
G99 G111 X25 Y25 R5 Z-50 150 W20 Q10 K10V10 F800 D1; (Rough-milling cycle inside the
round groove D1=5)
G80 X50 Y50 Z50; (Canceling canned cycle, returning from the point R plane)
M30;

72
 Chapter 3 G Command

Note: Set the 97# parameter value to one which is more than 10,by G110 and G111 it feeds
helically along Z axis. Rough-milling machining can be directly performed for non-groove
workpiece.

Volume I Programming
See the following figure for helical cutting path:
Tooldi
amet
er2r

Tool
Helicalcut
tingl
ead(paramet
er97ʿ)

Workpiece

3.15.2.12 Fine-milling cycle inside full circle G112/G113

Format:
G112
G98/G99 X_ Y_ R_ Z_ I_ J_ D_ F_
G113
Function: A fine-milling inside the full circle is finished with the specified radius value I and
direction, the tool is retracted after the fine-milling.
Explanation: For command explanation of canned cycle, see the table 13.1.7.
G112: Fine-milling cycle inside the full circle in CCW.
G113: Fine-milling cycle inside the full circle in CW
I: Fine-milling circle radius, the value range is indicated as 0~9999.999mm, the absolute
value is taken when it is negative.
J: Fine-milling distance from start point to the center point, the value range is indicated
as 0~9999.999mm, the absolute value is taken when it is negative
D: Sequence number of tool radius, the value range is indicated as 0~32, the 0 is default
of D0. The current tool radius value is taken according to the specified sequence
number.
Cycle process:
(1) Positioning to the XY plane level at the rapid traverse rate;
(2) Down to the point P level at the rapid traverse rate;
(3) Feed to the bottom of a hole;
(4) Perform the circle interpolation by the path of transit arc 1;

73
 GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual

(5) Perform the full circle interpolation by the path of arc 2 and arc 3;
(6) Perform circular interpolation by the path of transit arc 4 and return to the start point;
(7) Return to the initial point level or point R plane according to G98 or G99.
Volume I Programming

Command Path:

Related Explanation:
The commands Q, P and L are disabled in this cycle, but the Q and P value will be reserved as
the canned cycle modal value.
For example: Fine-mill a finished rough-milling round groove by the canned cycle G112 command,
see the following figure:

G90 G00 X50 Y50 Z50; (G00 rapid positioning)

G99 G112 X25 Y25 R5 Z-50 150 J10 F800 D1; (Start canned cycle, fine-milling cycle

74
 Chapter 3 G Command

inside the circle at the bottom of a hole

D1=5)
G80 X50 Y50 Z50; (The canned cycle is cancelled, returning from the point P level)

Volume I Programming
M30;

3.15.2.13 Fine-milling cycle outside circle G114/G115

Format:
G114
G98/G99 X_ Y_ R_ Z_ I_ J_ D_ F_˗
G115
Function: A fine-milling outside the full circle is performed by the specified radius value and the
direction, and the tool is retracted after the fine-milling is finished.

Explanation: For command explanation of canned cycle, see the table 13.1.7.
G114: Finish-milling cycle for outside circle in CCW.
G115: Finish-milling cycle for outside circle in CW.
I: A fine-milling circle radius, the value range is indicated as 0~9999.999mm, the
absolute value is taken when it is negative.
J: Distance of fine-milling between the start point and the circle, the value range is
indicated as 0~9999.999mm; the absolute value is taken when it is negative.
D: The sequence number of tool radius, the value range is 0~32, 0 is the default of D0.
The current tool radius value is taken according to the specified sequence number.
Cycle process:
(1) Positioning to the XY plane level at the rapid traverse rate;
(2) Down to the point R plane at the rapid traverse rate;
(3) Cutting feed to the bottom of a hole;
(4) Perform the circle interpolation by the path of transit arc 1;
(5) Perform the full circle interpolation by the path of arc 2 and arc 3;
(6) Perform circular interpolation by the path of transit arc 4 and return to the start point;
(7) Return to the initial point level or point R plane according to G98 or G99.
Command path:

Related Explanation:
(1) The interpolation direction of between transit arc and fine-milling arc are different when the
fine-milling outside circle is performed, the interpolation direction in command explanation is
75
 GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual

the interpolation direction of fine-milling arc.

(2) The command Q, P and L are disabled in this cycle, but the Q and P value are reserved as
canned cycle modal value.
Volume I Programming

For example: A finished rough-milling round groove is performed by fine-milling with the canned
cycle G114 command, see the following figure :

G90 G00 X50 Y50 Z50; (G00 rapid positioning)

G99 G114 X25 Y25 R5 Z-50 150 J60 F800 D1; (Start canned cycle, the fine-milling cycle
is performed outside the circle at the bottom of a hole D1=5)
G80 X50 Y50 Z50; (The canned cycle is cancelled, returning from the point R plane)
M30˗

3.15.2.14 Rectangle groove rough-milling G134/G135

Format: G134 G98/G99

X_ Y_ Z_ R_ I_ J_ K_ W _ Q_ V_ U_ D_ F_
G135
Function: From the center of the rectangle, the linear cutting cycle is applied by the specified
parameter
data, till the rectangle groove with programmed dimension is made out.

Explanation: For command explanation of canned cycle, see the table 13.1.7.
G134: Rectangle groove rough-milling in CCW
G135: Rectangle groove rough-milling in CW
I: The width of rectangle groove along the X axis direction
J: The width of rectangle groove along the Y axis direction.
K: The cut width increment inside XY plane, it is less than the tool radius, but, more than 0.
W: For the first cutting along the Z axis direction, the distance is downward to the R
reference surface, it is more than 0 (if the first cutting is over the position of the bottom
of the groove, then the bottom of the groove is taken as the machining position)
Q: The cutting incremental value each time along Z axis.
V: Distance to the end machining surface, which is more than 0, when the rapid traverse

76
 Chapter 3 G Command

is executed.
U: Corner arc radius, if it is omitted, that is no corner arc transition is not shown.
D: Sequence number of tool radius, its value range is indicated as 0 ~ 32, thereunto, the

Volume I Programming
0 is default of D0. The current tool radius value is taken out according to the specified
sequence number.

Cycle process:
(1) Positioning to the XY plane at the rapid traverse rate;
(2) Down to the point R plane at the rapid traverse rate;
(3) W distance depth is cut downwards by cutting feedrate
(4) Mill a rectangle face helically by K increment each time from center point to outside.
(5) R reference surface is retracted along the Z axis at the rapid traverse rate.
(6) The center of rectangle is positioned along the X and Y axes at the rapid traverse rate.
(7) Down to distance V to the end machining surface along Z axis at the rapid traverse rate;
(8) Cut along Z axis for (Q+V) depth;
(9) Cycling the operation from (4) ~ (8) till the surface of total cutting is performed.
(10) Return to the initial plane or point R plane according to G98 or G99.

Command Path:

Initi
alpl
ane

PointR plane

Poi
ntZ

77
 GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual
Volume I Programming

Related Explanation:
The commands P and L are disabled in this cycle, but the P value is reserved as canned cycle
modal value.

For example: An inside rectangle groove rough-milling is specified by G134 in canned cycle, see
the following figure:

78
 Chapter 3 G Command

Volume I Programming
G90 G00 X50 Y50 Z50; (G00 rapid positioning)
G99 G134 X25 Y25 R5 Z-50 I70 J50 W20 Q10 K5 V10 U10 F800 D1; (Groove rough-milling
cycle inside rectangle is performed D1=5)
G80 X50 Y50 Z50; (The canned cycle is cancelled, returning from the point R plane)
M30;

Note If the parameter value of 97ʿ is set for more than 10,the helical cutting feed along
the Z axis will be performed by G110 and G111. So,the workpiece without groove can be
machined by rough-milling directly.

The helical feeding path is as follows:

Tool
Helicalfeedinglead(theparameterof97ʿ)

Workpiece

Tooldi
amet
er2r

79
 GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual

3.15.2.15 Rectangle groove inner fine-milling cycle G136/G137

Volume I Programming

Format:
G136
G98/G99 X_ Y_ R_ Z_ I_ J_ D_ K_ U_ F_˗
G137
Function: The tool performs fine-milling inside the rectangle with the specified width and
direction, it is returned after finishing the fine-milling.

Explanation: For command explanation of canned cycle, see the table 13.1.7.
G136: Finish-milling cycle inside groove of rectangle in CCW.
G137: Finish-milling cycle inside groove of rectangle in CW.
I: The rectangle width along the X axis, the value range is indicated as 0~9999.999mm.
J: The rectangle width along the Y axis, the value range is indicated as 0~9999.999mm.
D: Sequence number of tool radius, the value range is 0~32, the 0 is default value of D0.
The current tool radius value is taken out according to the specified sequence number.
K: The distance between the finish-milling start point and the rectangle side in X axis
direction, the value range is indicated as 0~9999.999mm.
U: Corner arc radius; no corner arc transition if it is omitted. When the U is omitted or it is
equal to 0 and the tool radius is more than 0, the alarm is generated.
Cycle process:
(1) Positioning to XY plane at the rapid traverse rate;
(2) Down to point R plane at the rapid traverse rate;
(3) Cutting feed to the bottom of a hole;
(4) Perform the circle interpolation by the path of transit arc 1;
(5) Perform the circular and linear interpolation by the path of 2-3-4-5-6;
(6) Perform circular interpolation by the path of transit arc 7 and return to the start point;
(7) Returning to the initial plane or point R plane according to G98 or G99.

Command Path:

Related Explanation:
The commands Q, P and L are disabled in this cycle, but the Q and P values are reserved as the
canned cycle modal value.

80
 Chapter 3 G Command

For example: To perform a fine-milling for the finished rough-milling rectangle groove with the
canned cycle G136 command, see the following figure:

Volume I Programming
G90 G00 X50 Y50 Z50; (G00 rapid positioning)
G136 X25 Y25 R5 Z-50 I80 J50 K30 U10 F800 D1; (Perform finish-milling inside the
rectangle groove at the bottom of a hole in the canned cycle D1=5)
G80 X50 Y50 Z50; (The canned cycle is cancelled, returning from the point R plane)
M30;

3.15.2.16 Finish-milling cycle outside the rectangle G138/G139

Format:
G138
G98/G99 X_ Y_ R_ Z_ I_ J_ D_ K_ U_ F_
G139
Function: The tool performs fine-milling outside the rectangle by the specified width and
direction, it is returned after finishing the fine-milling.
Explanation:
G138: Finish-milling cycle outside the rectangle in CCW.
G139: Finish-milling cycle outside the rectangle in CW.
I: The width of rectangle along the X axis, the value range is indicated as
0~9999.999mm.
J: The width of the rectangle along the Y axis, the value range is indicated as
0~9999.999mm.
D: Sequence number of tool radius, its value range is indicated as 0 ~ 32, thereinto, the
0 is default of D0. The current tool radius value is taken out according to the specified
sequence number.
K: The distance between the finish-milling start point and the side of rectangle along the
X axis, the value range is indicated as 0~9999.999mm.
U: Corner arc radius, if it is omitted, no corner arc transition.
Cycle process:
(1) Positioning to the XY plane at the rapid traverse rate;
(2) Down to the point R plane at the rapid traverse rate;
(3) Cutting feed to the bottom of a hole;
(4) Perform the circle interpolation by the path of transit arc 1;

81
 GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual

(5) Perform the circular and linear interpolation by the path of 2-3-4-5-6;
(6) Perform circular interpolation by the path of transit arc 7 and return to the start point;
(7) Returning to the initial plane or point R plane according to G98 or G99.
Volume I Programming

Command Path:

Related Explanation:
(1) The interpolation direction of transition arc is inconsistent to that of the fine-milling arc when a
fine-milling is performed outside the rectangle. The interpolation direction is the one for the
fine-milling arc in the command explanation.
(2) The commands Q, P and L are disabled in this cycle, but, the value of Q and P are reserved
as canned cycle modal value.

For example: A finished rough-milling rectangle groove is performed by the fine-milling by the
command G138 in canned cycle. See the following figure.

G90 G00 X50 Y50 Z50; (G00 rapid positioning)

G99 G138 X25 Y25 R5 Z-50 180 J50 K30 U5 F800 D1; (The rectangle outside finish milling
is performed under the canned cycle at the bottom of a hole D1=5)
G80 X50 Y50 Z50; (The canned cycle is cancelled, it returns from the point R plane)
M30;

3.15.3 Continous Drilling

Continuous equal interval drilling cycle is performed in the way that canned cycle is called according
to the specified linear, rectangular or arc path.

Parameters related to continuous drilling

82
 Chapter 3 G Command

0 1 5 LPTK RPTK BRCH *** *** *** ***

LPTK =1˖Locating with G01 in line interval drill˗

Volume I Programming
=0˖Locating with G00 in line interval drill˗
RPTH =1: Locating with G01 in circle and rectangle interval drill˗
=0˖Locating with G00 in circle and rectangle interval drill˗

BRCH =1˖the return plane when continuous drilling is selected by G98, G99.
=0˖the return plane when continuous drilling is selected by G99.

3.15.3.1 Line series punch (L function)

L holes machining cycle should be performed from current plane position to end point specified
by X and Y are indicated if the L word is specified in canned cycle, so the current position (block start
and end) will not be drilled, the end point position is regarded as the last hole, holes are equal-spaced,
as follows:

L =4

Startpoi
nt

L value setting System execution result

Value is negative Ineffective, the value should be positive
The value is unspecified or Normal drilling cycle 1 time
equals to 1
The value is 0 No change of axes, the system reserves relevant cycle modal data
When L˚1,using round number
The value is decimal When L˘1, it is processed as L=0, not moving but reserving its
modal data and relevant cycle parameter values.

Note 1˖the maximum input value of command L is -9999.999̚9999.999; Decimals is ignored

and absolute value is used instead of negative value. L code is effective only in
current block.
Note 2˖In continuous drilling, the return planes are R point plan. After the last hole is
processed,the return plane is specified by G98/G99.
Note 3˖W hen there is no axis position command in the specified L block,it means drilling
cycle is performed L times in the original place.
Note 4˖Canned cycle command G110,G111,G112,G113,G114,G115,G134,G135,G136,G137,
G138,G139 has no continuous drilling function.
Note 5˖W hen L0 is specified,no drilling will be performed.

83
 GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual

3.15.3.2 Rectangle series punch (G140/G141)

Format:
G140
Volume I Programming

G98/G99 Gxx X_ Y_ R_ Z_ A_ B_ J_ F_
G141
Function: Performing series punch on each side of the rectangle according to the punch
number specified.
Explanation:
G140 – Punching in CW
G141 – Punching in CCW
Gxx – Punching type (G73, G74, G81, G83, G84, G85, G86, G88, G89)
X, Y – End coordinate of the first rectangle side
R – R plane position
Z – Hole depth
A – The punching number on the 1st and 3rd side
B – The punching number on the 2nd and 4th side
J- The length of the 2nd side
F – Cutting feedrate

Related Parameter:
Bit 7 of the parameter 014
1: Hole positioning of serial punching is performed by cutting path (G01~G03).
0: Hole positioning of serial punching is performed by the rapid traverse path (G00).

For example:
The end point coordinate of the rectangle first side is X90, Y40; the length of the 2nd side is
20mm as for the rectangle path punching. The punching holes are machined by G81, to punch 3
holes at 1st and 3rd side each other; punch 2 holes at 2nd and 4th side each other, the hole depth is
25mm;
Endpointatt he1stside
Its programming is as follows:
J
G90 G17 G0 X0 Y0 Z25˗
M03˗
G140 G81 X90 Y40 R5 Z-25 A3 B2 J20 F800˗
Startpoi
nt
G80 G0 X100 Y100 M05˗
AndEndpoint
M30

There are 10 holes such as A1~A3, B4, B5, A6~A8, B9 and B10 to be machined as in above
figure.

Note 1: If the G140 or G141 is specified in the canned cycle,it is indicated that the rectangle
serial punching will be performed. The rectangle data are defined according to specified X,
Y coordinates and J value in a program,and the serial punching cycle is performed
84
 Chapter 3 G Command

according to the punch mode (canned cycle command).

Note 2: The command value of maximum punching number A and B at each side is 9999; the
command is disabled when it is negative. The decimal part will be rounded off if the

Volume I Programming
command is decimal; if the A or B is not specified,then 0 is a default.
Note 3: The rectangle is defined by the current start point,the end of the 1st side and the
length of the 2nd side; the default is current start point if the end of 1st side is not
specified; the alarm will be generated if the length (namely,the J is not specified)of 2nd
side is not specified.
Note 4: The returned levels are all R point plane in serial punching,the corresponding plane
will be retracted according to G98/G99 specified in a block when the last hole is
performed.
Note 5: Canned cycles,such as G110,G111,G112,G113,G114,G115,G134,G136,G137,G138
and G139 have no serial punching functions.
Note 6: The command words G140,G141,A,B and J are only effective in current block. The
alarm will be generated if the G140 and G141 are specified without the canned cycle
(punching). The A,B and K will be ignored if A,B and K are specified instead of the G140
or G141.

3.15.3.3 Arc serial punching (G142/G143)

Format:
G142
G98/G99 Gxx X_ Y_ R_ Z_ B_ (I_ J_) C_ F_
G143
Function: Serial punching is performed according to the specified punching number on
specified arc.
Explanation:
G142 – Punching in CW
G143 – Punching in CCW
Gxx – Punching type˄G73,G74,G81,G82,G83,G84,G85,G86,G88,G89˅
X,Y – End point coordinate for the arc,it is fixed for G17 plane.
R – R plane position
Z – Hole depth
B – Radius of arc,when a negative value is specified,it is major arc.
(I_ J_)– The circle center and radius are calculated by Ior J when the R value is
not specified.
C – Number of punching
F – Cutting feedrate
Related Parameter:
Bit 7 of the parameter 014
1: Hole positioning for serial punching is performed by cutting path (G01~G03).
0: Hole positioning for serial punching is performed by the rapid traverse path (G00).
For example:
G91 G142 G81 X100 R50 Z-50 C4

Startpoi
nt Endpoint
85
 GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual

Example 2˖when drilling 7 holes in full circle, the start points and end points are coordinate origins,
and the radius is 50, hole depth is 50.
O0001˗
Volume I Programming

G00 G90 X0 Y0 Z0 G17˗

G98 G142 G82 I50 J0 R-10 Z-50 C7 F3000˗
M30˗
%









Note 1: In continuous drilling,when the start point is identical to end point,no drilling will
be performed.
Note 2: Canned cycle G110,G111,G112,G113,G114,G115,G134,G135,G136,G137,G138,
G139 has no continuous drilling function.
Note 3: The maximum drilling number C is 9999; the negative value is processed as
absolute value; the decimals are rounded.
Note 4˖W hen C is not specified or equals to 0,it reaches the end point directly and no
drilling will be performed.

3.15.4 Cautions for canned cycle

(1) The spindle should be rotated (The M code should be correctly specified, or, the alarm will
be generated, the G74 by M04, G84 by M03) by using the miscellaneous function (M code)
before the canned cycle is executed.

(2) Specifying any command of the X, Y, Z and R data, the hole machining can be performed in
the canned cycle of G73~G89. If neither data is contained in the block, the hole machining is not
performed (G110, G111, G112, G113, G114, G115, G134, G135, G136, G137, G138 and G139
are still needed to specify the corresponding address I, J and K, or the alarm occurs). But the
hole machining is not performed when the G04 X_ is specified in the circumstance of X, because
the X indicates for time when the G04 is specified.
G00 X_; (G00 rapid positioning)
G81 X_ Y_ Z_ R_ F_ L_; (Hole machining performs)
; (Without hole machining)
F_ ; (F value is refreshed without the hole machining)
M_ ; (Performing the miscellaneous function only)

(3) When the canned cycle (G74 or G84) is employed in spindle rotation consolation, if the hole

86
 Chapter 3 G Command

position (X, Y) or distance from initial point level to the point R plane is short, and it is necessary
to machine serially, or sometimes the spindle can not reach the specified speed before the hole
machining operation, for delaying the time, the dwell block by G04 is inserted into each hole

Volume I Programming
machining, which is shown as follows:

Insert the dwell; wait for the spindle

speed reaches to the normal value

G86 X_ Y_ Z_ R_ F_ ˗
G04 P _; (For dwell time P, without hole machining)
X_ Y_; (The next hole is machined)
G04 P _; (For dwell time P, without hole machining)
X_ Y_; (The next hole is machined)
G04 P_; (For dwell time P, without hole machining)
Sometimes, this issue will not be considered according to different machine tool, refer to the
manual supplied by the machine tool builder.

(4) As stated above, the canned cycle can also be cancelled only when G00~G03 codes are
read. So, there are two cases (# expresses for 0~3, ƑƑ for canned cycle code) will be shown
when they share the same block with the canned cycle G code.
G# GƑƑ X- Y- Z- R- Q- P- F- K-; (For canned cycle)
GƑƑ G# X- Y- Z- R- Q- P- F- K-; The X, Y and Z axes are moved by G#, the R, P, Q and K are
disabled, the F is stored. The principle, which the last G code is effective when G codes of same
group share the same block, is met by cases above.

(5) When the canned cycle and miscellaneous function are specified at the same block, The M
and MF codes are delivered at the beginning of positioning (see the Fig.13.1 (A) for the operation
1). The next hole machining can be performed till the ending signal (FIN) occurs.

(6) When the canned cycle is applied, if the tool compensation C is current state, the tool
compensation information C is then temporarily cancelled and saved; the tool compensation C status
is restored when the canned cycle is cancelled.

(7) If the tool length offset commands (G43, G44 and G49) are specified in a canned cycle block.
Then, the offset is performed when the point R plane is positioned (operation 2). The tool length
offset commands are disabled after the canned cycle is entered till it is cancelled.

87
 GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual

(8) The cautions for the operation of canned cycle:

a. Single block
When the canned cycle operation is performed by using the single block mode, normally, it is
Volume I Programming

separately stopped at the terminal of the movements 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 and 6 in the Fig. 13.1 (A). And the
single block is somewhat different according to corresponding canned cycle action at the bottom of a
hole. For example, the single block is stopped when the dwell is applied. The operation at the bottom
of the hole for fine-milling and rough-milling are divided into multiple single stop. So, it is necessary to
startup for several times to machine a hole in a single block.
b. Feed hold
The feed hold is disabled between the movement 3 ~ 5 in commands G74 and G84, but the
indicator of feed hold will light up. But the control stops till the operation 6. If the feed hold is
performed again in operation 6, then it is stopped immediately.
c. Override
The feedrate override is considered for 100 percent in the operation G74 and G84, the override
change is disabled.

(9) When the bit 1 of parameter 3 (D_R) is set to 1, the D value in tool compensation page
indicates diameter value.

3.15.5 Examples for modal data specified in canned cycle

No. Data Specification Explanation
N0010 G00 X_ M3 ˗ G00 positioning at the rapid traverse, and rotating the spindle;
G81 X_ Y_ Z_ R_ Because it is the beginning for the canned cycle, so the value
N0020
F_˗ needs to be specified for Z, R and F.
The corresponding hole machining data is same to the previous
hole, only the position Y is different, so G81Z_R_F_ can be
N0030 Y_˗
omitted. As for the hole position is shifted for Y, hole machining is
performed further by using the G81;
The hole position needs to be moved along the X axis as for the
N0040 G82 X_ P_˗ pervious one. The Z, R and F of previous hole and the P specified
by this hole are taken as hole machining data by the G82;
The hole machining is not executed, all of the hole machining data
N0050 G80 X_ Y_ M5 ˗ are cancelled (except for the F); The GO positioning is performed
with XY;
The Z and R are needed to be specified newly because all of the
data in previous block are cancelled, the above value specified is
N0060 G85 X_ Z_ R_ P_˗
applied when the F is omitted. Although the P value is commanded,
but it is not needed for this hole machining, so the P value is saved.
The Z is different compared with the previous hole, and the hole
N0070 X_ Z_˗
position just moves along the X axis;
The Z and R, P values separately specified by N0070 and N0060,
N0080 G89 X_ Y_ D_˗ the F value specified in N0020 are taken as hole machining data,
which are used for G89 hole machining.
N0090 G112 I_ J_ F_ D_˗ The fine-milling hole machined by G89 is performed by G112.
N0100 G0 X_ Y_ Z_˗ positioning for a rectangle machining

88
 Chapter 3 G Command

G134 Start machining the rectangle;

N0110
Z_R_I_J_K_U_D_˗

Volume I Programming
N0120 Y_I_J_K_U_D_˗ Begins machining the second rectangle;
N0130 X_ Y_ I_J_K_U_D_˗ Begins machining the 3rd rectangle;
The fine-milling inside the machined rectangle groove is to be
N0140 G138 X_ Y_ R_ Z_ I_
performed, the corresponding data are needed;
J_ K_ U_ D_ F_˗
Cancel the hole machining mode and data (except for F); the G01
N0150 G01 X_ Y_ˈ
cutting feed is performed by XY.
Note:Address I,J,K and U ofcanned cycle G110,G111,G112,G113,G114,G115,G134,G135,
G136,G137,G138 and G139 are not saved as canned cycle modal data,so the I,J and K
values need to be specified in each block,or the alarm will be generated.

3.15.6 Examples for canned cycle and tool length compensation

Referencepoint

The hole numberfrom 1to 6… drilling ĭ10

The hole number from 7 to 10… drilling ĭ20
The hole number from 11 to 13… boring ĭ95 hole (depth is 50mm)

Returnposi
tion

Startandendpointsposition

89
 GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual

The values of offset numbers H11, H15 and H 31 are separately set to 200.0, 190.0 and 150.0,
the program is as following:
Volume I Programming

N001 G92 X0 Y0 Z0 ˗ The coordinate system is set at the reference point

N002 G90 G00 Z250.0 ˗
Plane tool length compensation is performed at the initial
N003 G43 Z0 H11 ˗
plane.
N004 S30 M3 ˗ The spindle starts.
N005 G99 G81 X400.0 Y-350.0 ˗
#1 hole is machined after positioning.
Z-153.0 R-97.0 F120.0 ˗
#2 hole is machined after positioning, point R plane
N006 Y-550.0 ˗
returned.
#3 hole is machined after positioning, initial plane
N007 G98 Y-750.0 ˗
returned.
#4 hole is machined after positioning, point R plane
N008 G99 X1200.0 ˗
returned.
#5 hole is machined after positioning, point R plane
N009 Y-550.0 ˗
returned.
#6 hole is machined after positioning, initial plane
N010 G98 Y-350.0 ˗
returned
N011 G00 X0 Y0 M5 ˗ Reference point return, the spindle stops.
N012 G49 Z250.0 ˗ Tool length compensation cancellation
N013 G43 Z0 H15 ˗ Initial plane, tool length compensation.
N014 S20 M3 ˗ Spindle starts
N015 G99 G82 X550.0 Y-450.0 ˗ #7 hole is machined after positioning, point R plane
Z-130.0 R-97.0 P30 F70 ˗ returned.
#8 hole is machined after positioning, initial plane
N016 G98 Y-650.0 ˗
returned.
#9 hole is machined after positioning, point R plane
N017 G99 X1050.0 ˗
returned.
#10 hole is machined after positioning, initial plane
N018 G98 Y-450.0 ˗
returned.
N019 G00 X0 Y0 M5 ˗ Reference point return, the spindle stops.
N020 G49 Z250.0 ˗ Tool length compensation cancellation.
N021G43 Z0 H31 ˗ Tool length compensation at initial plane.
N022 S10 M3 ˗ Spindle starts.
N023 G85 G99 X800.0 Y-350.0 ˗ #11 hole is machined after positioning, point R plane
Z-153.0 R47.0 F50 ˗ returned.
N024 G91 Y-200.0 ˗ #12 and #13 are machined after positioning, point R
Y-200.0 ˗ plane returned.
N025 G00 G90 X0 Y0 M5 ˗ Reference point return, the spindle stops.
N026 G49 Z0 ˗ Tool length compensation cancellation
N027 M30 ˗ Program stops.

90
 Chapter 3 G Command

3.16 Absolute and Incremental Commands G90 and G91

Format:

Volume I Programming
G90; Absolute command
G91; Incremental command

Function:
There are two kinds of modes for commanding axis offset, one is absolute command the other is
incremental command. The absolute command is programmed by coordinate value of the terminal
position by the axis movement. The incremental command is directly programmed by the movement
value of the axis. They are separately specified by G90 and G91 commands.
Example:

Endpoint

Startpoi
nt

The above movement is programmed by absolute and incremental commands, which is as

follows:
G90 X40.0 Y70.0 ; or G91 Xˉ60.0 Y40.0;

3.17 Workpiece Coordinate System Setting G92

Function: The workpiece coordinate system is set by setting the absolute coordinate in current
position in the system (It is also called floating coordinate system). After the
workpiece coordinate is set, the coordinate value is input in absolute programming in
this coordinate system till the new workpiece coordinate system is set by G92.
Command explanation: G92, which is a non-modal G-command;
X: The new X axis absolute coordinate of current position;
Y: The new Y axis absolute coordinate of current position;
Z: The new Z axis absolute coordinate of current position;

Note:In G92 command,current coordinate value will be not changed if the X,Y and Z are not
input,the program zero is set by the current coordinate value. W hen the X,Y or Z is not
input,the coordinate axis not input keeps on the original set value.

3.18 Feed per min. G94, Feed per rev. G95

Format: G94 Fxxxx; (F0001~ F8000,the leading zero can be omitted,the feedrate per min. is
offered, mm/min.)

91
 GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual

Function: The cutting feedrate is offered in mm/min unit when the G94 is modal G command.
The G94 can be omitted if the current mode is G94.
Format: G95 Fxxxx; (F0.0001̚F500, The leading zero can be omitted˅
Volume I Programming

Command Function: The cutting feedrate is offered in mm/rev unit when the G95 is modal G
command. The G95 can be omitted if the current mode is G95. The product of F
command value (mm/r) and current spindle speed(r/min) is regarded as the
command cutting feedrate to control the actual feedrate when the G95 Fxxxx is
performed by system. The actual cutting feedrate varies with the spindle speed. The
spindle cutting feed value per rev is specified by G95 Fxxxx, it can form even cutting
grain on the surface of the workpiece. The machine should be installed spindle
encoder when the G95 mode is used.
G94 and G95 are modal G commands in same group, one of them is effective in one time. G94 is
initial modal G command, it is defaulted effective when the power is turned on.
The conversion formula for feed value per rev and per min is as following:
Fm = Fr×S
Thereinto: Fm: Feed value per min (mm/min);
Fr: Feed value per rev per rev (mm/r);
S: Spindle speed (r /min).

The feedrate value is set by system data parameter No.030 when the power is turned on for the
system; an F value is invariable after the F command is performed. The feedrate is 0 after the F0 is
executed. The F value is invariable when the system is reset or emergency stop. The feed override
is memorized when the power is
turned off.
Related parameter:
System data parameter No.029: the exponential acceleration or deceleration time constant for
cutting and manual feed;
System data parameter No.030: the lower value of exponential acceleration or deceleration on
cutting feed;
System data parameter No.031: The upper limit value for cutting feedrate (X, Y and Z axes)

Note:
The cutting feedrate becomes uneven when the spindle speed is less than 1 rev/min in G95
mode;the actual feedrate has following error when the spindle speed fluctuates. In order to
guarantee the machining quality,it is recommended that the spindle speed can not be lower
than spindle servo or the lowest speed of effective torque introduced by inverter during
machining.

3.19 G98, G99

Format:
G98˗
G99˗
Function:
G98; Tool returns to the initial plane when the hole machining is returning.
G99; Tool returns to the point R plane when the hole machining is returning.
Explanation:
92
 Chapter 3 G Command

Modal G command
G98 (Return to initial plane) G99 (Return to point R plane)

Volume I Programming
Initi
alpointl
evel Initi
alpointl
evel

PointR

Refer to the explanation for canned cycle command.

3.20 Chamfering Function

A straight line or an arc is inserted into two figures; this is called Chamfering function. The tool
can be smoothly transferred from one figure to another. GSK980MD owns two chamfering functions,
one is linear chamfering, and the other is arc chamfering.

3.20.1 Linear chamfering

The linear chamfering is that a straight line is inserted between figures of the straight lines, the
arcs, as well as the straight line and arc. The command address for linear chamfering is L. The data
followed by command address L is the length of chamfering straight line. The linear chamfering
should be employed in the G01, G02 or G03 command.

z Linear to linear
Format: G01 IP_ L_; (IP is axis movement command)
G01 IP_˗
Function: A straight line is inserted into interpolation between 2 straight lines.

93
 GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual

z Linear to circular
Format: G01 IP_ L_˗
G02/G03 IP_ R_( I_ J_ K_)˗
Volume I Programming

Function: A straight line is inserted between straight line and arc interpolation.

z Circular to circular
Format:
G02/G03 IP_ R_ (I_ J_ K_) L_˗
G02/G03 IP_ R_(I_ J_ K_)˗
Function: A straight line is inserted between two arc interpolations.

z Circular to linear
Format: G02/G03 IP_ R_(I_ J_ K_) L_˗
G01 IP_˗
Function: A straight line is inserted between the arc and linear interpolation.

94
 Chapter 3 G Command

Volume I Programming
3.20.2 Circular chamfering

An arc is inserted between the two linear figures, arc figures or linear and arc figures, this is
called circular chamfering. Tangent transition is performed between arc and figure line. The command
address is C for the arc chamfering, the data followed by command address C is the radius of
chamfering arc. The arc chamfering should be employed in command G01, G02 or G03.
z 1. Linear to linear
Format:
G01 IP_ C_˗
G01 IP_˗
Function: An arc is inserted between two linear interpolations, which it is tangential with
two linear lines, the data followed by command address C is radius.

z 2. Linear to Circular
Format:
G01 IP_ C_˗
G02/G03 IP_ R_(I_ J_ K_) ˗
Function: An arc is inserted at the intersection of straight line and arc, this arc is tangential
with both the straight line and arc, the data followed by command address C is
radius.

95
 GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual
Volume I Programming

z 3. Circular to Circular
Format:
G02/G03 IP_ R_(I_ J_ K_) C_˗
G02/G03 IP_ R_(I_ J_ K_)˗
Function: An arc is inserted between two arc interpolations which it is tangential with two
circulars, the data followed by the command address C is radius.

z 4. Circular to Linear
Format:
G02/G03 IP_ R_(I_ J_ K_) C_˗
G01 IP_˗
Function: An arc is inserted at the intersection of arc and straight line, which is tangential
with the
arc and straight line; the data following the command address C is radius.

96
 Chapter 3 G Command

Volume I Programming
3.20.3 Exceptional Cases

The chamfering function is ineffective or alarm is issued in the following circumstances:

1ˊLinear chamfering
A. The chamfering function is ineffective when two interpolation lines is shown on the same
line.
B. If the chamfering linear length is too long, and the CNC alarm occurs.

C. If some line (arc) is too short, the alarm occurs.

2ˊArc Chamfering
A. The arc chamfering function is disabled when two interpolation lines are shown on the
same line.
B. If the chamfering radius is excessive, the CNC alarm occurs.

97
 GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual

Rmax
Volume I Programming

C. The arc chamfering function is disabled when the line is tangential with arc or the arc is
tangential with line.

D. The arc chamfering function is disabled when the arcs are tangent.

Note 1:The chamfering function can be performed only in the plane specified by G17,G18 or
G19,these functions can not be performed in parallel axes.
Note 2:Changing the coordinate system by G92 or G54 to G59,or,the block followed by
performing the reference point return from G28 to G30 can not specify the chamfering.
Note 3:Chamfering function can not be employed in the DNC mode.

3.21 Rigid Tapping

The right-handed tapping cycle (G84) and left-handed tapping cycle (G74) may be performed in
standard mode or rigid tapping mode. In standard mode, the spindle is rotated and stopped along with
a movement along the tapping axis using miscellaneous functions M03 (rotating the spindle
cloclwise), M04 (rotating the spindle counterclockwise), and M05 (stopping the spindle) to perform
tapping.
In rigid mode, tapping is performed by controlling the spindle motor as if it were a servo motor
and by interpolating between the tapping axis and spindle. When tapping is performed in rigid mode,
the spindle rotates one turn every time a certain feed (thread lead) which takes place along the
tapping axis. This operation does not vary even during accleration or deceleration.

3.21.1 Rigid Tapping

Code format:
Left-handed rigid tapping: G74 X_ Y_ Z_ R_ P_ F˄I˅_ L_ C_

98
 Chapter 3 G Command

Right-handed rigid tapping: G84 X_ Y_ Z_ R_ P_ F˄I˅_ L_ C_

Code function:In rigid mode, tapping is performed by controlling the spindle motor as if it were a

Volume I Programming
servo motor and by interpolating between the tapping axis and spindle. When
tapping is performed in rigid mode, the spindle rotates one turn every time a certain
feed (thread lead) which takes place along the tapping axis. This operation does not
vary even during accleration or deceleration.

Cycle process:(1) Position to the XY plane at the rapid traverse rate;

(2) Reduce to the point R plane rapidly, then to the position where the C is specified
at the rapid traverse rate;
(3) Tapping is performed to the bottom of the hole, then the spindle stops;
(4) Dwell time P is performed if the P is specified;
(5) Spindle rotates reversely returns to the point R plane, the spindle then stops;
dwell time P is performed if the P is specified;
(6) Return to the origin plane if the command is G98;

Code path:(G74 shows a sample)

G74˄G98˅ G74˄G99˅

Џ䕈‫ذ‬ℶ Џ䕈‫ذ‬ℶ
߱ྟԡ㕂ᑇ䴶
ࡼ԰ ࡼ԰
ࡼ԰ ࡼ԰ ࡼ԰

Џ䕈ℷ䕀 3 Џ䕈‫ذ‬ℶ Џ䕈ℷ䕀 3 Џ䕈‫ذ‬ℶ

5⚍ 5⚍
Џ䕈ᅮԡ Џ䕈ᅮԡ
ࡼ԰ ࡼ԰ ࡼ԰ ࡼ԰

=⚍ =⚍
Џ䕈‫ذ‬ℶ 3 Џ䕈‫ذ‬ℶ 3
Џ䕈ড䕀 Џ䕈ড䕀
ࡼ԰ ࡼ԰

Explanations:
When the tapping operation 3 is being performed, the feedrate override can not be adjusted;
when the operation 5 is perfoming, the speed override value is set by the data parameter 084,
when the data parameter 084 is set to 0, the override value is fixed as 100%
When the tapping operation 3 is being performed, the linear acceleration or deceleration
constant value is set by the data parameter 082; when the tapping operation 5 is performed, the
linear acceleration constant value is set by data parameter 083, if the data parameter 083 is se to
0, the linear acceleration/deceleration time constant in operation 5 is set by the data parameter
082.
3.21.2 Peck Rigid Tapping
Code format:
(High-speed/standard) peck left-handed rigid tapping: G74 X_ Y_ Z_ R_ P_ F˄I˅_ L_ Q_ C_
(High-speed/standard) peck right-handed rigid tapping: G84 X_ Y_ Z_ R_ P_ F˄I˅_ L_ Q_ C_

Code function:When the peck tapping is performed in rigid tapping, due to chips sticking to the tool
or increased cutting resistance, in such cases, the preferable tapping can be performed by
the peck rigid tapping.

99
 GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual

High-speed peck rigid tapping:

When the RTPCP of state parameter No.025 is set to 1, the high-speed peck rigid tapping cycle
is selected.
Volume I Programming

After positioning along the X- and Y-axes, rapid traverse is performed to point R, then position to
the place where specifies by C. From point R, cutting is performed with depth Q (depth of cut for each
cutting feed), then the tool is retracted by distance d, the retraction speed can be overridden. When
point Z has been reached, the spindle is stopped, and then rotated in the reverse direction for
retraction. The tool retracts to the point R, the spindle stops. If it is G98 state, rapidly move to the
initial position, the Figure is shown below:

G74ǃG84˄G98˅ G74ǃG84˄G99˅
G ಲ䗔䎱⾏ G ಲ䗔䎱⾏

߱ྟԡ㕂ᑇ䴶 ߱ྟԡ㕂ᑇ䴶
Џ䕈ᅮԡ Џ䕈ᅮԡ
5⚍ 5⚍
4  G 4  G
 
4 G 4 G
 
4 4

=⚍ =⚍

Standard peck rigid tapping:

When the RTPCP of state parameter No.025 is set to 1, the standard peck rigid tapping cycle is
selected.
After positioning along the X- and Y-axes, rapid traverse is performed to point R, then position to
the place where specifies by C. From point R, cutting is performed with depth Q (depth of cut for each
cutting feed), then the tool is retracted by distance d, the retraction speed can be overridden. The
position is performed from point R to a distance d from the end of the last cutting, which is where
cutting is restarted, and the cutting feed is performed. When point Z has been reached, the spindle is
stopped, then rotated in the reverse direction for retraction. The tool retracts to the point R, the
spindle stops. If it is G98 state, rapidly move to the initial position, the Figure is shown below:

G74ǃG84˄G98˅ G74ǃG84˄G99˅
G ߛࠞᓔྟ䎱⾏ G ߛࠞᓔྟ䎱⾏

߱ྟԡ㕂ᑇ䴶 ߱ྟԡ㕂ᑇ䴶

Џ䕈ᅮԡ Џ䕈ᅮԡ
 5⚍  5⚍
4  4 
 G  G
4 4
G G
4  4 

=⚍ =⚍

Explanations:
When tapping feed is performing, the speed override can not be adjusted; when the retraction is

100
 Chapter 3 G Command

performed, the speed override value is set by data parameter 084, when the data parameter 084 is
set to 0, the override value is fixed as 100% .
The linear acceleration or deceleration constant value in tapping feed is set by data parameter

Volume I Programming
082, the linear acceleration or deceleration constant in retraction is set by data parameter 083, if the
083 is set to 0, the acceleration or deceleration constant in retaction is then set by data parameter
082. The start speed both tapping feed and retraction are set by data parameter 081, and the
retraction distance d is set by data parameter 085.

3.21.3 Address Explanation

Specified
Address Command address explanation
content
Hole position
XǃY Specify the hole position by the absolute value or incremental
data
R From the initial plane to the point distance
Z Depth of a hole, the distance from point R to the bottom of the hole
Specify the dwell time at the bottom of the hole or at point R when a return
P
is made. The dwell does not perform when it is not input or the value is 0.
Q Tool infeed value of peck tapping
Aparture It indicates that the consecutive maching cycle of L holes are performed
machining on this line segment from start (the start position of block) to XY
L
data coordinate position. The continued drilling may not perform if it is not input
or the value is 0.
Metric thread leading, the solution range: 0.001~500mm. The alarm 201
F
may alarm if it is not input.
The number of the thread head per/inch, the solution range is
I
0.06~25400 gear/inch
C Start angle

3.21.4 Technic Specification

z Acceleration/deceleration
Rigid tapping adopts the acceleration or deceleration before a straight line to control.
z Override
The override regulation is invalid for rigid tapping infeed, but the override value can be adjusted
or not which is determined by data parameter.
z Dry run
G84/G74 can be used a dry run, the dry run equals to the feedrate along Z axis. The override
adjustment is invalid in dry run.
z Machine lock
G84/G74 can be used a machine lock, the tapping axis and spindle axis are not moved when the
machine lock is enabled.
z Resetting
The resetting can be reset the tapping when the rigid tapping is performed, but the G74/G84 can
be not be reset.
z Dwell
The dwell is disabled.
z Working
G84/G74 is only valid in Auto or MDI mdoe.

101
 GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual

z Manual feed
The rigid tapping can not used for manual feed.
z Tool length compensation
Volume I Programming

If the tool length compensation (G43, G44 or G49) is specified in canned cycle, the offset value is
added till position to the point R.
z Cutter compensation
Cutter compensation is ignored in canned cycle.
z Axis switching
The Z axis tapping can only be performed in rigid mode.
z S code
If the command speed is more than the maximum speed, the alarm may occur.
z M29
Specify an axis movement code between M29 and G84/G74 causes alarm.
z P/Q
If they are specified in non-drilling block (If they are specified in a block that does not perform
drilling), they are not stored as modal data. When Q0 is specified, the peck rigid tapping cycle is not
performed.
Specify them in tapping block, they are stored as modal data, when the tapping command is
retracted, either Q modal (did it).
z Cancellation
Do not specify a group 01 G code and G84/G74 in the same block.
z A Cs contour control is used with rigid tapping at the same time.
CS axis selects a speed mode or position mode which is determined by CON (G27.7), but, the
system is rigid tapping mode, regardless of the value of CON. After the rigid tapping is cancelled, the
rotation axis is either CS axis or common one which is determined by state parameter. The C axis can
not be moved in manual mode when the rigid tapping is not cancelled.

3.21.5 Specify a Rigid Tapping Mode

z Specify M29 before G74/G84
G84 shows a sample for the following time-sequence

102
 Chapter 3 G Command

0

Volume I Programming
57$3)
ࡼ԰ ࡼ԰

*ᠻ㸠

ሣ㬑ࡼ԰
6ᣛҸؐ䕧ߎ

5*7$3˄*˅

),1˄*˅

Џ䕈ᮟ䕀ࡼ԰

Џ䕈ℷ䕀6)5ֵো

z Specify M29 and G74/G84 at the same block

G84 shows a sample for the following time-sequence
0

57$3)
ࡼ԰ ࡼ԰
*ᠻ㸠

ሣ㬑ࡼ԰
6ᣛҸؐ䕧ߎ

5*7$3˄*˅

),1˄*˅
Џ䕈ᮟ䕀ࡼ԰

Џ䕈ℷ䕀6)5ֵো

z The explanation of time sequence

The spindle rotation operation means that the rotation axis is shifted to the position control mode
(namaly, the servo spindle is needed to send a switch signal in position mode), and check the position
mode arrial signal of servo spindle.

3.21.6 The cancellation of rigid tapping mode

z The rigid tapping mode is canceled by G80
z Specify other canned cycles by G codes
z The other G codes of group 1.
z CNC resetting

103
 GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual

The signal descending of F76.3 along the signal with canceling the rigid tapping of PLC, if the
state RTCRG of parameter 025 is equal to 1, the system is then performed the next block without
waiting for the rigid tapping mode signal which G61.0 is set to 0;
Volume I Programming

When the state parameter 025.2 (CRG) =0, the time sequence is as follows:
*៪㒘*ҷⷕ

57$3˄)˅

6ᣛҸؐ䕧ߎ

5*7$3*
Џ䕈ᮟ䕀ࡼ԰

Џ䕈䕀ࡼֵো

When the state parameter 025.2 (CRG) =1, the time sequence is as follows:

*៪㒘*ҷⷕ

57$3˄)˅

6ᣛҸؐ䕧ߎ

5*7$3*
Џ䕈ᮟ䕀ࡼ԰

Џ䕈䕀ࡼֵো

3.21.7 F and G Signals

RGTAP (G61.0): Rigid tapping signal
When the M 29 is commanded, PMC enters the rigid tapping mode, and the signal is then set to
1 to inform the CNC
1: PMC enters the rigid tapping mode
0: PMC does not enter the rigid tapping mode
If this signal does not set to 1, after the M29 has been commanded, the alarm may occur in the
block of G74/G84.
RGSPM, RGSPP (F65.1, 0) spindle turning signal
When the rigid tapping is performed, the signal is informed to the PMC whether the current
spindle is CCW (positive) or CW (negative).
RGSPM: 1 spindle CW (negative) RGSPP: 1 spindle CCW (positive)
In rigid tapping, these signals are output when the spindle is rotated. In the mode of rigid tapping,
when the spindle is positioned at the hole or stoppted at the bottom of the hole or R position, these
signals are not output.
In the mode of rigid tapping, when the spindle is positioned at the inter-locked stop, machine lock
or Z axis ignorance states, the spindle does not regard as a stop state, in this case, these signals are
output. These signals are only enabled in rigid tapping, and they are all set to 0 in the normal spindle
control mode.

104
 Chapter 3 G Command

RTAP (F76.3): Rigid tapping process signal

This signal informs PMC which has been in the mode of rigid tapping or not. The CNC is in the

Volume I Programming
mode of rigid tapping currently when the signal is set to 1.
This signal can be locked M29, PLC has been commanded the rigid tapping mode, the PMC is
then treated with the correspinding logic, and this signal can be replaced the lock of M29, even so,
the FIN singl of M29 is not ignored still.

3.21.8 Alarm Message

Alarm
Display Content Explanation
No.
218 Fail to specify the tool pitch F value in G74 or G84 Fail to specify F value
230 The spindle feed can not be performed due to the S value is 0, or S code does not specify.
S value is 0.
231 S value exceeds the maximum spindle speed S value exceeds the setting value of data
allowed with rigid tapping parameter 086
232 Other axis movement codes are specified Specify a axis movement between M29 and
between M29 and G74/G84. G74/G84__
233 G61.0 signal is abnormal in rigid tapping mode Rigid tapping signal G61.0 is not 1 during
performing in G74/G84.
234 Specify M29 repeatedly Specify M29 or it is consecutively specified
more than twice in rigid tapping.

3.21.9 Program Example

G84 shows an example for the following program
O1000 (Rigid tapping example);
G0 X0 Y0 Z0˗
M29 S200;
G84 X10 Y10 Z-10 R-5 P2000 F2 C20;
X20 C40
G80;
M30;

105
 GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual

CHAPTER 4 CONTROL FUNCTION of ADDITIONAL AXIS

Volume I Programming

4.1 General
The additional axis is determined by the struction design of the machine, sometimes, an
additional axis is required, for example, the cycle working table, rotation working table. This axis can
be designed as both a linear axis and rotation axis. The basis controllable number of 980MDa is three
axes, the maximum axis is 5-axis (Cs axis included). Namely, two additional axes are added based
upon the original one — — the 4th and the 5th axes, in this case, the relative functions of additional
linear axis and rotation axis can be performed.

4.2 Axis Name

The names of three basis axes are always X, Y or Z. The axis name of additional axis can be set
to A, B or C using data parameter No.202 and No.203.
z Default axis name
When the axis name does not set, the axis name of the 4th one is an additional axis by default;
the axis name of the 5th one is C.
z Repeated axis name
When the axis name is same between the added 4th axis and the 5th axis, P/S alarm may issue.

4.3 Axis Display

When the additional axis is treated as rotation axis, the least incremental of the rotation axis
is 0.01°(degree), so the 3rd digit of the decimal is displayed in unit. If it is set to a linear axis, the
display is same as the basis three axes (X, Y or Z). When the 4th axis is set to a linear axis, the
5th is set to a rotation axis, the axis is displayed at the interface of “related coordinate”and
“coordinate & program”.

106
 Chapter 4 Control Function of Additional Axis

Volume I
Programming
4.4 Axis Startup
The Bit 1 (ROSx) of data parameter No.026 and Bit0 (ROTx) of data parameter No.028 are
separately set to use whether the 4th axis and the 5th axis is either the linear axis or rotation axis. The
parameter settings are shown below:

ROS ROT Content

Linear axis
1. It can be switched between metric and inch;
0 0
2. All of the coordinate values are linear axis;
3. The stored pitch error compeneation is linear axis.
Rotation axis (Type A)
1. It can not be switched between metric and inch;
2. The machine coordinates are cycled based on the setting value
of data parameter No.189/No.190. Whether the absolute
0 1 coordinate and relative coordinate are cycled which based
upon the data parameter No.027/No.029;
3. The stored pitch error compensation is rotation axis;
4. The movement amount is less than one turn when the reference
position (G28, G30) is returned.
1 0 Ineffective setting (forbidden)
Rotation axis (Type B)
1. It can not be switched between metric and inch;
2. The machine coordinate is linear axis; whether the absolute
1 1
coordinate and relative coordinate are cycled which based on
the data parameter No.027/No.029.
3. The stored pitch error compeneation is linear axis.

Note:The start of the function of the Cs axis,the Bit 5 digits (RCSx)of the state parameter No.026 or No.028
can be set whether the function of Cs axis is enabled when the rotation axis is enabled (ROTx=1).

4.5 The Additional Axis is Linear Axis

When the additional axes (the 4th and the 5th axes) are set to linear axes, its functions are same
as the basis three axes.
z Realizable operation
1. Rapid traverse (Positioning): G90/91 G00 X_ Y_ Z_ A_;
2. Cutting feed: G90/91 G01 X_ Y_ Z_ A_ F_;
3. Skip function: G90/91 G31 X_ Y_ Z_ A_ F_;

107
 GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual

4. Reference position return: G28/29/30 X_ Y_ Z_ A_ F_;

5. G92 coordinate setting: G92 X_ Y_ Z_ A_ ;
6. Manual/Step/MPG feed, Manual machine zero return.
Volume I Programming

Note:W hen there is no special explanation in the subsequent narration,the axis names of additional
linear axes are expressed with “A”.

z Explanations
1. When the additional linear axis rapidly moves or performs, it can be simultaneously
specified with any axes of X, Y and Z. Each axis may rapidly move at its customized speed.
2. When the additonal linear axis is performed the cutting feed (G01) or used a skip function
(G31), it can be simultaneously specified with any axes of X, Y and Z. in this case, the linear axis
does not has an individual feedrate F but depend on each axis specified at a same time, which it
is started or ended together with the specified each axis; namaly, the additional axis is shared
with the basis three-axis linkage.
3. The additional linear axis can not performed a circular arc cutting (G02/03), otherwise, the
P/S alarm may occur.
4. The pitch error of additional linear axis and the compensation function of inverse interval
are same as the basis three-axis.

4.6 The additional axis is rotation axis

z Input unit
The pulse equivlance (namally, the least input unit) of 980MDa rotation axis is 0.01°(degree);
the maximum vlaue of output pulse frequence is 500K.
When the selection is output based on the direction of pulse adding, it can be inputted a
maximum speed n=60*f/36000=833.33 (rev./min.)

z Rotation axis speed

The feedrate of rotation axis is regarded the degree/min. as a unit. When the linear axis X, Y and
Z is performed a linear interporlation with the rotation axis, the speed specified with F (mm/min) is the
compound feedrate both X, Y and Z and the rotation axis.
Feedrate calculation: Calculate the required time when the feedrate is performed to the end; then,
the feedrate unit of rotation axis is changed into degree/min..
For example: G91 G01 X20.0 C40.0 F300.0;
The unit of C axis is switched into 40mm from the 40.0 degree. The required time to the end is:
202  402 (min.)
0.
14907
300
The speed of C axis is:
40
02683 (degree/min.)
.
0.14907

Note:W hen there is no special explanation in the subsequent narration,the axis names of additional
linear axes are expressed with “C”.

z The cycle function of rotation axis

The coordinate cycle function of the additional rotation axis setting is enabled, which can be

108
 Chapter 4 Control Function of Additional Axis

avoided the coordinate value is overflowed from the rotation axis; the coordinate value will be
cycled based on the setting value of data parameter No.189/No.190 (the movement amount of
each axis for the rotation axis).

Volume I
When the coordinate cycle function of the additional rotation axis setting is disabled, the
coordinate value may change based on the linear axis, the programming command is also same
to the one of the linear axis;

Programming
Two kinds of coordinates change are shown below:
(1) When the coordinate cycle is disabled:
C-axis positive

-9999e -180e 0e 180e 360e 9999e

The above-mentioned may occur: 1. The machine coordinate value of rotation axis (Type B)
2. The absolute coordinate value in data parameter No.027
ROAx=0 (absolute coordinate cycle function is disabled)
3. The relative coordinate value in data parameter No.027 RRLx=0
(relative coordinate cycle function is disabled)

(2) When the coordinate cycle is enabled:

C-axis positive
0e 360e 0e 360e 0e 360e
The above-mentioned may occur: 1. The machine coordinate value of rotation axis (Type A)
2. The absolute coordinate value in data parameter No.027 ROAx=1
(absolute coordinate cycle function is enabled)
3. The relative coordinate value in data parameter No.027 RRLx=1
(relative coordinate cycle function is enabled)

Note 1: Refer to the Section of “Installation and connection” of the Parameter Explanation of Chapter
Three for the parameter setting of additional rotation axis.
Note 2: When there is no special explanation in the subsequentnarration, the movement amount of each
revolution of the additional rotation axis is expressed with 360°.

z The pitch error compensation function of rotation axis

When the additional axis is a linear axis or rotation axis (Type B), the pitch error
compensation mode is same as the common linear axis. The pitch error compensation function
is performed when the additional axis is regarded as rotation axis (Type A), refer to the following
examples:

z Movement amount per revolution: 360°

z Pitch error pisition interval: 45°
z The compensation position number of reference position: 60
After the above parameters are set, the farthest compensation position number along the
negative rotation axis which equals to the compensation position number of reference position;
The farthest compensation number along positive direction is shown below:
The compensation position number of reference point + (movement amount per
revolution/compensation position interval) = 60 + 360/45 = 68;
The corresponding relationships between machine coordinate and compensation position
number are as follows:

109
 GSK980M Da M illing CNC System User M anual
Volume I Programming

The position error may occur if the total of compensation value from position 61~68 is not 0;
there is not alternative other than to set a same value at the compensation position both 60 and
68. (Because the 60 and 68 are shared a same position at the circle);

The compensation sample is shown below:

NO. 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68
Compensation 1 -2 1 3 -1 -1 -3 2 1
value

z The reverse interval compensation function of rotation axis

The reverse interval compensation never changes regardless of the linear axis or rotation
axis; however, the compensation unit of the rotation axis is 0.01° (deg), and the linear axis is
0.001 (mm);

4.7 The zero return D of rotation axis

The selection axis has four zero return methods: zero return method A, B, C and D. Wherein,
the zero return methods A, B and C are same as the one of the linear axis. Only the D is a
special zero return method for the rotation axis.

z Setting of the zero return method D

110
 Chapter 4 Control Function of Additional Axis

The method D is only valid to the rotation axis.

Zero return can be performed for this rotation axis using the mode D after the 4th and the 5th
axes are set to rotation axes based on the Bit6 of data parameter No.027 and No.029 are set to
1.

Volume I Programming
If the 4th and 5th axes are disabled or linear axes, then the Bit6 of state parameter No.027
and No.029 are invalid.

0 2 7 RRT4
RRT4 = 1: The zero return mode of the 4th rotation axis is used the mode D;
= 0: The zero return mode of the 4th rotation axis is used the mode A, B, and C.

0 2 9 RRT5
RRT5 = 1: The zero return mode of the 5th rotation axis is used the mode D;
= 0: The zero return mode of the 5th rotation axis is used the mode A, B and C.
z The time sequence and process of the zero return mode D

Mode D Rapid
Slow

PC
Stop
V
Rapid

Slow

The process of zero return

1. Select the machine zero return mode and press the manual positive feed key, the
corresponding axis moves toward the zero point at the rapid traverse rate.
2. When the one-turn signal (PC) of servo axis is carried out, the system is decelerated to the
zero return low speed, in this case, check the trailing edge of PC signal.
3. The system continuously and forward operates in the zero return low speed.
4. When the system meets one-turn signal (PC) of servo axis again, the movement stops,
simultaneously, the corresponding indicator of zero return end on operator panel goes on. The
machine zero return operation ends. In this case, checkthe rising edge of PC signal.

4.8 The Function of Cs Axis

General
The spindle is treated as the servo feed axis to rotate and position by the position
movement command. Run speed is: degree/min., it can be interpolated together with
other feed axes to machine a contour curve.
Increment system: the least input increment: 0.01deg
The least command increment: 0.01deg
Explanation: NC has two control modes for the spindle.

111
 GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual

z Spindle speed control mode. The spindle speed can be controlled by the speed
command (Namely, analog voltage).
z Spindle contour control mode (It is also called CS contour control). The spindle
Volume I Programming

position can be controlled by the position command (Namely, position pulse).

So, NC is required the spindle servo control unit has two control modes for the control of
the spindle motor
z When NC is at the speed control mode for the control of the spindle, the spindle
servo control unit can receive a speed command issued from NC to control the
rotation speed of spindle motor.
z When NC is at the contour control mode for the control of the spindle, the spindle
servo drive unit also can receive a position command issued from NC to control the
motor operates to a specified position.

NC system
Spindle speed Spindle contour
control mode control mode

Speed command Position command

(Analog voltage) (Position pulse)

Speed control mode Position control mode

Spindle servo controller

Spindle motor

Set Cs contour control axis

In the 980MDa system, only the additional axis (the 4th or the 5th axis) can be set to a Cs
contour control axis. But, two Cs axes can not be set at the same time. Before the Cs axis setting
is valid, this axis must be set to a rotation axis. Otherwise, Cs axis setting is invalid.

0 2 6 *** *** RCS4 *** *** *** ROS4 ROT4

th
RCS4 =1: The CS axis function of the 4 axis is enabled;
=0: The CS axis function of the 4th axis is disabled.
ROS4, ROT4: Set the type of the 4th axis;
Linear Type A Type B Invalid
axis rotation rotation
axis axis
ROT4 0 1 1 0
ROS4 0 0 1 1

0 2 8 *** *** RCS5 *** *** *** ROS5 ROT5

th
RCS5 =1: The CS axis function of the 5 axis is enabled.

112
 Chapter 4 Control Function of Additional Axis

=0: The CS axis function of the 5th axis is disabled.

ROS5, ROT5: Set the type of the 5th axis;
Linear Type A Type B Invalid

Volume I Programming
axis rotation rotation
axis axis
ROT5 0 1 1 0
ROS5 0 0 1 1
The switch between spindle speed control and CS contour control
The NC switching of spindle control mode is performed by the CON signal of PLC.
In the CS contour control mode of NC, the CS contour control axis, as the common
servo axis, can be performed manually or automatically.
z From spindle speed control shifts to the Cs contour control
Set the CON (G027#7) to 1, then the spindle can be set in the Cs contour control
mode. If the switch is performed during the spindle rotation, the spindle is
immediately stopped and then shifts.
z From Cs contour control shifts to the spindle speed control
Set the CON (G027#7) to 0, the spindle is then set in the spindle speed control mode.
Confirm the spindle movement command has been ended before shifting, if the shift
is performed when the spindle is being moved, the system will alarm.
The reference position return of Cs contour control axis
After the spindle is shifted to the Cs contour control mode from the speed control
mode, the current position is not confirmed, the spindle should be returned to the
reference position.
The reference position return of Cs contour control axis is as follows:
z Manual reference position return
After the spindle enters the Cs contour control mode, shift to the machine zero return
mode. The zero return of Cs axis is performed opening the feed axis and the
direction selection signal ˇJn (G100) or ˉJn (G102).
z Automatic
Specify G28 after the spindle enters the Cs contour control mode, and the spindle
moves to the intermediate point and then return to the reference position.
ZPn (F094) becomes 1 after the referece position return is executed.

The operation of Cs contour control axis

(Manual/Automatic)
If the Cs contour control axis has been returned to the reference position, the operation
of Cs axis is same as the common NC axis.
In the spindle speed control, the Cs contour control axis can not be performed.
Otherwise, the system alarms.
So, in the spindle speed control mode, it is not permitted the manual operation of Cs by
the PLC ladder diagram.
The signal shift of spindle contour control
CON (G027#7)
[Type] Signal input
[Function] This signal is used for shifting between spindle speed control mode

113
 GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual

and Cs contour control mode.

When this signal is set to 1, the spindle is shifted to the Cs contour
control mode from speed control mode.
Volume I Programming

When this signal is set to 0, the Cs contour control mode comes

backto the speed control mode.
The signal shift end of spindle contour control
FSCSL(F044#1)
[Type] Signal output
[Function] This signal indicates that the controlled axis has been controlled
under the Cs contour.
[Output condition] Spindle speed control mode ˉ> 0
Cs contour control mode ˉ> 1
CNC and spindle servo control unit
The signal shift relationship of the spindle working

CNC system Spindle servo controller

The signal input of

NC PLC
CON spindle servo
working

The signal output of

FSCSL spindle servo
working

User shifts and inputs

for the spindle working

Time sequence figure

Input shif by the
user
The spindle servo work at the
position mode
The signal input of
spindle servo
working The spindle servo shifts in working mode

The signal output

of spindle servo
working The spindle servo shifts in working mode

CON˄G027#7˅

FSCSL˄F044#1˅

NC spindle control mode switch NC spindle control mode switch

114
 Chapter 4 Control Function of Additional Axis

Relative parameter

0 7 7 The start speed of acceleration/deceleration of CS axis

Volume I Programming
Resolution range: 0̚5000 (Unit:deg/min)
0 7 8 The acceleration/deceleration time constant of CS axis
Resolution range: 10̚4000 (Unit: ms)

z The explanation of “two points same”

Radius compensation mode is pre-read two blocks. Caculate the transit point and perform a path
movement taking 3 position points (the start of the 1st block, the intersection of the 1st and the 2nd
blocks, the end of the 3rd block). In this case, “two same points”may occur in the following items:
(a) The first two points are same when starting.
(b) The last two points are same when starting.
(c) The first two points are same during the compensation.
(d) The last two points are same during the compensation.
(e) The first two points are same during the retraction.
(f) The last two points are same during the retraction.
The “two same points”is regarded the point as a linear of which approximates to zero, when the
“two same points”occurs, the transit point calculation can be performed based on the straight line
(point) to straight line (point), straight line (point) to circular arc (point), circular arc (point) to straight
line (point) and circular arc (point) to circular arc (point).

115
 GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual

CHAPTER 5 MACRO PROGRAM

GSK980MDa provides macro programs which is similar to high level language. Variable
Volume I Programming

assignment, arithmetic operation, logical j

udgment and conditional branch can be realized through
custom macro program. It is in favor of the programming for special parts, lessens the complex
operation and simplifies the custom program.

Custom macro programs are similar to subprograms. However, macro program allows variable
assignment, arithmetic operation, logical j
udgment and conditional branch, which makes it easier to
program the same machining process.

Macro program body

10 and 5 respectively call macro

program and define variables #1 Variables #1 and #4 can be
and #4 used to replace the unknown
movement distance

It is easy to machine the screw holes distributed in circles (shown in the figure above).
After a macro program used in circular holes is programmed and edited, it can be performed if the
NC system has circular hole machining function.
By the following command, programming personnel can use circular holes function.
G65 P p Rr A a B b Kk ˗
p˖Macro program number of circular holes
r˖Radius
a˖Start angle of the hole
b˖Angle of holes intervals
k˖Holes number
In this way, users can improve the NC performance on their own. Macro programs can be either
provided by machine tool builder or defined by users.

116
 Chapter 5 Macro Program

5.1 Macro Call

Macro call (G65, G66) differs from subprogram call (M98) as described below:

Volume I Programming
1. With G65 or G66, an argument (data passed to a macro) can be specified. M98 does not have
this capability.
2. When an M98 block contains another NC command (for example, G01 X100.0 M98 P), the
macro program P_ is called after the command G01 is executed. On the other hand G65
unconditionally calls a macro P_.
3. When an M98 block contains another NC command (for example,G01 X100.0 M98 P_), the
machine stops in the single block mode. On the other hand, G65 does not stop the machine.
4. With G65 or G66, the level of local variables changes. With M98, the level of local variables
does not change.

z Non-modal call˄G65˅
When G65 is specified, the macro program specified at address P is called. Argument (data) can be
passed to the custom macro program.
Format˖G65 P_ L_ <argument>_˗
Explanation˖P — — number of the program to be called
L — — repetition count˄1 by default, 1 to 9999 can be specified˅
<Argument> — — Data passed to the macro. Its value is assigned to the corresponding
local variables.

(Program) Data(argument) (Custom macro) Data (argument)assigned to

localvariables#1 and#2
O0001 O9010
G90 G0 X50 Y50˗ …
… G01 G42X#1 Y#2F300˗
G02X#1 Y-#1 R#2˗
G65P9010 A50 B20 L3˗ #3 = #1 + #2˗
… …
M 30˗ M 99˗

Argument specification: two types of argument specification are available.

Argument specification I˖it uses letter other than G, L, O, N and P once each. In repeated
specification, the last one prevails.
Argument specification I

117
 GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual

Note ġ Addresses that need not to be specified can be omitted. Local variables
corresponding to an omitted address are set to null.
Volume I Programming

Argument specification II˖Uses A, B, C and Ii, Ji, Ki (i is 1~10) and automatically decides the
argument specification type according to the letters and the sequence. Uses A, B, C once each
and uses I, J, and K up to ten times.

Argument specification II

Note 1ġSubscripts of I, J and K for indicating the order of argument specification are not
written in the actual program.
Note 2ġArgument I, J, K do not need to be written in orders. They will be identified
according to the present sequence. For example: G65 P9010 A1 B2 C3 I14 J15 I6 J7
K9 K11 K12 J30;The variables are passed as follows:
I14ĺ#4ēJ15ĺ#5ēI6ĺ#7ēJ7ĺ#8ēK9ĺ#6ēK11ĺ#9ēK12ĺ#12ēJ30ĺ#11Ģ
Format˖G65 must be specified before any argument.
Mixture of argument specifications I and II: The CNC internally identifies argument
specification I and II. If a mixture of argument specification I and II is specified, the type of
argument specification specified later take precedence.
Example
G65 P9001 A1.
2 B2.
0 I-3.
3 I4 D5;

<variable>
#1˖1.2
#2˖2.0
#3˖Null
#4˖-3.3
#5˖Null
#6˖Null
#7˖4

z
5
Modal call˄G66˅
Once G66 is issued to When
specifyboth I4 and call,
a modal D5 arguments
a macro are commanded
is called after aforblock specifying
variable # 7 in this example, the later, D5 is valid.
movement along axes is executed. This continues until G67 is issued to cancel a modal call.
Note: The format, functions and argument specification of G65 are identical with that of the
G65 (non-modal call). (Refer to the introduction of G65 for detailed description).

Modal call nesting˖Modal calls can be nested by specifying another G66 code during

118
 Chapter 5 Macro Program

a modal call.
Explanation˖1. In the specified G66 block, onlyargument is passed, and macro modal call
will not be executed.

Volume I Programming
2. Macro modal call can only be executed in the blocks with G00, G01, G02,
and G03
3. No macro program can be called in a block which contains a code such as
miscellaneous function that does not involve movement along an axis.
4. G65 and G66 should not be specified at the same time.
5. Multiple macro programs cannot be called in G66 block.
6. As with G65, G66 should be specified prior to arguments and P.

z Sample program
¾ G65 call (bolt hole circle)
Create a macro program for machining holes on a circle. The radius is I;start angle is A;
holes interval is B, holes number is H;the center of the circle is (X,Y). Commands can be
specified in either the absolute or incremental mode. To drill in the clockwise direction,
specifya negative value for B.

Format˖G65 P9100 Xx Yy Zz Rr Ii Aa Bb Hh;

X˖X coordinate of center point (absolute or incremental)(#24)
Y˖Y coordinate of center point (absolute or incremental)(#25)
Z˖Hole depth˄#26˅
R˖Coordinates of an rapid approaching point˄#18˅
F˖Cutting feedrate˄#9˅
I˖Circle radius˄#4˅
A˖Drilling start angle˄#1˅
B˖Incremental angle (clockwise when negative value is specified). (#2)
H˖Number of holes ˄#11˅
Macro call ˖O0002
G90 G00 X0 Y0 Z100;
G65 P9100 X100 Y50 R30 Z-50 F500 I100A45 B30 H5;
M30;

Macro program˄the called program˅˖O9100

#3=#4003 … … … … … … … … … … … .. Stores G codes of 03 group
IF[#3 EQ 90]GOTO 1;… … … … … … … Branches to N1 in the G90 mode
#24=#5001+#24;… … … … Calculates the X coordinate of the center point
#25=#5002+#25;… … … … … Calculates the Y coordinate of the center point
N1 WHILE [#11 GT 0]DO 1;… … … Until the number of remaining holes reaches 0
#5=#24+#4*COS[#1];… … … … … … … .Calculates the hole position on X axis
#6=#25+#4*SIN[#1];… … … … … … … ..Calculates the hole position on X axis
G90 G81 X#5 Y#6 Z#26 R#18 F#9;… … Drilling after moving to the target position
#1=#1+#2;… … … … … … … … … … … … Updates the angles
#11=#11-1;… … … … … … … … … … .… .Decrements the number of holes
END 1;

119
 GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual

G#3 G80;… … … … … … … … … Returns the G codes to the original state.

M99;
Argumentmeanings˖#3 store G codes of 03 group
Volume I Programming

#5 X coordinate of the next hole to drill

#6 Y coordinate of the next hole to drill

¾ G66 modal call

Shown as follows:machine 3 holes (h1,h2,h3)

Current tool
position

Call format˖G66 P9201Aa Bb Cc; ˄the argument in this example is assumed˅

Macro program˖ O0001

G90 G17 G00 X0 Y0 Z0˗
G00 X150 Y20˗ -----------------------position
G66 P9201A-10 B-40 C2000˗-----pass the argument, be readyfor machining
G00 X100 Y20˗------------------------position to h1, call macro program (hole machining)
G00 X50 Y65˗--------------------------position to h1, call macro program (hole machining)
M09˗ ---------------------non-movement code, does not call macro program
G00 X0 Y23.5˗---------position to h1, call macro program (hole machining)
G67˗--------------------------------------cancel macro program modal call
G00 X150 Y20˗-------------------------positioning return
M30;

Called macro program˖O9201˄machining process˅

G81 G98 R#1 Z#2 F#3˗
M99˗

5.2 Variables
An ordinary machining program specifies a G code and the travel distance directly with a numeric
value, for example, G01 and X100.0. With a custom macro program, numerical value can be
specified directly or using variables, for example, G#101 X#102. When variables are used, the
variable value can be changed byprograms or using operation on the MDI panel.

120
 Chapter 5 Macro Program

z Representation and using methods ofvariables

Differ from argument (data), variables are considered as the carrier of data, for example, #1,

Volume I Programming
#101 … are variables;A100, B200 … are arguments. Data of arguments A100, B200 should be
transferred to variable #1 and #2. When using or programming macro programs, numerical value can
be specified directly (such as G01, X100)or using variables (such as G#01, X#07). When variables
are used, the variable value can be changed byprograms or using operation on the panel.
The address value of a macro body can be specified by variables. The variable value can be set
by the main program or be assigned the calculated value when executing the macro body. Multiple
variables can be identified bynumbers.

(1)Variable representation
A number sign # followed bya variable number is shown as follows:
#i (i = 1, 2, 3, 4 … … ). For example:#5, #109, #1005
(2). Omission of decimal point
When a variable value is defined in a program, the decimal point can be omitted. For
example:when defining #1=123, the actual value of variable #1 is 123.000.
(3). Referencing variables
To reference the value of a variable in a program, specify a word address followed by the
variable number. A program with an expression <address>#i or <address>-#i indicates that the
variable value or negative value is used as address value.
For example: Z-#110… when #110 = 250, it is equals to Z-250.
G#130… when #130 = 3, it is equals to G3
(4). Replace variable numbers with variables

When replace variable numbers with variables, #9100 rather than ##100 is used, the 9 followed
# means the replacement. For example:when #100 = 105, #105 = 500,
X#9100 and X500 are equal. i.e. X#9100 ĺ X##100ˈX#105 ĺ X500
X-#9100 and X-500 are equal.
NoteġProgram number o,sequence number N and optional block skip number ‘/’cannot
be followed with variables. For example:O#1, /#2, N#3 .

121
 GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual

z Variable display
Macro variables 02000 N00000
No. Data No. Data No. Data
Volume I Programming

100 Null 108 108.000 116 Null

101 12.235 109 Null 117 Null

102 110100101 110 Null 118 Null

103 0.000 111 Null 119 Null

104 0.000 112 Null 120 Null

105 Null 113 ********** 121 Null
106 Null 114 Null 122 Null
107 Null 115 Null 123 Null
No. 108
EDIT S0000 T01 H00

1. On macro variable page, “Null”indicates the variable is null, i,e, undefined. The mark **********
indicates the variable value overflows of the range (but the internal stored data maynot overflow).
2. The value of common variables (#100~#199ˈ#500~#999)can be displayed on macro variable
page, or be assigned directlybyinputting data on the page.
3. The value of local variables (#1~#33)and system variables do not have display screen. A value
of local variable or system variable can be displayed byassigning the value to common variables.
4. Variable data range:integral type:-2147483648~2147483647ˈ real number type˖-1047~-10-29,
0, or 10-29~1047.

Intergra type:2147483648~2147483647 real number type:-1047~-10-29, 0, or 10-29~1047.

z Types ofvariables
Variables are classified into four types byvariable number:

Variable Type of
Function Range Remark
number variable
This variable is always null. No
Null
#0 value can be assigned to this NULL
variable
variable.
Local variable can only be used
within a macro to hold data such as
the results of operations. When the
Local
#1~#33 power is turned off, local variables
variable
are initialized to null. When a
macro is called, arguments are
assigned to local variables.
Common Common variables can be shared read/
#100~#199 variable among different macro programs. When the power is write/
turned off, variables
122
 Chapter 5 Macro Program

are initialized to null.

When the power is
display
#500~#999 turned off, data is

Volume I Programming
stored
#1000~#1015 G54, G55 output
Read
Store G54, G55, read all 16 bits of
#1032 only
a signal at one time
System
#1100~#1115 G54, G55 input
variable 0,1 processed byPLC
Store G54, G55,write all 16 bits of a
#1132 ˄234˅ Read/wr
signal at one time
ite
Store G56~G59, write all 32 bits of
#1133
a signal at one time
System Tool length compensation wear Read/wr
#2001~#2032 -9999.999~9999.999
variable ite
Tool length compensation -9999.999~9999.999 Read/wr
#2201~#2232
ite
Cutter compensation wear -9999.999~9999.999 Read/wr
#2401~#2432
ite
Cutter compensation wear -9999.999~9999.999 Read/wr
#2601~#2632
ite
Automatic operation Read/wr
0ˈ1ˈ2ˈ3
control— #3003 ite
#3003~#3004
Automatic operation Read/wr
0~7
control— #3004 ite
The number of machined parts Read/wr
#3901 0~99999999
ite
G00, G01, G02, G03, G73, G74,
G80, G81, G82, G83, G84, G85,
Read
#4001 G86, G88, G89, G110, G111, modal G code group1
only
G112, G113, G114, G115, G134,
G135, G136, G137, G138, G139
G17, G18, G19— #4002 Read
modal G code group 2
only
#4002~#4003
G90, G91— #4003 Read
modal G code group 3
only
G94, G95— #4005 Read
modal G code group 5
only
G20, G21— #4006 Read
#4005~#4007 modal G code group 6
only
G40, G41, G42— #4007 Read
modal G code group 7
only
G43, G44, G49 Read
#4008 modal G code group 8
only
G98, G99 modal G code group Read
#4010
10 only
G54~G59
#4014 modal G code group Read

123
 GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual

14 only
D code Read
#4107 0~32
only
Volume I Programming

F code Read
#4109 0~15000
only
H code Read
#4111 0~32
only
M code— #4113 Read
0~99
only
Sequence number— #4114 Read
#4113~#4115 0~99999
only
Program number — #4115 Read
0~9999
only
S code— #4119 Read
0~9999
only
#4119~#4120
T code— #4120 Read
0~32
only
1~5 axes; block end point;
Read
#5001~5005 workpiece coordinate system;tool -9999.999~9999.999
only
compensation value not included
1~5 axes; current position;
Read
#5021~5025 machine coordinate system; tool -9999.999~9999.999
only
compensation value included
1~5 axes, the current position,
Read
#5041~5045 workpiece coordinate system -9999.999~9999.999
only
contain tool compensation value
1~5 axes, skip signal position;
Read
#5061~5065 workpiece coordinate system;tool -9999.999~9999.999
only
compensation value included
1~5 axes; tool length
Read
#5081~5085 System compensation value; current -9999.999~9999.999
only
variable execution value.
1~5 axes;external workpiece zero Read/wr
#5201~5205 -9999.999~9999.999
point offset value ite
1~5 axes, G54 workpiece zero Read/wr
#5221~5225 -9999.999~9999.999
point offset value ite
1~5 axes, G55 workpiece zero Read/wr
#5241~5245 -9999.999~9999.999
point offset value ite
1~5 axes, G56 workpiece zero Read/wr
#5261~5265 -9999.999~9999.999
point offset value ite
1~5 axes, G57 workpiece zero Read/wr
#5281~5285 -9999.999~9999.999
point offset value ite
1~5 axes, G58 workpiece zero Read/wr
#5301~5305 -9999.999~9999.999
point offset value ite
1~5 axes, G59 workpiece zero Read/wr
#5321~5325 -9999.999~9999.999
point offset value ite

124
 Chapter 5 Macro Program

5.2.1 Null Variables

Volume I Programming
When the variable value is undefined, the variable is null. Variable #0 is always null, and can be
read only.
a, referencing
The address itself is ignored when an undefined variable (null variable)is quotated.
W hen #1=< Null>, W hen #1=0
G90 X100 Y#1 equals to G90 X100 G90 X100 Y#1 equals to G90 X100 Y0

b, Arithmetic operation
<Null> equals to 0 in any case except when assigned by<Null>.
W hen #1=< Null > W hen #1=0
#2=#1 ˄assignment˅ #2=#1
The arithmetic operation result #2 The arithmetic operation result #2
equals to< Null> equals to 0
#2=#1γ5 #2=#1γ5
The arithmetic operation result #2 The arithmetic operation result #2
equals to 0 equals to 0
#2=#1+#1 #2=#1+#1
The arithmetic operation result #2 The arithmetic operation result #2
equals to 0 equals to 0

c. Conditional expression
<Null> differs from 0 onlyfor EQ and NE.
W hen #1= Null W hen #1=0
#1 EQ #0 #1 EQ #0
Ļ Ļ
True False
#1 NE #0 #1 NE #0
Ļ Ļ
False False
#1 GE #0 #1 GE #0
Ļ Ļ
False False
#1 GT #0 #1 GT #0
Ļ Ļ
False False

5.2.2 Local Variables

Local variables are the variables internally defined in a program. They are effective only within
the program, i.e., it is onlycan be used within the program.
A local variable #1 that calls macro programs at a certain moment is different from the #1 at
another moment. (No matter the macro programs are identical or not). Therefore, when macro
program B is called from macro program A, like nesting, the local variables used in macro A will not
be misused in macro B, and will not disable the value in macro B.

125
 GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual

Usually, the local variables are used to accept the value passed from argument. Please refer to”
Argument Specification”for the relationship between arguments and addresses. Pay attention that,
the initial state of local variable is Null, before the local variable is defined (assigned).
Volume I Programming

z Custom macro program nesting and local variable

When calling a macro program, its nesting level increases byone, and correspondingly, the level
of local variable increases by one as well.
The relationship between macro program call and local variable is shown as follows:

Macro
program

Local
variable

z Explanations
1. #1̚#33 local variables (0 level)are provided in the main program.
2. When a macro program (1 level)is called byG65, the local variable (0 level)is stored, and
local variables #1~#33 of the new macro program is prepared. The argument replacement is
possible (the same as Ĺ).
3. Each time a macro program (2, 3, 4 levels) are called, local variables (1, 2,3 levels) in
each group are stored, and new local variables (2,3,4, levels) are prepared.
4. When M99 (return from macro programs) is commanded, the local variables (0, 1, 2, 3
levels) stored in ĸ, Ĺ are recovered in the state as they are stored.

5.2.3 Common Variable

Common variable is the global variable defined within the system. It can be used in any program.
That is to say, #101 used in a macro program is the same as the one used in another macro
program. Therefore,the arithmetic operation result of common variable #101 in a program can be
used in another program.
In the system, there is no special regulation for using common variables. #100~#199 is the
variable group without power-off memory function; #500~#999 is the variable group with power-off
memory function, i.e. data are stored after power-off.

126
 Chapter 5 Macro Program

5.2.4 System Variables

Volume I Programming
System variables are used to read and write CNC internal data, such as tool length
compensation value, tool nose radius compensation value. Some system variables can only be read.
System variables are the basis of automatic control and general-purpose machining program
development.

z Interface signal The macro variable corresponding to interface signal is the

exchange signal between PLC and custom macro program.
Variable No. Function
#1000~#101 A 16-bit signal can be sent from the PLC to a
5 custom macro. Used to read signal bit by bit.
A 16-bit signal can be sent from the PLC to a
#1032 custom macro. Used to read al 16 bits of a signal at
one time.
A 16-bit signal can be sent from the PLC to a
#1100~#111
custom macro. Used to read and write signal bit by
5
bit.
A 16-bit signal can be sent from the PLC to a
#1132 custom macro. Used to read and write all 16 bits of
a signal at one time.
A 32-bit signal can be sent from the PLC to a
#1133 custom macro. Used to read all 32 bits of a signal at
one time.

Note:Please refer to the GSK980TD PLC User Manual for the relationships between variables
and F,G signals.

z Tool compensation value tool compensation value can be read and written
Compens Tool length compensation Cutter
ation No. compensation
Geometric W ear ˄H˅ Geometric W ear ˄D˅
˄H˅ ˄D˅
01 #2201 #2001 #2601 #2401
02 #2202 #2002 #2602 #2402
03 #2203 #2003 #2603 #2403
…….
31 #2231 #2031 #2631 #2431
32 #2232 #2032 #2632 #2432

127
 GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual

z Automatic operation control The control state of automatic operation can be changed
Variable Variable Single block Completion of an
No. value auxiliary function
Volume I Programming

0 Enabled To be awaited
1 Disabled To be awaited
#3003
2 Enabled Not to be awaited
3 Disabled Not to be awaited

Note 1:W hen the power is turned on,the value ofthis variable is 0.
Note 2:W hen single block stop is enabled (G46.1 is 1),the state of
#3003 can change the execution ofsingle block stop.
Note 3:W hen single block stop is disabled (G46.1 is 0),single block
stop operation is notperformed even ifthe single block switch is set
to ON.
Note 4:W hen a waitfor the completion ofauxiliary function (M,S and
T functions)is notspecified,program execution proceeds to the next
block before completion of auxiliary functions. Also distribution
completion signal DEN is notoutput.

Variable No. Variable Feed hold Feedrate Exactstop

value override
0 Enabled Enabled Enabled
1 Disabled Enabled Enabled
2 Enabled Disabled Enabled
3 Disabled Disabled Enabled
#3004
4 Enabled Enabled Disabled
5 Disabled Enabled Disabled
6 Enabled Disabled Disabled
7 Disabled Disabled Disabled

Note 1:W hen the power is turned on,the value ofthis variable is 0.
Note 2:W hen feed hold is disabled,ifthe feed hold button is held
down, the machine stops in the single block stop mode.
However,single block stop operation is notperformed when
the single block mode is disabled with variable #3003.
Note 3: W hen the feed hold is disabled,if the feed hold button is
pressed then released,the machine does notstop;program
execution continues and the machine stops atthe firstblock
where feed hold is enabled;the feed hold lamp is ON.
Note 4:W hen feedrate override is disabled,an override of100% is
always applied regardless of the setting of the feedrate
override.
Note 5:W hen exactstop check is disabled,no exactstop check is

128
 Chapter 5 Macro Program

made even in blocks including those which do notperform

cutting.

Volume I Programming
z Number ofmachined parts The number of machined parts can be read and written.
Variable Function
No.
#3901 Number of machined parts

z Modal information
Modal information specified in blocks up to the immediately preceding blockcan be read.

Variable Function
No.
Group 1 ˄G00, G01, G02, G03, G73, G74, G80, G81,
G82, G83, G84, G85, G86, G88, G89, G110, G111,
#4001
G112, G113, G114, G115, G134, G135, G136, G137,
G138, G139˅
#4002 Group 2˄G17, G18, G19˅
#4003 Group 3˄G90, G91˅
#4005 Group 5˄G94, G95˅
#4006 Group 6˄G20, G21˅
#4007 Group 7˄G40, G41, G42˅
#4008 Group 8˄G43, G44, G49˅
#4010 Group 10˄G98, G99˅
#4014 Group 14˄G54, G55, G56, G57, G58, G59˅
#4107 D code
#4109 F code
#4111 H code
#4113 M code
#4114 Blocksequence number
#4115 Program name
#4119 S code
#4120 T code

z Currentposition Position information can be read.

Read
Variable No. Function during
movement
Workpiece coordinate system block end
#5001~#5005 Enabled
point (tool compensation value not included)
Machine coordinate system current
#5021~#5025 Disabled
position( tool compensation value

129
 GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual

included)
Workpiece coordinate system current
#5041~#5045 Disabled
position (tool compensation value included)
Volume I Programming

Workpiece coordinate system skip signal

#5061~#5065 Enabled
position ( tool compensation value included)
#5081~#5085 Tool length compensation value Disabled
Note 1:The firstdigit(from 1 to 5)represents an axis number.
Note 2: The tool length compensation value currently used for
execution rather than the immediately preceding tool
compensation value is held in variables #5081~#5085.

z W orkpiece coordinate system compensation value

W orkpiece coordinate system compensation value can be read and written.
Variable No. Function
#5201~#5205 The first to the fifth axes external workpiece zero
point offset value
#5221~#5225 The first to the fifth axes G54 workpiece zero point
offset value
#5241~#5245 The first to the fifth axes G55 workpiece zero point
offset value
#5261~#5265 The first to the fifth axes G56 workpiece zero point
offset value
#5281~#5285 The first to the fifth axes G57 workpiece zero point
offset value
#5301~#5305 The first to the fifth axes G58 workpiece zero point
offset value
#5321~#5325 The first to the fifth axes G59 workpiece zero point
offset value

5.3 Arithmetic and Logic Operation

z Macro programs in both traditional G65 H format and statement format are
compatible with GSK980MDa.
Users can alternatively select one of them for programming. This makes
programming more convenient and flexible.

z Please strictly observe the formats and specifications in the following

“Arithmetic and Logic Operation”table.

Arithmetic and Logic Operation

Function Statementformat Traditional G65H format Remark

Definition, assignment #i = #j G65 H1 P#i Q#j
Sum #i = #j+ #k G65 H2 P#i Q#jR#k Logic operation is
Subtraction #i = #j- #k G65 H3 P#i Q#jR#k performed on binary

130
 Chapter 5 Macro Program

Multiplication #i = #j*#k G65 H4 P#i Q#jR#k numbers bit by bit.

Division #i = #j/#k G65 H5 P#i Q#jR#k
OR #i = #jOR #k G65 H11 P#i Q#jR#k

Volume I Programming
AND #i = #jAND #k G65 H12 P#i Q#jR#k
XOR #i = #jXOR #k G65 H13 P#i Q#jR#k
Square root #I = SQRT ˷#j
˹ G65 H21 P#i Q#j
Absolute value #I = ABS ˷#j
˹ G65 H22 P#i Q#j
Rounding off #I = ROUND ˷#j
˹ G65 H23 P#i Q#j
Rounding up G65 H24P#i Q#j
#I = FUP ˷#j
˹
Rounding down G65 H25 P#i Q#j
#I = FIX ˷#j
˹
Nature logarithm G65 H26 P#i Q#j
Exponential function #I = LN ˷#j
˹ G65 H27 P#i Q#j
#I = EXP ˷#j
˹
Sine #i = SIN ˷#j
˹ G65 H31 P#i Q#j An angle is specified
Arcsine ˹/˷#k˹ G65 H32 P#i Q#j
#i = ASIN ˷#j in degree. 90
Cosine #i = COS ˷#j˹ G65 H33 P#i Q#j degrees and 30
Arccosine G65 H34 P#i Q#j minutes is
#i = ACOS ˷#j˹
Tangent G65 H35 P#i Q#j represented as 90.5
#i =TAN ˷#j˹
Arctangent G65 H36 P#i Q#jR#k degree.
#i = ATAN˷#j˹/˷#k˹
Conversion from BCD to BIN #i = BIN ˷#j
˹ G65 H41 P#i Q#j Used for the signal
Conversion from BIN to BCD #i = BCD ˷#j
˹ G65 H42 P#i Q#j exchange to and
from PLC.
Unconditional branch GOTO #i G65 H80 P#i Q#jR#k Please note that #K
Equals to branch IF (#i EQ #j) GOTO #k G65 H81 P#i Q#jR#k is the skip signal in
Not equals to branch IF (#i NE #j) GOTO #k G65 H82 P#i Q#jR#k macro statement
Greater than branch IF (#i GT #j) GOTO #k G65 H83 P#i Q#jR#k and P#i is the skip
Smaller than branch IF (#i LT #j
) GOTO #k G65 H84 P#i Q#jR#k signal in traditional
Greater than or equals to IF (#i GE #j) GOTO #k G65 H85 P#i Q#jR#k G65H format.
branch G65 H86 P#i Q#jR#k
Smaller than or equals to IF (#i LE #j
) GOTO #k
branch

User alarm None G65 H99 P#i 0”P”100

5.3.1 Tranditional Format

If traditional G65 H format is used for programming, only limited operations and jump command
can be specified by it. The currently used H operation needs at most 3 operands, so the
corresponding operation can be completed when the needed variables (or constants) are obtained in
a block.
z General format
G 65 Hm P#i Q#j R#k ˗
m: 01̚99 means operation command or jump command function
#i: the name of variable that stored the operation result
#j: operand 1; it can be constant.

131
 GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual

#k: operand 2; it can be constant.

Meaning: #i = #j ż #k
Ŋņņņņņņņ Operational sign, designated by Hm
Volume I Programming

(Example) G65 Hm P#100 Q#101 R#102… … #100 = #101 ż #102 ˗

G65 Hm R#100 P#101 Q15 … … #101 = 15 ż #100 ˗
G65 Hm Q#100 R-100 P#102… … #102 = #100 ż -100 ˗
Note 1:G65 H should be commanded prior to operation or jump command.
Note 2:when P code is commanded in G65 block,G65 P means macro program call. H
means argument. No operation or jump command is performed.
Note 3: At most 4 decimal numbers of the constant decimal part can be obtained for
rounding. 3 digit numbers can be displayed in the window.

z Code function explanation

(1) Variable value assignment, #I ˙ #J
G65 H01 P#I Q#J˗
(example) G65 H01 P#101 Q125˗ (#101 ˙ 125)
G65 H01 P#101 Q#110˗ (#101 ˙ #110)
G65 H01 P#101 Q-#102˗ (#101 ˙ -#102)

(2) Addition operation #I ˙ #J ˇ #K

G65 H02 P#I Q#J R#K˗
(example) G65 H02 P#101 Q#102 R15˗ (#101 ˙ #102 ˇ 15)
G65 H02 P#101 Q#110 R#102˗ (#101 ˙ #110 ˇ #102)

(3) Subtraction operation #I ˙ #J ˉ #K

G65 H03 P#I Q#J R#K˗
(example) G65 H03 P#101 Q#102 R#103˗ (#101 ˙ #102 ˉ #103)

(4) Multiplication operation #I ˙ #J× #K

G65 H04 P#I Q#J R#K˗
(example) G65 H04 P#101 Q#102 R#103˗ (#101 ˙ #102 × #103)

(5) Division operation #I ˙ #J ÷ #K

G65 H05 P#I Q#J R#K˗
(example) G65 H05 P#101 Q#102 R#103˗ (#101 ˙ #102 ÷ #103)
Note:The divisor #k cannot be 0,otherwise an alarm occurs.

(6) OR operation #I ˙ #J OR #K
G65 H11 P#I Q#J R#K˗
(example) G65 H11 P#101 Q#102 R#103˗ (#101 ˙ #102 OR #103)

(7) AND operation #I ˙ #J AND #K

G65 H12 P#I Q#J R#K˗
(example) G65 H12 P#101 Q#102 R#103˗ (#101 ˙ #102 AND #103)

132
 Chapter 5 Macro Program

(8) XOR operation #I ˙ #J XOR #K

Volume I Programming
G65 H13 P#I Q#J R#K˗
(example) G65 H13 P#101 Q#102 R#103˗ (#101 ˙ #102 XOR #103)

(9) Square root #I #J

G65 H21 P#I Q#J˗
(example) G65 H21 P#101 Q#102˗ (#101 ˙ #102 )
Note:the radicand #J cannot be negative,otherwise,an alarm occurs.
(10) Absolute value #I ˙ Ŭ#JŬ
G65 H22 P#I Q#J˗
(example) G65 H22 P#101 Q-102˗ (#101 ˙ Ŭ-102Ŭ #101= 102)

(11) Rounding off #I ˙ ROUND[#J]˄ROUND off the first decimal˅

G65 H23 P#I Q#J˗
(example) G65 H23 P#101 Q1.2359˗ (#101 ˙ 1.2359 #101=1)

(12) Rounding up #I ˙ FUP[#J]

G65 H24 P#I Q#J˗

(13) Rounding down #I ˙ FIX [#J]

G65 H25 P#I Q#J˗

W ith CNC, when the absolute value of the integer produced by an operation on a number is
greater than the absolute value of the original number, such an operation is referred to as rounding
up to an integer. Conversely, when the absolute value of the integer produced by an operation on a
number is less than the absolute value of the original number, such an operation is referred to as
rounding down to an integer. Be particular careful when handling negative numbers.

(Example) suppose that #1=1.2,#2= -1.2

W hen #3=FUP[#1]is executed, 2.0 is assigned to #3
W hen #3=FIX[#1]is executed, 1.0 is assigned to #3
W hen #3=FUP[#2]is executed, -2.0 is assigned to #3
W hen #3=FIX[#2]is executed, -1.0 is assigned to #3

(14) Natural logarithm #I ˙ LN [#J]

G65 H26 P#I Q#J˗
(example) G65 H26 P#101 Q#102˗˄#101 ˙ LN[#102]˅
Note:when the antilogarithm #j is zero or smaller,otherwise,an alarm is issued.

(15) Exponential function #I ˙ EXP[#J]

G65 H27 P#I Q#J˗
(example) G65 H27 P#101 Q#102˗˄#101 ˙ EXP [#102]˅

133
 GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual

(16) Sine #I ˙ SIN[#J] (unit: deg)

G65 H31 ˬ#I ˭#J˗
(example) G65 H31 P#101 Q#103˗ (#101˙SIN[#103])
Volume I Programming

(17) Arcsine #I ˙ ASIN[#J]

G65 H32 P#I Q#J˗
(example) G65 H32 P#101 Q#103˗ (#101˙ASIN[#103])
Note 1:W hen the NAT bit of parameter No.015 is set to 0,the output range is 270°~ 90°
W hen the NAT bit of parameter No.015 is set to 1,the output range is -90°~ 90°
Note 2:Arcsine operand J cannot exceed the range -1~1,otherwise,an alarm is issued.

(18) Arccosine #I ˙ COS[#J] (unit˖deg)

G65 H33 P#I Q#J˗
(example) G65 H33 P#101 Q#103˗ (#101˙COS [#103])

(19) Arccosine #I ˙ ACOS[#J]

G65 H34 P#I Q#J˗
(example) G65 H34 P#101 Q#103˗ (#101˙ACOS [#103])
Note 1:Arccosine operand J cannot exceed the range -1~1,otherwise,an alarm is issued.
(20) Tangent #I ˙ TAN[#J] (deg)
G65 H35 P#I Q#J˗
(example) G65 H35 P#101 Q#103˗ (#101˙TAN [#103])
Note:#J cannot be equal to Kʌ+ʌ/2ďK=0, ±1, ±2, ±3 …Đ, otherwise the result is wrong.

(21) Arctangent #I ˙ ATAN [#J] / [#K] (unit˖deg)

G65 H36 P#I Q#J R#K˗
(example) G65 H36 P#101 Q#103 R3˗ (#101˙ATAN [#103] /[3])
Note 1ġWhen the NAT bit of parameter No.015 is set to 0, the output range is 0° ~ 360°
When the NAT bit of parameter No.015 is set to 1, the output range is -180° ~ 180°

(22) Conversion from BCD to BIN #I ˙ BIN[#J]

G65 H41 P#I Q#J˗
(example) G65 H41 P#101 Q#102˗ (#101 ˙ BIN[#102])

(23) Conversion from BIN to BCD #I ˙ BCD[#J]

G65 H42 P#I Q#J˗
(example) G65 H42 P#101 Q#102˗ (#101 ˙ BCD[#102])

(24) Unconditional branch

G65 H80 Pn˗ Pn: sequence number
(example) G65 H80 P120˗ (Go to N120 block)

(25) Equal to conditional branch

134
 Chapter 5 Macro Program

G65 H81 Q#I R#J Pn˗ Pn: sequence number, can be variable
(example) G65 H81 Q#101 R#102 P1000˗

Volume I Programming
W hen #101 equals to #102,branch to N1000 block;or execut in order.

(26) Not equal to conditional branch

G65 H82 Q#I R#J Pn˗ Pn: sequence number, can be variable
(example) G65 H82 #101 #102 C1000˗
W hen #101 does not equal to #102,branch to N1000 block;or execut in order.

(27) Greater than conditional branch

G65 H83 Q#I R#J Pn˗ Pn: sequence number, variable
(example) G65 H83 Q#101 R#102 P1000˗
W hen #101 is greater than #102,branch to N1000 block;when #101”#102,execut in order.

(28) Smaller than conditional branch

G65 H84 Q#I R#J Pn˗ Pn: sequence number, variable
(example) G65 H84 Q#101 R#102 P1000˗
W hen #101 is smaller than #102,branch to N1000 block,or execut in order.

(29) Greater than or equals to conditional branch

G65 H85 Q#I R#J Pn˗ Pn: sequence number, variable
(example) G65 H85 Q#101 R#102 P1000˗
W hen #101 is greater than or equals to #102,branch to N1000 block,or execut in order.

(30) Smaller than or equals to conditional branch

G65 H86 Q#I R#J Pn˗ Pn: sequence number, variable
(example) G65 H86 Q#101 R#102 P1000˗
W hen #101 is smaller than or equals to #102,branch to N1000 block,or execut in order.

(31) P/S alarm issued

G65 H99 Pn˗ Pn: sequence number, variable˄alarm No.=n +600˅
(example) G65 H99 P15˗
P/S custom alarm 615 is issued.

5.3.2 Macro Statement

The operations listed in “Arithmetic and Logic Operation”table can be executed in program.The
expressions right to the operator contain constants and (or) variables that consisting of functions and
operators.The variables #jand #k in the expression can be assigned as constants.The left variable
(the first variable) can be assigned by expression.The macro statement is more intuitive,convienent
and flexible.It can perform compound operation and multinesting.Sometimes,a macro statement is
equal to several tranditional G65H macro programs.
z General format
Please refer the statement format in the “Arithmetic and Logic Operation”table for editing
macro statement.

135
 GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual

z Macro program editing

In program editing mode or MID mode,bypressing key, macro
Volume I Programming

editing state can be switched or inserted.

Differences of Processing of letter Input of special

Automatic space
two states O signs
W hen editing,spaces are Press O to switch,
Special signs cannot
Insert state automatically added to copy,delete programs
be input
identifythe words.
Macro editing space are not Input as a letter “O” Special signs can be
state automaticallyadded input

zExplanations
1,Angular unit
The angular units of function SIN,COS,ASIN,ACOS,TAN and ATAN are degree.For
example,90°30̟means 90.5 degree.

2, ARCSIN # i=ASIN[#j]
i. the solution ranges are as indicated below
when the NAT bit of parameter No.015 is set to 0: 270°~ 90°
when the NAT bit of parameter No.015 is set to 1: -90°~ 90°
ii. when the #j is beyond the range of -1 to 1, P/S alarm is issued.
iii. a constant can be used instead of the #j variable.

3, ARCCOS # i =ACOS[#j]
i. the solution ranges from 180°~ 0°
ii. when the #j is beyond the range of -1 to 1, P/S alarm is issued.
iii. a constant can be used instead of the #j variable.

4, ARCTAN #i=ATAN[#j]/[#k]
Specify the lengths of two sides and separate them by a slash /.
The solution ranges are as follows:
When the NAT bit of parameter No.015 is set to 0: 0°~ 360°
[Example] when #1=ATAN[-1]/[-1] is specified, #1=225°
<

 


When the NAT bit of parameter No.015 is set to 1: -180°~ 180°
[Example] when #1=ATAN[-1]/[-1] is specified, #1=-135°

136
 Chapter 5 Macro Program

<

Volum e I Program m ing


;




ii. A constant can be used instead of the # j variable.

5. Natural logarithm #i=LN[#j]

i. Note that the relative error may be greater than 10-8.
ii. When the antilogarithm #j is zero or smaller, P/S alarm is issued.
iii . A constant can be used instead of the #j variable.

6. Exponential function #i=EXP[#j]

i. Note that the relative error may be greater than 10-8 .
ii. When the result of the operation exceeds 3.65×1047 (j is about 110), an overflow
occurs and P/S alarm is issued.
iii. A constant can be used instead of the # j variable.
7, ROUND function
When the ROUND function is included in an arithmetic or logic operation command, IF
statement, or WHILE statement, the ROUND function rounds off at the first decimal place.

Exam ple:
When #1=ROUND[#2] is executed where #2=1.2345 the value of variable #1 is 1.0.
When the ROUND function is used in NC statement address, the ROUND function rounds
off the specified value according to the least input increment of the address.

8. Rounding up and down to an integer

With CNC, when the absolute value of the integer produced by an operation on a
number is greater than the absolute value of the original number, such an operation is
referred to as rounding up to an integer. Conversely, when the absolute value of the integer
produced by an operation on a number is less than the absolute value of the original
number, such an operation is referred to as rounding down to an integer. Be particular
careful when handling negative numbers.
Exam ple:
Suppose that #1=1.2, #2= -1.2
When #3=FUP[#1] is executed, 2.0 is assigned to #3.
When #3=FIX[#1] is executed, 1.0 is assigned to #3.
When #3=FUP[#2] is executed, -2.0 is assigned to #3.
When #3=FIX[#2] is executed, -1.0 is assigned to #3.

5.3.3 Priority ofOperations

1. Function
2. Operation such as multiplication and division˄*, /, AND˅

137
 GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual

3. Operation such as addition and subtraction ˄+, -, OR, XOR˅

Volum e I Program m ing

5.3.4 BracketNesting
Brackets are used to change the order of operations. Brackets can be used to multinesting.
Note that the square bracket [, ] is used to enclose an expression;the round bracket˄ˈ˅is used
in comments. When the priority is not defined, it is advised to use square bracket to enclose.

5.4 Branch and Repetition

In a program, the flow of control can be changed using the GOTO statement and IF statement. Three
types of branch and repetition operations are used:
1. GOTO statement (unconditional branch)
2. IF statement (conditional branch: IF… THEN… )
3. WHILE statement (repetition WHILE… )

5.4.1 UnconditionalBranch (GO TO statem ent)

Go to the block with sequence number n. when a sequence number out the range of 1~99999 is
specified, an alarm is raised. A sequence number can also be specified using an expression.
Form at:GOTO n˗ n: sequence number˄1~99999˅
Exam ple˖GOTO 1˗GOTO #101˗

5.4.2 ConditionalBranch (IF statem ent)

Specify a conditional expression after IF.

GOTO form at:IF [conditional expression] GOTO n˗
If the specified conditional expression is satisfied, a branch to sequence number n occurs. If the
specified condition is not satisfied, the next block is executed.
Exam ple:

THEN form at˖IF [conditional expression] THEN<macro statement>˗

138
 Chapter 5 Macro Program

If the specified conditional expression is satisfied, a predetermined macro statement is executed.

Only a single macro statement is executed.
Exam ple:

Volum e I Program m ing

IF[#1 EQ #2] THEN #3=0˗
If the value of #1 and #2 are the same, 0 is assigned to #3;if not, no execution will be performed.

5.4.3 ConditionalExpression
Conditionalexpression:A conditionalexpression m ustinclude an operatorbetween two
variables or between a variable and constant, and m ust be enclosed in brackets [,]. An
expression can be used instead ofa variable.
Operators:In 980MDa, operators in the following table are used to compare two values to
determine whether they are equal or one value is smaller or greater than the other value.

Operator Meaning
EQ or = = Equal to˄=˅
NE or <> Not equal to ˄˅
GT or > Greater than˄ >˅
GE or >= Greater than or equal
to ˄•˅
LT or < Less than ˄<˅
LE or <= Less than or equal to
˄”˅

Exam ple˖IF [3<>2] GOTO 2;it means if 3 is not equal to 2, branch to N2 block
IF [#101>=7.22] THEN #101=SIN30;it means, if #101 is greater than 7.22, the expression
after THEN is executed, i.e., assign Sin 30°to #101.

Sam ple program The sample program below finds the sum of number 1 to 10.

O9500
#101=0 Initial value of the variable to hold the sum
#102=1 initial value of the variable as an addend
N1 IF[#102 GT 10]GOTO 2 … … Branch to N2 when the
addend is greater than 10
#101= #101+#102 … … calculation to find the sum
#102= #102+1 … … Next addend
GOTO 1 … … Branch to N1
N2 M30 … … End of program;Sum of number 1 to 10

139
 GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual

5.4.4 Repetition˄W HILE Statem ent˅

Specify a conditional expression after WHILE. While the specified condition is satisfied, the
program from DO to END is executed. If not, program execution proceeds to the block after END.
Volum e I Program m ing

Exam ple˖
WHILE [Conditional expression] DOm˗(m=1,2,3)

Program
If the condition is If the condition
not fulfilled is fulfilled

END m;

Explanations:While the specified condition is fulfilled, the program from DO to END after WHILE is
executed. If the specified condition is not fulfilled, program execution proceeds to the block after
END. The same format as the IF statement applies. A number after DO and a number after END are
identification numbers for specifying the range of execution. The number 1, 2, and 3 can be used.
When a number other than 1, 2, and 3 is used, P/S alarm occurs.
Nesting:The identification number (1 to 3)in a DO, END loop can be used as many times as
desired. Note, however, when a program includes crossing repetition loops (overlapped DO ranges),
P/S alarm occurs.

140
 Chapter 5 Macro Program

5.5 Macro Statement and NC statement

The following blocks are referred to as macro statements:

Volum e I Program m ing

z Blocks containing arithmetic or logic operation (=).
z Blocks containing a controlling statement (such as GOTO, DO, END… )
z Blocks containing a macro call command. (such as G65, G66)
Blocks other than macro statements are referred to as NC statement.

5.5.1 Macro Program m ing and Registering

Custom macro program are similar to subprogram. They can be edited, registered and used in
the same way as subprogram. M98 can call a custom macro program, but cannot pass arguments.
Usually, the macro program is provided by tool builders, but it can also be programmed by
customers. It is not necessary for the customers to remermber all related commands in macro
programs besides codes that call macro programs.

5.5.2 Lim itation

z Macro statem entprocessing in cuttercom pensation C m ode
In cutter compensation C mode (G41, G42), in order to calculate the transmission point, NC
prereads the next block. The processing way is not the same as general NC statement.
When a macro statement is executed as a single block, it is the block that does not involve
movement. And, in som e cases,it cannot correctly execute com pensation (strictly speaking,
such block involves 0 distance of movement).
¾ Jump˄GOTO,DO,END˅
In cutter compensation C mode, when jump command ˄GOTO, DO, END˅is specified, P/S
alarm occurs.
¾ When the move command adopts variables
In cutter compensation C, when the move command (such as G01, X#101)adopts variables, P/S
alarm occurs. Because cutter compensation C mode is block preread mode, the end point of the next
block is essential for calculating the current transmission point position. Specifying X#101 (an
unknown data)does not enable a correct calculation of the current transmission point.

z Single block operation (MDI)

In MDI mode, macro programs can be specified, but macro program call cannot be executed.

z Skip “/”
A “/”appearing in the middle of an <expression> (enclosed in brackets [ ] on the right-hand side
of an arithmetic expression)is regarded as a division operator;it is not regarded as the specified for
an optional block skip code.

z Reset
A reset operation clears any called states of custom macro programs and subprograms, and
cursor returns to the first block of the main program.

141
 GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual

CHAPTER 6 CUTTER COMPENSATION

Volum e I Program m ing

6.1 Application for Cutter Radius Compensation

6.1.1 Brief

Generally, the parts machining process is programmed according to parts drawing in one point
on a tool. As for the tool used actually, because of the processing or other requirement, the tool is not
an ideal point, but an arc only. The position offset exists between actual cutting point and ideal point
when the cutting feed is performed. It may cause over cut or undercut, so the part accuracy will be
affected. So, the cutter radius compensation can be used to improve the part accuracy in machining.
The path of part figure can be shifted by a cutter radius, which this method is called B type tool
compensation;this is a simply method but the movement path of next block can be processed only
after a block is performed, so the phenomenon as over cutting will be generated at the intersection
point of two blocks.
In order to settle the above issues and eliminate the error, the Tool compensation C should be
setup. When a block is read in, the tool compensation C is not performed immediately but the next
block is read in again. Corresponding movement path is calculated according to the point of
intersection of two blocks (conjunction vector). The tool compensation C performs more accurate
compensation in figure because two blocks are read for processing in advance. See the Fig. 6-1

Fig.6-1 C type cutter radius compensation

6.1.2 Com pensation value setting

The radius value of each tool should be set before tool compensation C is applied. Tool radius
compensation value is set in the OFFSET page (table 6-1), this page contains tool geometric radius
and tool radius wear. There into, D is the tool compensation value, when the bit 1 of bit parameter
No.003 is 1, the D is compensation value input by diameter. If the bit 1 of bit parameter No.003 is 0,
the D is compensation value input by radius. The following explanations are all indicated in radius
compensation value if not especially pointed out.
Table 6-1 Display page for CNC cutter radius compensation value

142
 Chapter 6 Cutter Compensation

NO. Geom etric˄H˅ W earing˄H˅ Geom etric˄D˅ W earing˄D˅

001 20.020 0.030 5.000 0.020
002 10.020 0.123 0.500 0.030

Volume I
… … … … …

6.1.3 Com m and form at

Programming
G17 G40 G00 X_ Y_ Z_ D_ ˗
G18 G41 G01
G19 G42

Com m ands Explanation Rem arks

G17 Offset plane selection command (XY plane)
G18 Offset plane selection command (XZ plane)
G19 Offset plane selection command (YZ plane)
See the Fig.6-2
G40 Cutter radius compensation cancellation
G41 Cutter radius compensation left along advancing direction
G42 Cutter radius compensation right along advancing direction

6.1.4 Com pensation direction

Tool compensation direction is determined according to the relative position of tool with work
piece, when the cutter radius compensation is applied. See the Fig.6-2.
=

ߔ‫݋‬

<
2

Ꮉӊ

2 2
< <

G42⊓ߔ‫ࠡ݋‬䖯ᮍ৥ⱘেջ㸹ٓ G41⊓ߔ‫ࠡ݋‬䖯ᮍ৥ⱘᎺջ㸹ٓ
; ;
143
 GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual

6.1.5 Caution
z In initial status CNC is in cutter radius compensation cancellation mode. CNC sets cutter radius
compensation offset mode when the G41 or G42 command is executed. At the beginning of the
Volum e I Program m ing

compensation, the CNC reads two blocks in advance, the next block is stored in the cutter radius
compensation buffer memory when a block is performed. When in Single mode, two blocks are
read, after the end point of the 1st block is performed, it is stopped. Two blocks are read in
advance in successive performance. So, there are a block being performed and two blocks
behind it in CNC.
z Neither setup nor cancellation of the Tool compensation C can be performed in the MDI mode.
z The cutter radius compensation value can not be a negative, normally, the wearing value is
negative (negative value indicates for wearing)
z Instead of G02 or G03, the setting or cancellation of cutter radius compensation can be
commanded only by using G00 or G01, or the alarm occurs.
z CNC will cancel Tool compensation C mode when you press RESET key.
z Corresponding offset should be specified while the G40, G41 or G42 is specified in the block, or
the alarm occurs.
z When cutter radius compensation is employed in main program and subprogram, the CNC
should cancel compensation mode before calling or exiting sub-program (namely, before M98 or
M99 is performed), or the alarm occurs.
Cancel the compensation mode temporarily when G54-59, G28-31 and canned cycle command are
executed. Restore the cutter radius compensation mode when the above commands are finished.

6.1.6 Exam ple forapplication

The parts are machined in the coordinate system in Fig. 6-3. The tool compensation number D07
is employed, tool geometric radius is 2mm and the tool radius wearing is 0.

Y axis

Startposi
tion X axisUnit:mm

144
 Chapter 6 Cutter Compensation

Perform tool setting in the mode of offset cancellation, after finishing the tool setting, and set the
tool radius D in OFFSET page.
Table.4-2

Volume I
NO. Geometric(H ) Wearing(H) Geometric(D) Wearing(D)
01 … … … …
… … … … …

Programming
07 … … 2.000 0.000
08 … … … …
… … … … …
32 … … … …

Programs:
N0 G92 X0 Y0 Z0; Tool are positioned at start position X0, Y0 and Z0 when the absolute
coordinate system is specified
N1 G90 G17 G00 G41 D07 X250.0 Y550.0;Start-up cutter, the tool is shifted to the tool path by
the distance specified in D07, geometric radius of
D07 is set to 2.0mm, tool wearing 0, then the tool
radius is 2mm.
N2 G01 Y900.0 F150; Specifies machining from P1 to P2

N3 X450.0; Specifies machining from P2 to P3

N4 G03 X500.0 Y1150.0 R650.0; Specifies machining from P3 to P4
N5 G02 X900.0 R-250.0; Specifies machining from P4 to P5
N6 G03 X950.0 Y900.0 R650.0; Specifies machining from P5 to P6
N7 G01 X1150.0; Specifies machining from P6 to P7
N8 Y550.0; Specifies machining from P7 to P8
N9 X700.0 Y650.0; Specifies machining from P8 to P9
N10 X250.0 Y550.0; Specifies machining from P9 to P1
N11 G00 G40 X0 Y0; Cancels the offset mode, the tool is returned to the start
position (X0, Y0)

6.2 Offset Path Explanation for Cutter Radius Compensation

6.2.1 Conception forinnerside orouterside

“Inner side”and “outer side”will be employed in the following explanations. When an angle
of intersection created by tool paths specified by move commands for two blocks is over or equal
to 180°, it is referred to as “inner side”. When the angle is between 0° and 180°, it is referred to
as “outer side”.

145
 GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual
Volum e I Program m ing

6.2.2 Toolm ovem entin start-up

There are 3 steps should be performed for cutter radius compensation: establishment,
performing and cancellation.
The tool movement performed from offset cancellation mode to G41 or G42 command
establishment is called tool compensation establishment (also called start-up)

Note ForS,L and C labeled in the following figures,ifnotespecially described,they should be

regarded as the following m eaning:
S----Single block stop point;
L----Linear;
C---Circulararc.

(a)Toolm ovem entalong an innerside ofa corner˄Į•180°˅

1˅Linear to linear 2˅Linear to circular

146
 Chapter 6 Cutter Compensation

(b)Toolm ovem entalong the outside ofa corneratan obtuse angle˄180°˚Į•90°˅

1˅Linear to linear 2)Linear to linear

Volume I
Programming
(c)Toolm ovem entalong the outerside ofa corneratan actuate angle˄Į˘90°˅
1˅Linear to Linear 2˅Linear to circular

(d)Toolm ovem entalong the outside linear to linear atan acute angle less than 1 degree
˄Į̰1°˅

6.2.3 Tool movement in offset mode

The mode after setting the cutter radius compensation and before canceling the cutter radius
compensation is called offset mode.
z Offset path of invariable compensation direction in compensation mode
1˅Linear to linear 2˅Linear to circular

147
 GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual
Volum e I Program m ing

3)Circular to linear 4)Circular to circular

5˅Inner side machining less than 1 degree and compensation vector amplification

˄b˅ Move along the outer of abtuse angle corner˄180°˚Į•90°˅

1˅Linear to linear 2˅Linear to circular

148
 Chapter 6 Cutter Compensation

Volume I Programming
3˅Linear to linear 4˅Circular to circular

˄c˅Move along the outer of acute angle corner˄Į˘90°˅

1˅Linear to linear 2˅Linear to circular

3˅Circular to linear 4)Circular to circular

149
 GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual
Volume I Programming

(̀)W hen it is exceptional

1)There is no intersection

2˅The arc center is consistent to the start point or end point

z Offset path with the compensation direction changed in compensation mode

.
The compensation direction can be changed in special occasion,but it cannot be changed at the
beginning and the following block. There are no inner side and outer side for the full compensation.

150
 Chapter 6 Cutter Compensation

1˅Linear to linear 2˅Linear to Circular

Volume I Programming
3˅Circular to linear 4˅Circular to Circular

* Toolnosecent erpath * ToolnoߔᇪЁᖗ䏃ᕘ

secent
erpath
/ &
U U
* U
U
& &
*
6 Programmedpat
h 6 Programmedpat
h

Fig.
6-13cCirculartolinear Fig.
6-13dCircul
artocircul
ar
(compensat
iondirectionchanged) (compensat
iondirect
ionchanged)
5˅W hen there is no intersection if the compensation is normallyperformed
W hen changing the offset direction from blockA to blockB using G41 and G42,if the intersection
of the offset path is not required,create the vector vertical to blockB at the start point of blockB.
i )Linear to linear

S L

r
Programmedpat
h G42 G41

r L
Toolcenterpath
L S

G42
Programmedpat
h
G41 r

Toolcenterpath S
L
Fig.
6-14aLineart
ol inear,t
hereisnoi
ntersecti
on
(Compensat
iondirectionchanged)

ii)Linear to circular

151
 GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual

Programmedpat
h
Volume I Programming

Toolnosecent
erpath

Fig.
6-14bLineart
ocircular,thereisnoint
ersect
ion
(Compensati
ondirecti
onchanged)

iii)Circular to circular

* 2

& &

Toolcenterpath * Programmedpat

h
(G03,G41,G42)
2 ˄G02,G41,G42˅

Fig.
6-14c Circul
ar to circular, there is no int
ersect
ion
(Compensationdirect
ionchanged)

6.2.4 Tool operation in offset cancellation mode

W hen the G40 command is employed in block in compensation mode,the CNC enters the
compensation cancellation mode. This is called compensation cancellation.

The circular arc command (G02 and G03) can not be employed when the cutter radius
compensation C is cancelled. If they are commanded, alarm is generated and the operation is
stopped
It controls and performs this block and the blocks in the cutter radius compensation buffer
memory in the compensation cancellation mode. If the single block switch is turned on,it stops after
executing a block. The next block is executed instead of reading it when the start key is pressed
again

(a)Tool movement along an inner side of a corner ˄Į•180°˅

1˅Linear to linear 2˅Circular to linear

152
 Chapter 6 Cutter Compensation

Į Į

Programmedpat
h

Volume I Programming
r r
G40 G40
L S S
Toolcenterpath
C
L Programmed Tool center L
path path
Fig.6-15aLineart olinear
Fig.6-15b Circular to linear
(innerside,offsetcancell
ati
on)
(inner side, offset cancellation)

(b)Tool movement along the outside of a corner at an obtuse angle ˄180°˚Į•90°˅

1˅Linear to linear 2˅Circular to linear
G40 G40
Į Į
L L
Programmed path r r
r
S S
L C Intersection
Tool center path Intersection
Programmed path Tool center path

Fig.6-16a Circular to linear Fig.6-16b Circular to linear

(obtuse, outside, offset cancellation) (obtuse, outside, offset cancellation)
(c)Tool movement along the outside of a corner at an acute angle ˄180°˚Į•90°˅
1˅Linear to linear 2˅Circular to linear

L
L
G40 S
G40 S
r
Į r
L Į L
Programmed path
r
r
L L L
Tool center path L
C
Programmed path Tool center path
Fig.6-17aLinear to linear Fig.6-17b Linear to linear
(acute angle, outside, offset cancellation) (acute angle, outside, offset cancellation)

(d)Tool movement along the corner outside at an acute angle less than 1 degree:linear to
linear˄Į˘1°

153
 GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual

L
Tool center path
S
Volume I Programming

L Programmed path
r G42

Į less than 1 degree

G40
Fi
g.6-18Li neart ol inear( the included angl
elesst
han 1
degree, outside, offset cancellation)

6.2.5 Interference check

Tool over cutting is called “interference”. The interference check function can check tool over
cutting in advance. This interference check is performed even if the over cutting does not occur.
However, all interference can not be checked by this function.

(1) Conditions for the interference

1) The direction of the tool path is different from that of the programmed path. (90 degrees to
270 degrees between these paths)
2) In addition to the condition above, the angle between the start point and end point of the tool
center path is quite different from that between the start point and end point of the programmed
path in circular machining (more than 180 degrees).

Example: Linear machining

Tool center path

Programmed The directions of these two

path r r paths are different (180°˅

Fig.6-19a M achining interference (1)

154
 Chapter 6 Cutter Compensation

Tool center path

Volume I
Programmed path

Programming
The directions of two paths are different˄180°˅

Fig.6-19b M achining interference (2)

(2) I
fthere is no interference actually,but it is treated as interference.
1) The groove depth less than the compensation value
Tool center path
Programmed path
Stop

A C
B
Fig.6-20 Exceptional case (1) treated as interference

There is no interference actually, but program direction in block B is opposite to the cutter
radius compensation path. The cutter stops, and the alarm occurs.

2) The groove depth less than compensation value

Programmed path Tool center path

A C
B
Fig.6-21 Exceptional case (2) treated as interference

There is no interference actually, but program direction in block B is opposite to the cutter radius
compensation path. The cutter stops, and the alarm occurs.

155
 GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual

6.2.6 Command of compensation vector cancel temporarily

If the following commands G92, G28, G29, coordinate command selection G54~G59 and
Volume I Programming

canned cycle are specified in compensation mode, the compensation vector is temporarily cancelled
and then automatically restored after these commands are executed. Now, the temporary
compensation vector cancellation is different to the compensation cancellation mode, tool is moved to
the specified point by compensation vector cancellation from the intersection. And the tool moves to
the intersection directly when the compensation mode restores.

z Coordinate system setting command G92 and coordinate system selection command
G54~G59

S S
Tool center path
L
L L
r r
L

N5 N6 SS N8 N9

Programmed path N7

G92block
Fig.6-22 Temporarycompensation vector byG92

Note: SS is indicated as the point stopped for twice in Single block mode.

z Automatic return to the reference point G28

If G28 is specified in compensation mode, the compensation will be cancelled at an intermediate

position. The compensation mode is automatically restored after the reference point is returned.
G28 Intermediate position

r S
r
G42
S
G00
L
L

Programmed Tool center S

Reference point
path path
Fig.6-23 Temporarily cancel compensation vector by G28

156
 Chapter 6 Cutter Compensation

G28 Intermediate position

r S

Volume I
G00
S
G42 r

L
L

Programming
Programmed Tool center S
Reference point
path path
Fig. 6-24 G29 temporarily cancel compensation vector

z Canned cycle
If the canned cycle command is specified in compensation mode, the compensation will be
temporarily cancelled in the canned cycle operation 1. The compensation mode is automatically
restored after the canned cycle is terminated.

6.2.7 Exceptional case

z W hen the inner corner machining is less than tool radius

W hen the inner corner machining is less than tool radius, the inner offset of a tool will cause over
cut. The tool stops and alarm occurs after moving at the beginning or at the corner in previous block.
But if the switch of “Single block” is ON, the tool will be stopped at the end of the previous block.

z W hen a groove less than the tool diameter is machined

W hen the tool center moves opposite to the direction of programmed path, the over cutting will
be generated by the cutter radius compensation. Tool stops and alarm appears after moving at the
beginning of previous block or at the corner.

z W hen a step less than the tool radius is machined

W hen a program contains a step which is an arc and less than tool radius, tool center path may
form a opposite movement direction to the programmed path. So the first vector is ignored and it
moves to the end of the second vector along a straight line. The program will be stopped for Single
block mode, the cycle continues if it is not single block mode. The compensation will be executed
correctly and no alarm will be generated if the step is a straight line. (But the uncut part is reserved.)

z W hen the sub-program is contained in G code

CNC should be in compensation cancellation mode before calling the sub-program (namely,
before the G98 is performed). Offset can be applied after entering the sub-program, but the
compensation cancellation should be applied before returning to the main-program (before M99), or
the alarm occurs.

z W hen compensation value is changed

(a) Usually, the compensation value is changed when the tool change is performed in
compensation cancellation mode. If the compensation value is changed in compensation mode, the

157
 GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual

new one is ineffective which is effective till the program is executed again.
(b) If different compensation values are commanded in different blocks of a program, different
compensation value will be compensated to the corresponding block. But if it is an arc, the alarm will
Volume I Programming

be generated. For details, refer to the following explanation.

(c) about “arc data error in C type cutter radius compensation”.

z W hen the end point for the programming arc is not on the arc

W hen the end point for the programming arc is not on the arc, the tool stops and the alarm
information shows “end point is not on the arc”.
Two same points in the starting is shown an example:

N0 G90 G00 X-50 Y-50

N1 G91 G1 G41 X0 Y0 D1 F800 … without moving
N2 G90 X0 Y0
N3 X50

The above-mentioned program may occur the “two same points” when starting, and the
compensation may not perform. The transit point P1 between N0 and N1 and the transit point P2
between N1 and N2 are shared a same point.
N0 G90 G00 X-50 Y-50
N1 G1 G41 X0 Y0 D1 F800
N2 G91 X0 Y0 … without moving
N3 X50

The “last two same points” may occur when starting at the last program, in the case of the
compensation has been performed. The section without moving which is regarded as the movement

158
 Chapter 6 Cutter Compensation

approximates to the zero, so it is necessary to maintain the compensation amount. The transit point
between N1 and N2 is P1, and the transit point between N2 and N3 is P2, P1 and P2 are shared a
same point.

Volume I
In the same way, in the compensation mode, if the “two same points” may occur, the
compensation value will be maintained;in the retraction mode, the similar start mode is divided into
“the previous two same points” and “the last two same points”

Programming
The alarm and corresponding explanation of ‘Circular arc data error in cutter
compensation C’

(a) The example of this alarm may occur in a circle

Porgram example˖N0 G90 G00 X-50 Y-50 Z50
N1 G01 G42 X0 Y0 D1 F800
N2 G02 I50
N3 G91 G01 X-50 Y-50
⿟ᑣ䏃ᕘ˖Programmed path
ߔ‫݋‬Ёᖗ䏃ᕘ˖Tool center path

The transit point between straight line N1 and circular arc N2 is P1, the transit point between
circular N2 and straight line N3 is P2, and the compensation radius is r, in this case, the circular after
tool compensation is more than 360°.

After a block (N9 G91 G0 X0 Y0) (without moving) is inserted between N1 and N2 in the
above-mentioned program, the “circular data error in cutter compensation C” may alarm.
Because the point after N9 inserted which is equal to the one of N1, namely, they are regarded
as “two same points”. The transit point P1 is performed treating the “two same points”, the position of
P1 is obviously differ from the above one which does not insert the N9 block. So the cut circular arc
path by this transit pont is absolutely differing from the path to be machined, so the alamr is then
generated:“circular arc data error in cutter compensation C”

(b) The example for a non-circle may occur:

159
 GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual
Volume I Programming

Program example:N0 G90 G00 X-50 Y-50 Z50

N1 G01 G41 X0 Y0 D1 F800
N2 G02 X50 R25
The P1 and P2 are the transit point of tool compensation as the left figure shown, wherein the “r” is
compensation radius. This is a normal treatment mode for the straight line to circular arc.

The alarm may occur in terms of the following program

N0 G90 G00 X0 Y0 Z0
N1 G01 G41 X0 Y0 D1 F800 … without moving, originally start
N2 G02 X50 R25

Because the N1 block does not a movement, namaly, it equals to the “two same points”. The
transit points P1 and P2 are performed based on the treatment of two same points (The path of two
same points), so the circular arc path cut by this transit point obviously differs from the actual path to
be machined, in this case, the “circular arc data error in cutter compensation C” may alarm.
(c) In the calculation of arc cutter compensation C, this alarm may issue if the
compensation radius D is modified.

Program example:N0 G90 G00 X-50 Y-50 Z25

N1 G01 G41 X0 Y0 D1 F800
N2 G02 X50 R25
N3 G02 X100 R25
The left figure is shown the programmed path and the tool center path.
If the compensation radius D is changed in N3, for example, the D2 is speicified in N3 block (the
value of D2 is not equal to the one of D1), in this case, it is similar as (b), an alarm of the “circular arc
data error in cutter compensation C” may occur.

160
 

Volume Ċ Operation

VOLUME Ċ OPERATION
 GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual
Volume Ċ Operation

162
 Chapter 1 Operation Mode and Display

CHAPTER1 OPERATION MODE AND DISPLAY

This GSK980MDa system employs an aluminum alloy solid operator panel, which exterior is as
follows.

Volume Ċ Operation
1.1 Panel Division
This GSK980MDa adopts an integrated panel, which division is as follows:

Flash Port

State indicator

Edit keypad

Display

Machine
l

163
 GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual

1.1.1 State indication

machine zero return

Rapid indicator
finish indicator

Single block indicator Block Skip indicator

Machine Lock indicator 067 MST Lock indicator

Volume Ċ Operation

Dry Run indicator

1.1.2 Edit keypad

Key Name Function
RESET
For CNC reset, feed, output stop etc.
key

Address input

Address
key

Double address key, switching between two sides by

pressing repeatedly

Double address key, switching between two

Sign key
characters by pressing repeatedly

164
 Chapter 1 Operation Mode and Display

Key Name Function

Numerical
For digit input
key

Decimal
For decimal point input
point

Volume Ċ Operation
Input key For confirmation of parameters, offset values input

Output key For start communication output

Change
For switching of message, display
key
For insertion, alteration, deletion of programs, words

Edit key
in editing( is a compound key, switching
between two functions by pressing repeatedly )

EOB key For block end sign input

Cursor
moving For cursor moving control
keys

Page key Page switching in a same interface

1.1.3 Menu display

Menu key Remark
To enter position interface. There are RELATIVE POS, ABSOLUTE POS,
INTEGRATED POS, POS&PRG pages in this interface.

165
 GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual

To enter program interface. There are PRG CONTENT, PRG STATE, PRG
LIST, PRG PREVIEW,4 pages in this interface.
To enter TOOL OFFSET interface. There are TOOL OFFSET, MARRO
variables and Tool Life Management (modifying Bit0 of state parameter
ʋ002). OFFSET interface displays offset values; MARRO for CNC macro
variables.
To enter alarm interface. There are CNC, PLC ALARM and ALARM Log
pages in this interface.
To enter Setting interface. There are SWITCH, PASSWORD SETTING, DATE
&TIME, SETTING ˄G54̚G59˅, GRAGH SET and TRACK pages in this
Volume Ċ Operation

interface.
To enter BIT PARAMETER, DATA PARAMETER, PITCH COMP interfaces
(switching between each interface by pressing repeatedly).
To enter DIAGNOSIS interface.There are CNC DIAGNOSIS, PLC STATE,
PLC VALUE, VERSION MESSAGE interfaces (switching between each
interfaces by pressing the key repeatedly). CNC DIAGNOSIS, PLC STATE,
PLC VALUE interfaces display CNC internal signal state, PLC addresses,
data state message; the VERSION MESSAGE interface displays CNC
software, hardware and PLC version No.

1.1.4 Machine panel

The keys function in GSK980MDa machine panel is defined by PLC program (ladder), see their
function significance in the machine builder’s manual.
The functions of the machine panel keys defined by standard PLC program are as follows:

Key Name Function explanation Function mode

Dwell commanded by Auto mode, DNC,
Feed Hold key
program, MDI MDI mode

Cycle start commanded Auto mode, DNC,

Cycle Start key
by program, MDI MDI mode

Auto mode, DNC,

MDI mode, Edit mode,
Feedrate For adjustment of the
Machine zero mode, MPG
Override keys feedrate
mode, Single Step mode,
MANUAL mode

166
 Chapter 1 Operation Mode and Display

Key Name Function explanation Function mode

Auto mode, DNC,

Rapid override For adjustment of rapid
MDI mode, Machine zero
keys traverse
mode, MANUAL mode

Auto mode, DNC,

For spindle speed MDI mode,edit mode,
Spindle
adjustment (spindle Machine zero mode, MPG

Volume Ċ Operation
override keys
analog control valid) mode, Step mode, MANUAL
mode

Machine zero mode, MPG

For spindle Jog
JOG key mode, Single Step mode,
ON/OFF
MANUAL mode,
Machine zero mode,
For machine lubrication
Lubricating key MPGmode, Single Step
ON/OFF
mode,MANUAL mode,
Auto mode, MDI mode,Edit
mode, Machine zero mode,
Cooling key For coolant ON/OFF
MPG mode Step mode,
MANUAL mode

Spindle CCW
Machine zero mode,
Spindle
Spindle stop MPGmode, Single Step
control keys
mode,MANUAL mode,
Spindle CW

Auto mode, DNC,MDI mode,

Rapid traverse For rapid traverse
Machine zero mode,
key /feedrate switching
MANUAL mode,

For positive/negative
Manual feed Machine zero mode, Step
moving of X, Y, Z axis in
key mode, MANUAL mode,
Manual, Step mode

167
 GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual

Key Name Function explanation Function mode

Handwheel
For X, Y, Z axis
axis selection MPG mode
selection in MPG mode
key

Move amount per

MPG/Step Auto mode, MDI mode,
handwheel scale
increment and Machine zero mode,
0.001/0.01/0.1 mm
Volume Ċ Operation

Rapid override MPG mode, Step

Move amount per step
selection key mode,MANUAL mode,
0.001/0.01/0.1 mm
For switching of
block/blocks execution,
Single Block
Single block lamp lights Auto mode, DNC, MDI mode
key
up if Single mode is
valid
For skipping of block
headed with“/”sign, if its
Block Skip key switch is set for ON, the Auto mode, DNC, MDI mode
Block Skip indicator
lights up
Auto mode, DNC,
If the machine is
MDI mode, Edit mode,
Machine Lock locked, its lamp lights
Machine zero mode, MPG
key up, and X, Z axis output
mode, Step mode, MANUAL
is invalid.
mode,
If the miscellaneous
function is locked, its
M.S.T. Lock
lamp lights up and M, Auto mode, DNC, MDI mode
key
S, T function output is
invalid.
If dry run is valid, the
Dry run lamp lights up.
Dry Run key Dry run for Auto mode, DNC, MDI mode
program/MDI blocks
command

168
 Chapter 1 Operation Mode and Display

Key Name Function explanation Function mode

Auto mode, DNC, MDI
mode, Machine zero mode,
Edit mode key To enter Edit mode
MPG mode, Step mode,
MANUAL mode
MDI mode, DNC, Edit mode,
Machine zero mode, MPG
Auto mode key To enter Auto mode
mode, Step mode, MANUAL
mode,
Auto mode, DNC, Edit

Volume Ċ Operation
mode, Machine zero mode,
MDI mode key To enter MDI mode
MPG mode, Step mode,
MANUAL mode,
Auto mode, DNC, Edit
Machine zero To enter Machine zero mode, Machine zero mode,
mode key mode MPG mode, Step mode,
MANUAL mode,
Auto mode, DNC, Edit
To enter Step or MPG
Step/MPG mode, Machine zero mode,
mode (one mode is
mode key MPG mode, Step mode,
selected by parameter)
MANUAL mode,
Auto mode, DNC, Edit
mode, Machine zero mode,
Manual mode
To enter Manual mode MPG mode, Step mode,
key
MANUAL
mode,===========
To enter DNC mode by
DNC mode key To enter DNC mode pressing this key in Auto
mode

1.2 Summary of Operation Mode

There are 7 modes that include Edit, Auto, DNCˈ MDI, Machine zero, Step/MPG, Manual,
modes in this GSK980MDa.
z Edit mode
In this mode, the operation of part program setting-up, deletion and modification can be
performed.
z Auto mode
In this mode, the program is executed automatically.
z MDI mode

169
 GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual

In this mode, the operation of parameter input, command blocks input and execution can be
performed.
z Machine zero mode
In this mode, the operation of X, Y, Z, 4th, 5th axis machine zero return can be performed
separately.
z MPG / Step mode
In the Step/MPG feed mode, the moving is performed by an increment selected by CNC system.
z Manual mode
In this mode, the operation of Manual feed, Manual Rapid, feedrate override adjustment, Rapid
override adjustment and spindle ON/OFF, cooling ON/OFF, Lubrication ON/OFF, spindle jog, manual
Volume Ċ Operation

tool change can be performed.

z DNC mode
In this mode, the program is run by DNC mode.

1.3 Display Interface

There are 7 interfaces for GSK980MDa such as Position, Program etc., and there are multiple
pages in each interface. Each interface (page) is separated from the operation mode. See the
following figures for the display menu, display interface and page layers:

Menu Display
Display page
key interface

Position
interface 5(/$7,9(326 $%62/87(326 ,17(*5$7('326 326 35*

Pro. PRG CONTENT

content

Pro. state PRG STATE

Pro.previe PRG PREVIEW

w
Program PRG LIST
list

170
 Chapter 1 Operation Mode and Display

Menu Display
Display page
key interface

TOOL
OFFSET Tool Offset 1 Tool Offset i Tool Offset 5
interface

MACRO

Volume Ċ Operation
MACRO 1 MACRO i MACRO 4
interface

Tool life
Tool Life 1 Tool Life i Tool Life n
interface

CNC
&1&$/$50
alarm
PLC
3/&$/$50:$51
alarm/wa
rn

Alarm log $/$50/2*

Setting
SWITCH SETTING Time &DATE AUTH.OPERATION
interface

G54 SET (G54~G59)

setting

171
 GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual

Menu Display
Display page
key interface

Graph
GRAPH SET GRAPH TRACK
interface

Bit
paramete
Volume Ċ Operation

r
BIT PAR.1 BIT PAR.2 DATA PAR.1 DATA PAR.i DATA PAR.n
Data
paramete
r

Pitch
SCRER- SCRER- SCRER-
paramete PITCH PAR.1 PITCH PAR.2 PITCH PAR.3
r

CNC
CNC DIA.1 CNC DIA.i CNC DIA.n
diagnosis

PLC
PLC STATE1 PLC STATE i PLC STATE n
state

PLC data PLC DATA 1 PLC DATA i PLC DATA n

Version VERSION MESSAGE

message

172
 Chapter 1 Operation Mode and Display

1.3.1 Position interface

Press to enter Position interface, which has four interfaces such as ABSOLUTE POS,

RELATIVE POS, INTEGRATED POS and POS&PRG, and they can be viewed by or
key.

1) ABSOLUTE POS display interface

The X, Y, Z coordinates displayed are the absolute position of the tool in current workpiece
coordinate system, as CNC power on, these coordinates are held on and the workpiece coordinate
system is specified by G92.

Volume Ċ Operation
PRG. F: a rate specified by F code in program
Note: It displays “PRG. F” in Auto, MDI modeĢ“MAN. F” in Machine zero, Manual
mode;“HNDL INC”in MPG mode; “STEP INC”in Step mode.
ACT. F: Actual speed after feedrate override calculated.
FED OVRI: An override that is selected by feedrate override switch.
SPI OVRI: Adjust the spindle rotational speed by altering spindle override.
PART CNT: Part number plus 1 when M30 (or M99 in the main program) is executed
CUT TIME: Time counting starts if Auto run starts, time units are hour, minute and second
The parts counting and the cut time are memorized at power-down and the clearing ways
for them are as follows:

PART CNT clearing: press key then press key.

CUT TIME clearing: press key then press key.

S0000˖ Feedback spindle speed of spindle encoder, and spindle encoder must be fixed to
display actual spindle speed.
T01˖ Current tool No. and tool offset No.

173
 GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual

2) RELATIVE POS display page

The X, Y, Z axis coordinates displayed are the current position relative to the relative
reference point, and they are held on at CNC power on. They can be cleared at any time. If X, Y,
Z axis relative coordinates are cleared, the current position will be the relative reference point.
When CNC parameter No.005 Bit1=1, as the absolute coordinates are set by G92 code, X, Y, Z
axis relative coordinates are identical with the set absolute coordinates.
Volume Ċ Operation

The clearing steps of X, Y, Z axis relative coordinates:

In RELATIVE POS page, press and hold key till the “X”in the page blinks, press
key to clear X coordinate;

In RELATIVE POS page, press and hold key till the“Y”in the page blinks, press
key to clear Y coordinate;

In RELATIVE POS page, press and hold key till the “Z”in the page blinks, press
key to clear Z coordinate;

The method for X, Y, Z axis relative coordinates divided by 2:

In RELATIVE POS page, press and hold key till the “X”in the page blinks, press
key, X coordinate will be divided by 2;

In RELATIVE POS page, press and hold key till the “Y”in the page blinks, press
key, Y coordinate will be divided by 2;

In RELATIVE POS page, press and hold key till the “Z”in the page blinks, press
key, Z coordinate will be divided by 2;

174
 Chapter 1 Operation Mode and Display

3) INTEGRATED POS display page

In INTEGRATED POS page, the RELATIVE, ABSOLUTE, MACHINE coordinate, DIST TO GO
(only in Auto and MDI mode) are displayed together.
The displayed value of MACHINE coordinate is the current position in the machine coordinate
system which is set up according to the machine zero.
DIST TO GO is the difference between the target position of block or MDI and the current
position.
The display page is as follows:

Volume Ċ Operation
4) POS&PRG display page
In this page, it displays ABSOLUTE, RELATIVE of the current position (ABSOLUTE, DIST TO
GO of current position will be displayed if BIT0 of bit parameter No.180 is set to 1) and 5 blocks of
current program together. During the program execution, the blocks displayed are refreshed
dynamically and the cursor is located in the block being executed.

1.3.2 Program interface

1) PROGRAM CONTENT page

is a compound key.Press key once to enter the program content interfaceˈand

175
 GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual

all blocks will be displayed by pressing and keys in MDI mode.

Volume Ċ Operation

2) PROGRAM STATE page

Press key to enter program state interface in program content interface. Current
G,M,S,T,F commands and related commands are displayed in program state interface and a single
block ˄MDI˅can be executed in this interface.

3) PROGRAM PREVIEW page

In program content interfaceˈpress key to enter program preview page. In this

page, all part programs are listed. To make it easier for user to select a program, the system
displays 5 blocks before the program with cursor at the bottom of the page. User can press EOB
directly to select a program and process automatically, or press DEL key to delete the program in
this page. It displays the following contents :

(a) Memory capacity: Display the maximum capacity of CNC memory unit.
(b) Used capacity˖The space occupied by the saved programs

176
 Chapter 1 Operation Mode and Display

(c) Program NO.˖Display the total number of programs in the CNC (including subprograms)
(d) Size of the program˖The size of the program which the cursor is in, unit: byte (B)
(e) Program list˖Display numbers of saved programs (arranged by name).

Volume Ċ Operation
4) FILE LIST page
GSK980MDa supports USB interface, CNCÆUSB and USBÆCNC mutual
transmission operation are provided in this interface. In this page, it is easy to see the file list
and file of CNC and USB (when USB is connected). At the same time, opening, duplication
and deletion can be done here.

1.3.3 Tool offset, macro variable and tool life management interface

is a compound key, press key once in other page to enter the TOOL OFFSET

page, press key again to enter the MACRO interface.

177
 GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual

1ˊOFFSET interface

There are 4 tool offset pages in this interface, and 32 offset numbers˄No.001̚No.032˅available

for user, which can be shown as the following figure by pressing or keys.
Volume Ċ Operation

2ˊMACRRO interface

There are 25 pages in this interface, which can be shown by pressing or keys. In
Macro page there are 600 ˄No.100̚No.199 and No.500̚No.999˅macro variables which can be
specified by macro command or set by keypad. Please refer to “macro, chapter 5, program” for
related information.

3. Tool life management

Note: The tool change signal TLCH˖F064#0 should be added for PLC when using this
function.

178
 Chapter 1 Operation Mode and Display

Ladder example:

z Using of tool life management function

Parameter˄No.002#0˅is used as the symbol for tool life management function (0ˉunusedˈ1
ˉused); if the function is not used, the relevant tool life management page is not shown.

z Tool life management display interface

Volume Ċ Operation
The tool life management is controlled by key, which is displayed in the third
sub-interface, and it is composed by 2 pages (paging by page keys). Interface is shown by pressing

key repeatedly

Tool life management display (the 1st page)

The 1st page for tool life management interface displays the life data of the current tool and
the tool group list that has been defined. This page is mainly used for monitoring the tool life data
by group units. The data monitoring of each tool in a group, group number setting and tool life
management data are displayed in the following page.

179
 GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual
Volume Ċ Operation

ν. Display explanation
<Current Tool State>: It displays the life data of the current tool which is being used.
Mode: It displays the counting unit of life data. (0: minute/1: times)
State: It displays the tool status. ( 0ˉUnusedˈ1ˉUsingˈ2ˉOverˈ3ˉSkip)
< Defined Group No. >˖ It only displays the group numbers which have been defined, and
the undefined are not shown. The group number with the backlight means
that all the tool life in that group has expired.
ξ. Deletion of all defined data

In this page, press ˇ keys, it may delete all the data which have been defined
(including group number, group tool numbers and life values, etc. )

Tool life management interface (the 2nd page)

The 2nd page is used to set and display the life data of a group which are displayed by order
1̚8.

There are 3 display types for tool group selection:

i. Directly input the group number in the “Tool Group P”of the 2nd page, it displays the tool life

180
 Chapter 1 Operation Mode and Display

data. If the group does not exist, the number input will be taken as a new group number.The
new group number: 05, and the 1st tool will be defined by system automatically:
ii. Move the cursor to select the group number in the “Defined Group No.”of the 1st page, and it
displays the group content as turning to the 2nd page.
iii. As the current group number content is displayed in the 2nd page, it continues to display the
following group number content by turning to the next page.

1.3.4 Alarm interface

Press key to enter Alarm interface, there are CNC ALARM, PLC ALARM, ALARM LOG

Volume Ċ Operation
pages in this interface, which can be viewed by or key.

1) PLC ALARM: It displays the numbers of CNC alarm, PLC alarm and the current PLC alarm
No., as well as PLC warning and warning No.. It may display 24 PLC alarm or warning No. together.
The details for the respective alarm No. can be viewed by moving the cursor. The page is as follows˖

Page as the cursor locates at the alarm No.1000

2) CNC ALARM: It displays the numbers of CNC alarm, PLC alarm and the current CNC alarm
No.. It can display 24 CNC alarm No. together. The details for the respective alarm No. can be
viewed by moving the cursor. The page is as follows:

181
 GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual
Volume Ċ Operation

Page as the cursor locates at the alarm No.432

3) WARN LOG: Press key to enter Alarm interface, then press it again to enter the
WARN LOG page, which records the latest alarm message including alarm date, alarm time,

alarm No. and alarm content. 200 pieces warn log messages can be viewed by or

key. See the following figure:

ķ Sequence of warn log: the latest alarm log message is shown on the forefront of the 1st
page, and the others queue in sequence. If the alarm log messages areover 200, the last one
will be cleared.

ĸ Manual clearing of warn log: under the 2 level authority, press ˇ key, it
may clear all the warn log messages.
4˅Alarm clearing: If multiple alarms are issued, only one alarm where the cursor locates could be

cleared by pressing key each time (In alarm interface, it clears all alarms and warnings

182
 Chapter 1 Operation Mode and Display

by pressing and keys).

5) The current alarm page is as florrows:

Volume Ċ Operation
Current page

Page after pressing RESET key

6) Clearing PLC warning: If multiple warnings are issued, only one warning where the cursor

locates could be cleared by pressing or key each time (In Alarm interface, it clears

all alarms and warnings by pressing and keys).

1.3.5 Setting interface

is a compound key, press key in other page, it enters setting interface, press it

again, it enters the G54~G59 interface, press it three times, it enters Graphic interface. Press
key repeatedly, it switches among the above nentioned interfaces.

183
 GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual

1.Setting interface

There are 3 pages in this interface, which can be viewed by and keys.
1˅SWITCH SETTING: It is used for displaying the parameter, program, auto sequence No. on /
off state.
PARM SWT: when it is turned ON, the parameters are allowed to be modified; it is turned OFF,
the parameters are unallowed to be modified.
PROG SWT: when it is turned ON, the programs are allowed to be edited; it is turned OFF,
the programs are unallowed to be edited.
AUTO SEG: when it is turned ON, the block No. is created automatically; it is turned OFF, the
Volume Ċ Operation

block No. is not created automatically, input manually if it is needed.

In this page, the state of on/off can be switched by ‘left / right’key or ‘U’and‘D’key on the MDI
panel.

2˅Data backup: In this page, the CNC data (bit parameter, data parameter, pitch parameter, tool
offset) can be saved and restored.
Data backup (user): For CNC data backup by user (save)
Recover backup data (user): For backup data recover by user (read)
Recover standard parameter 1 (test): For reading original parameter data of CNC test by user
Recover standard parameter 2 (step): For reading original parameter data of suited step drive
unit by user
Recover standard parameter 3 (servo): For reading original parameter data of suited servo drive
unit by user.

184
 Chapter 1 Operation Mode and Display

User page of 3, 4, 5 level

Volume Ċ Operation
User page of 2 level
3˅Password setting˖Display and set user operation level.
The password of GSK980MDa is composed of 4 levels, including machine builder (level 2),
equipment management (level 3), technician (level 4) and machining operation (level 5).
Machine builder (level 2): It allows to modify CNC bit parameter, data parameter, screw- pitch
parameter, tool offset parameter, edit part program (including macro program), edit and alter PLC
ladder diagram, upload and download ladder diagram.
Equipment management (level 3): Initial password is 12345. The CNC bit parameter, data
parameterm screw- pitch parameter, tool offset parameter, part program editing operations are
allowed.
Technician (level 4): Initial password is 1234. Tool offset data (for tool setting), macro varibles,
part program editing operations are allowed. However, CNC bit parameter, data parameter and pitch
parameter editing operations are not allowed.
Machining operation (level 5): No password. Only the mschine panel operation is allowed. The
alteration of tool offset data, CNC bit parameter, data parameter, pitch parameter, and the operations
of part program selection, program editing are not allowed.

185
 GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual
Volume Ċ Operation

1.Setting page of G54̚G59 Page location

Press key twice, this page is displayed.

The zero of the coordinate system: workpiece coordinate system zero offset, G54ˈG55ˈG56ˈG57ˈ
G58ˈG59.

z Moving of the cursor

The cursor moves at the data of each coordinate system axis. And the data where the cursor
186
 Chapter 1 Operation Mode and Display

locates are highlighted.

The cursor supports up and down, left and right moving, and the corresponding data are
backlighted.
By pressing Page key, the 1st group X axis data on the corresponding interface where the cursor
locates is backlighted.
z Absolute data input

After “data+ key” is keyed in by user, the data where the cursor locates is changed to the
“data” input by user.
The validity judgement of user input data is the same as that of 980TD coordinate data input in
MDI mode.

Volume Ċ Operation
z Relative data input

After “data+ key” is keyed in by user, the original data where the cursor locates is
changed by the sum of“data” newly input by user and original data.
z Auto measurement input

After “ (or ˈ )ˇ ˇ key” is keyed in by user, the original data

where the cursor locates is changed by the system current“X (or ZˈY) axis machine coordinate”.

3. Graphic interface
There are GRAPH SET, GRAPH TRACK pages in this interface, which can be viewed by

and keys.

1˅GRAPH SET page

In this page, the coordinate system, scaling and scope for graphic display can be selected.

187
 GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual

2˅GRAPH TRACK page

In this page, it displays the path within the parameters range (refer to absolute coordinate) of
GRAPH SET page.
Volume Ċ Operation

1.3.6 BIT PARAMETER, DATA PARAMETER, PITCH COMP interface

is a compound key, it enters BIT PARAMETER, DATA PARAMETER and PITCH COMP
interfaces by pressing this key repeatedly.

1. BIT PARAMETER interface

Press key, it enters BIT PARAMETER interface, there are 48 bit parameters which are

displayed by 2 pages in this interface, and they can be viewed or modified by pressing or

key to enter the corresponding page. It is as follows:

As is shown in this page, there are 2 parameter rows at the bottom of the page, the 1st row shows
the meaning of a bit of a parameter where the cursor locates, the bit to be displayed can be

positioned by pressing or key. The 2nd row shows the abbreviation of all the bits of a
parameter where the cursor locates.

188
 Chapter 1 Operation Mode and Display

Volume Ċ Operation
2. DATA PARAMETER interface

Press key repeatedly ( key if in BIT PARAMETER interface), it enters DATA

PARAMETER interface, there are 110 data parameters which are displayed by 7 pages in this

interface, and they can be viewed or modified by pressing or key to enter the
corresponding page. It is as follows:
As is shown in this page, there is a cue line at the page bottom, it displays the meaning of the
parameter where the cursor locates.

z PITCH COMP interface

Press key repeatedly, it enters PITCH COMP interface, there are 256 pitch parameters

which are displayed by 16 pages in this interface, and they can be viewed by pressing or

key.

189
 GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual
Volume Ċ Operation

1.3.7 CNC DIAGNOSIS, PLC STATE, PLC VALUE, machine soft panel, VERSION
MESSAGE interface

is a compound key, it enters CNC DIAGNOSIS, PLC STATE, PLC VALUE, machine soft
panel, VERSION MESSAGE interfaces by pressing this key repeatedly.

1ǃ CNC DIAGNOSIS interface CNC

The input/output signal state between CNC and machine, the transmission signal state between
CNC and PLC, PLC internal data and CNC internal state can all be displayed via diagnosis. Press

key it enters CNC DIAGNOSIS interface, the keypad diagnosis, state diagnosis and
miscellaneous function parameters etc. can be shown in this interface, which can be viewed by

pressing or key.
In CNC DIAGNOSIS page, there are 2 diagnosis No. rows at the page bottom, the 1st row shows
the meaning of a diagnosis No. bit where the cursor locates, the bit to be displayed can be positioned

by pressing or key. The 2nd row shows the abbreviation of all the diaosgnis No. bits
where the cursor locates.

190
 Chapter 1 Operation Mode and Display

Volume Ċ Operation
2. PLC STATE interface

In the page of this interface, it orderly displays the state of address X0000~X0029,
Y0000~Y0019, F0000~F0255, G0000~G0255, A0000~A0024, K0000~K0039, R0000~R0999 etc..

And it enters PLC STATE interface by pressing key repeatedly. The signal state of PLC

addresses can be viewed by pressing or key.

In PLC STATE page, there are 2 rows at the page bottom; the 1st row shows the meaning of a bit

of an address where the cursor locates, the bit to be displayed can be positioned by pressing

or key. The 2nd row shows the abbreviation of all the bits of an address where the cursor
locates.

3. PLC VALUE interface

191
 GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual

In the page of this interface, it orderly displays the values in the registers of T0000 ̚

T0099,D0000̚D0999,C0000̚C0099,DT000̚DT099,DC000̚DC099 etc.. By pressing

key repeatedly it enters PLC VALUE interface. The data values of PLC can be viewed by pressing

or key.
In this PLC VALUE page, there is a cue line at the page bottom, it displays the meaning of the
parameter where the cursor locates. As is shown in the following figure:
Volume Ċ Operation

4. VERSION MESSAGE interface

It enters VERSION MESSAGE interface by pressing key repeatedly. The software,

hardware, and PLC version message can be shown in this interface. The figure is as follows:

192
 Chapter 1 Operation Mode and Display

1.4 List of general operations

Operatio Passwor Program

Item Function Operation key Display Parameter
n mode d level on/off
page switch
Relative Relative
coordinate of X coordin
axis clearing . ate

Relative
Relative
coordinate of Y

Volume Ċ Operation
. coordin
axis clearing
ate
Relative Relative
coordinate of z coordinat
axis clearing . e

Part No. Relative

Clear clearing coordinat
+
ing e or

Cutting time absolute

clearing coordinat
+
e

Tool radius Tool Level

offset D 0. offset 2,3,4
clearing

Tool length
Tool Level
offset H 0.
offset 2,3,4
clearing
Bit
Data MDI
Bit parameter paramete On
input Parameter. mode Level 2,3
r
Bit
MDI
Data parameteLevel 2,3 On
Parameter. mode
parameter r

193
 GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual

Operatio Passwor Program

Item Function Operation key Display Parameter
n mode d level on/off
page switch

Input pitch
. Compensation MDI Pitch
parameter of X Level 2
mode paramete On
axis
value. r

Input pitch Pitch

. Compensation MDI
parameter of Y parameteLevel 2
mode On
Volume Ċ Operation

axis r
value.
Pitch
Input pitch compens
. Compensation
parameter of Z MDI ation Level 2
On
axis mode paramete
value.
r
Macro Level
Macro varibles
Macro varibles. varibles 2,3,4
Input tool Level
Tool offst
radius offst D Data value. 2,3,4

Input tool Tool

Level
length offset H Data value. offset
2,3,4
Search down
Sear Program
from where the Edit Level
ch Character. content On
cursor locates mode 2,3,4
Search up
Edit
from where the Program Level On
Character. mode
cursor locates content 2,3,4
Search down Program
Level
from current Edit content,
. 2,3,4
program mode or program
Search up auto list or
Level
from current mode program
. 2,3,4
program state

194
 Chapter 1 Operation Mode and Display

Operatio Passwor Program

Item Function Operation key Display Parameter
n mode d level on/off
page switch
2 㑻. 3 㑻.
Search
. program name. 4㑻
defined
Level
program
2,3,4
Search for bit
parameter,
Correspo
data . Parameter no.. nding

Volume Ċ Operation
parameter or
page of
pitch
the data
parameter

PLC state, PLC

. address No.
PLC data state,
searching PLC data
.

Program Level
Delet Delete the Edit On
content 2,3,4
ion character mode
where the
Edit Level
cursor is in Program On
mode 2,3,4
content
Move the cursor to the head
Level
Single block Edit Program On
2,3,4
deletion of the line. mode content

Multi-block . . order Level

Edit Program On
deletion 2,3,4
mode content
number.

Segment Level
Edit Program On
deletion . character. 2,3,4
mode content

195
 GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual

Operatio Passwor Program

Item Function Operation key Display Parameter
n mode d level on/off
page switch

Delete one . program name. Level

Edit Program On
program 2,3,4
mode content

Delete all . 999. Edit Level

Program On
Volume Ċ Operation

programs mode 2,3,4

content

Chan
Change . program name. Edit Program Level
ge On
program name mode content 2,3,4
nam
e

DupliDuplicate . program name. Edit Program Level

On
catio program mode content 2,3,4
n

CNC
Edit
ĺCN Tool offset Tool Level 2,3 On
mode
C offset
˄se Bit
Edit
nd˅ Bit parameter parameteLevel 2,3 On
mode
r

Data Edit
Data On
parameter mode Level 2,3
parametr
Pitch
Edit
Pitch paramete On
mode Level 2
parameter r

Send a part , program name, Edit Program Level

On
program mode content 2,3,4

196
 Chapter 1 Operation Mode and Display

Operatio Passwor Program

Item Function Operation key Display Parameter
n mode d level on/off
page switch

Send all part . 999. Edit Level

Program On
programs mode 2,3,4
content

Edit Level
Tool offset On
mode 2,3,4
Edit
Bit parameter On

Volume Ċ Operation
CNC mode Level 2,3
ĺCN
Data
C Edit Level 2,3 On
parameter
˄rec mode
eive˅Pitch Edit
Level 2 On
parameter mode
Edit Level
Part program On
mode 2,3,4
Edit Tool Level
Tool offset On
mode offset 2,3,4
State
Level
Bit parameter Edit paramete On
2,3,4
mode r
Data
Edit
Bit parameter parameteLevel 2,3 On
mode
r
CNC Pitch
ĺPC compens
Pitch Edit
(uplo ation Level 2 On
parameter mode
ad) paramete
r

Send a , program name, Edit Program Level

On
program mode content 2,3,4

Send all Level

Edit On
programs . 999. 2,3,4
mode

197
 GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual

Operatio Passwor Program

Item Function Operation key Display Parameter
n mode d level on/off
page switch
Edit Level
Tool offset On
mode 2,3,4
Edit
Level 2,3 On
PCĺ Bit parameter mode
CNC Data Edit
Level 2,3 On
(dow parameter mode
nloa Pitch Edit
Level 2 On
Volume Ċ Operation

d) parameter mode

Edit Level
On
Part program mode 2,3,4

Turn on
Switch
parameter Level 2,3
setting
switch
Turn on
Switch Level
program
setting 2,3,4
switch

Swit Turn on auto Switch

ch sequence No. setting
setti Turn off
Switch
ng parameter Level 2,3
setting
switch
Turn off
Switch Level
program
setting 2,3,4
switch

Turn off auto Switch

sequence No. setting

Explanations: “. ” in the column “operation” indicates operate two keys successively, “+”
indicates operate two keys simultaneously.

Exampleġ . indicates that press key firstēand then press

keyĢ + indicates that press two keys simultaneously.

198
 Chapter 2 Power ON or OFF And Protection

CHAPTER 2 POWER ON OR OFF AND PROTECTION

2.1 System Power On

Before this GSK980MDa is powered on, the following should be confirmed:

1. The machine is in a normal state.
2. The power voltage conforms to the requirement of the machine.
3. The connection is correct and secure.
The following page is displayed after GSK980MDa is powered on:

Volume Ċ Operation
The current position (RELATIVE POS) page is displayed after system auto detection and
initiation are finished.

2.2 System Power Off

Before power is off, ensure that:
1. The axes of the CNC are at halt;
2. Miscellaneous functions (spindle, pump etc.) are off;
3. Cut off CNC power prior to machine power cutting off.
Note: Please see the machine builder’s manual for the machine power cut-off operation.

199
 GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual

2.3 Overtravel Protection

Overtravel protection should be employed to prevent the damage to the machine due to the
overtravel of the axes.

2.3.1 Hardware overtravel protection

The stroke switches are fixed at the positive and negative maximum travel of the machine axes X,
Y, Z, 4th, 5th respectivelyˈthey are connected by the following figure. And the “MESP”of bit parameter
No.017 must be setted to 0. If the overtravel occurs, the stroke switch acts to make the machine stop,
and the emergency alarm issues.
Volume Ċ Operation

9 ; ; ˉY +Y = =

Emergency stop switch

Temporary release switch

(63˄;6˅

When the hardware overtravel occurs, there will be an “emergency stop”alarm. The steps to
eliminate this alarm is press the OVERTRAVEL button to reversely move the table to detach the
stroke switch (for positive overtravel, move negatively; vice versa).

2.3.2 Software overtravel protection

When the “MOT” of bit parameter No.17 is set to 0, the software limit is valid.
The software travel stroke is set by data parameter NO.135~ NO.144, they refer to machine
coordinate. No.135~No.139 are for axes (X, Y, Z, 4th, 5th) positive max.overtravel, ʋ140̚ʋ144 are
for negative max.overtravel.
If the machine position (coordinate) exceeds the setting range, overtravel alarm will occur. The
steps to eliminate this alarm is press RESET key to clear the alarm, then moves reversely (for
positive overtravel, move out negatively; vice versa)

2.4 Emergency Operation

During the machining, some unexpected incidents may occur because of the user programming,
operation and product fault.So this GSK980MDa should stopped immediately for these incidents.
This section mainly describes the resolutions that this GSK980MDa are capable of under the
emergency situation. Please see the relative explanation for these resolutions under the emergency
by machine builder.

200
 Chapter 2 Power ON or OFF And Protection

2.4.1 Reset

Press key to reset this GSK980MDa system if there are abnormal outputs and axis
actions in it:
1. All axes movement stops;
2. M, S function output is invalid (PLC ladder defines whether automatically cut off signals such

as spindle CCW/CW, lubrication, cooling by pressing key);

3. Auto run ends, modal function and state held on.

Volume Ċ Operation
2.4.2 Emergency stop
During machine running, if the emergency button is pressed under the dangerous or emergent
situation, the CNC system enters into emergency status and the machine movement is stopped
immediately. If the emergency button is released, the emergency alarm is cancelled and the CNC
resets. Its circuit wiring is shown in section 2.2.1 of this chapter.
Note 1 Ensure the fault is eliminated before the emergency alarm is cancelled.
Note 2 pressing down the Emergency button prior to power on or off may alleviate the electric
shock to the machine system.
Note 3 Reperform the machine zero return operation to ensure the correct position coordinate
after the emergency alarm is cancelled (machine zero return operation is unallowed if
there is no machine zero on the machine.).
Note 4 Only the MESP of the bit parameter No.017 is set to 0, is the external emergency stop
valid.

2.4.3 Feed hold

Key can be pressed during the machine running to make the running pause. However, in
thread cutting, cycle running, this function can not stop the running immediately.

2.4.4 Power off

Under the dangerous or emergency situations during the machine running, the machine power
should be cut off immediately to avoid the accidents. However, it should be noted that there may be a
big error between the CNC displayed coordinate and the actual position. So the tool setting operation
should be performed again.

201
 GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual

CHAPTER 3 MANUAL OPERATION

Press key, it enters Manual mode. In this mode, the manual feed, spindle control, override
adjustment operations can be performed.

Noteʽ
The keys functions of this 980MDa machine panel are defined by Ladder
Diagram; please refer to the respective materials by the machine builder for the
Volume Ċ Operation

function significance.
Please note that the following function introduction is described based on the
980MDa standard PLC programs!

3.1 Coordinate axis moving

In Manual mode, the coordinate axis can be moved manually for feeding and rapid traverse.

3.1.1 Manual feed

Press feed axis and axis direction key in the direction selection

area , the corresponding axis may be moved positively or

negatively, and the axis stops moving if releasing these two keys; and the direction selection keys of
X. Y. Z. 4th. 5th axes can be hold on at a time to make the 5 axes to move simultaneously.

3.1.2 Manual rapid traverse

First press key in the feed axis and direction selection area

till the rapid traverse indicator in the State area lights

202
 Chapter 3 Manual Operation

up. The corresponding axis can be rapidly moved positively or negatively by pressing direction
selection key, and the axis stops moving if releasing the key; and the direction selection keys of X. Y.
Z. 4th. 5th axes can be hold on at a time to make the 5 axes to move simultaneously.

In Manual rapid mode, press key to make the indicator go out, and the rapid traverse is
invalid, it enters the Manual feed mode.
Note 1: Before machine zero return, the validity of manual rapid traverse is set by the “ISOT”
of the bit parameter No.012.

Note 2: In Edit or MPG mode, key is invalid.

Volume Ċ Operation
3.1.3 Manual feedrate override adjustment

In Manual mode, the or key in can be pressed to modify the Manual

feedrate override, and the override has 16 levels. The relation of the feedrate override and the
feedrate is as the following table:

Feedrate override (%) Feedrate (mm/min)

0 0
10 2.0
20 3.2
30 5.0
40 7.9
50 12.6
60 20
70 32
80 50
90 79
100 126
110 200
120 320
130 500
140 790
150 1260

Note: There is about 2% fluctuating error for the data in the table.

203
 GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual

3.1.4 Manual rapid override adjustment

In the manual rapid traverse, or key in can be pressed (also

by key with the respective override F0, 25%,50%ˈ100%)to modify the

Volume Ċ Operation

Manual rapid override, and there are 4 gears of F0, 25%, 50%ˈ100% for the override.(F0 is set by
data parameter No.069)

3.1.5 Relative coordinate clearing

1˅Press key to enter Position interface, then press or key to select the
RELATIVE POS page;

2˅Press key to make the “X”in the page to blink,then press key;

204
 Chapter 3 Manual Operation

3˅The clearing operations of other coordinates are the same as above.

Volume Ċ Operation
3.2 Other Manual operations

Note: The following operations are also valid in Machine zero, MPG/Step mode.

3.2.1 Spindle CCW, CW, stop control

˖In Manual mode, the spindle rotates conterclockwise if pressing this key;˗

˖In Manual mode, the spindle stops if pressing this key;

˖In Manual mode, the spindle rotates clockwise if pressing this key;

3.2.2 Spindle Jog

Press and hold key, the spindle rotates conterclockwise, release it, the spindle stops.

3.2.3 Cooling control

˖In Manual mode, press this key, the coolant is switched on/off.DŽ

3.2.4 Lubrication control

See details in Appendix for its function.

205
 GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual

3.2.5 Spindle override adjustment

In Manual mode, if the spindle speed is controlled by analog voltage output, the spindle speed
may be adjusted.

By pressing the or key in Spindle Override keys , the spindle speed

Volume Ċ Operation

can be changed by real-time adjusting of the spindle override that has 8 levels of 50ˁ̚120ˁ.

206
 Chapter 4 Mpg/Step Operation

CHAPTER 4 MPG/STEP OPERATION

In MPG/Step mode, the machine moves by a specified increment.

Noteʽ
The keys functions of this 980MDa machine panel are defined by Ladder; please refer to
the respective materials by the machine builder for the function significance.
Please note that the following function introduction is described based on the 980MDa
standard PLC programs!

Volume Ċ Operation
4.1 Step Feed

Set the BIT3 of the bit parameter No.001 to 0, and press key to enter the Step mode, it
displays as follows:

4.1.1 Increment selection

Press key to select the move increment, the increment will be shown in
the page..

Note: In the EDIT or REF modes, keys are invalid. In the AUTO or
MDI modes, rapid override will be changed by pressing the above-mentioned keys. In

the MANUAL mode, press rapid move key and

keys together, these keys are valid, otherwise, they are invalid.

207
 GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual

4.1.2 Moving direction selection

Press or key once, X axis can be moved negatively or positively by a step

increment, other axises are the same.

4.2 MPG (Handwheel) Feed

Set the BIT3 of the bit parameter No.001 to 1, and press key to enter the MPG mode,
Volume Ċ Operation

it displays as following:

The handwheel figure is as follows˖

The handwheel figure

4.2.1 Increment selection

Press key to select the move increment, the increment will be shown in
the page˖

208
 Chapter 4 Mpg/Step Operation

Volume Ċ Operation
4.2.2 Moving axis and direction selection

In MPG mode, press key to select the corresponding axis. The page is as follows
(Other axises are the same):

The handwheel feed direction is defined by its rotation direction. Generally, the handwheel CW is
for positive feed, and CCW is for negative feed. In case of that handwheel CW is for negative feed,
CCW for positive feed, it may exchange the A, B signals of the handwheel terminals,also you can
modify the HNGX. HNGY. HNGZ. HNG4. HNG5 of the bit parameter ʋ019.

4.2.3 Explanation items

1. The correspondence between the handwheel scale and the machine moving amount is as
following table˖
Moving amount of each handwheel scale
Handwheel increment 0.001 0.0100 0.100 1.000
Specified coordinate value 0.001mm 0.010mm 0.100mm 1.000mm
2. The rotation speed of the handwheel should be less than 5 r/s, if it is over that, the scale may be
not coincide with the moving amount
3. The handwheel axis selection key is valid only in the MPG mode.

209
 GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual

CHAPTER 5 MDI OPERATION

In MDI mode, the operations of parameter setting, words input and execution can be performed.

Noteʽ
The keys functions of this 980MDa machine panel are defined by Ladder; please refer to
the respective materials by the machine builder for the function significance.
Please note that the following function introduction is described based on the 980MDa
standard PLC programs!
Volume Ċ Operation

5.1 Code Words Input

Select MDI mode to enter the PRG STATE page, to input an block “G00 X50 Z100”ˈthe steps
are as follows:

1. Press key to enter MDI mode;

2. Press key to enter PRG STATE page:

3. Input . . ˈ . . ˈ . . ˈ . .

. by sequence, the page is as follows:

210
 Chapter 5 MDI Operation

Volume Ċ Operation
4. Press ˈthe page is as follows:

5.2 Code Words Execution

After the words are input, and press , the background color of program segment

becomes white, these MDI words are executed after the key is pressed. During the

execution,Press , and Emergency Stop button may be pressed to terminate the

MDI words execution.If key is pressed,the background color of program segment

will becomes black,then words can be input again.

Note: The subprogram call command (M98 P Ģetc.) is invalid in MDI mode.

211
 GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual

5.3 Parameter Setting

In MDI mode, the parameter value can be modified after entering the parameter interface. See
details in Chapter 9 of this part.

5.4 Data Modification

In the PRG STATE page, before the inputted words will be executed, if there is an error in
Volume Ċ Operation

inputted words, press to cancel highligt state, then program segment can be

modified. It may press key to clear all the words, then input the correct words; for
example ,”Z1000” will be inputted to replace Z100 in Section 5.1 of this chapter, the steps are as
follow.

1. press keyˈthe page is as follows˖

2. press keyˈthe page is as follows˖

212
 Chapter 5 MDI Operation

Volume Ċ Operation
3. press . . . . by sequence, the page is as follows˖

4. At last ,press , the page is as follows˖

5.5 OUT Key Start

When the “OUTR” of the K parameter K0010 is set to 1, the current words inputted
213
 GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual

may be executed by pressing key in MDI mode. It is the same as .

Volume Ċ Operation

214
 Chapter6Program EditAndM anagement

CHAPTER 6 PROGRAM EDIT AND MANAGEMENT

In Edit mode, the programs can be created, selected, modified, copied and deleted, and the
bidirectional communication between CNC and CNC, or CNC and PC can also be achieved. To
prevent the program to be modified or deleted accidentally, a program switch is set for this
GSK980MD system. And it must be turned on before program editing. Also 3 level user authority is
set in this GSK980MD system to facilitate the management. Only the operation authority is above
4 level (4 or 3 level etc.) can open the program switch for program editing.

6.1 Program Creation

Volume Ċ Operation
6.1.1 Creation of the block number

The program can be with or without a block No. The program is executed by the block numbered
sequence (except the calling). When the “AUTO SEG”switch in setting page is OFF, the CNC doesn’t
generate the block number automatically, but the blocks may be edited manually.
When “AUTO SEG” switch in switch setting page is on, the CNC generates the block number

automatically. In editing, press key to generate block number of the next block automatically.
The increment of this block number is set by ʋ216.

6.1.2 Input of the program content

1 Press key to enter the Edit mode;

2 Press key to enter the Program interface, select the PRG CONTENT page

215
 GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual

by pressing or key
Volume Ċ Operation

3 Key in address key , numerical key ˈ , and

key by sequence (e.g. Program O0001 creation);

4 Press key to setup the new program;

216
 Chapter6 Program EditAndM anagement

Volume Ċ Operation
5 Input the edited part program one by one, the character will be displayed on the screen
immediately as it is input(as for compound key, press this key repeatedly for alternate

input),after a block is finished, press to terminate it.

6 Other blocks cab be input by step 5 above.

6.1.3 Search of the character

1 Scanning: To scan the character one by one by cursor

Press key to enter the Edit mode, then press key to enter the PRG
CONTENT page;

1˅Press key, the cursor shifts a line upward; if the number of the column where the
cursor locates is over the total columns of the previous line, the cursor moves to the previous

block end (at“;”sign) after key is pressed;

2˅ Press key, the cursor shifts a line downward; if the number of the column where the
cursor locates is over the total columns of the next line, the cursor moves to the next block end

(at“;”sign) after the key is pressed;

3˅ Press key, the cursor shifts a column to the right; if the cursor locates at the line
end, it moves to the head of the next block;

217
 GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual

4˅Press key, the cursor shifts a column to the left; if the cursor locates at the line
head, it moves to the end of the next block;

5˅ Press key to page upward, the cursor moves to the 1st line and t h e 1st column of

the previous page, if it pages to the head of the program, the cursor moves to the 2nd line and 1st
column;

6˅Press key to page downward, the cursor moves to the 1st line and 1st column of the

next page, if it pages to the end of the program, the cursor moves to the last line and 1st column of
Volume Ċ Operation

the program;

2 Searching: To search for the specified character upward or downward

from the cursor current location
The steps of searching are as follows:

1˅Press key to enter Edit mode;

2˅Press key to enter the PRG CONTENT page;

3˅Press key to enter Search mode, M a x . 5 0 b y t e s c a n b e i n p u t , b u t o n l y

1 0 o f t h e m c a n b e s e a r c h e d . I f the characters a r e over 10 bytes, searching will fail. E.g. to

search command ——G2, press key, then input G2, and operate as step 4.

218
 Chapter6Program EditAndM anagement

4 ˅ Press key˄ or by the location relation between the

character to be searched and the character where the cursor locates), it displays as follows:

Volume Ċ Operation
5˅After the searching, the CNC system is still in searching state, press or key

again, the next character can be searched. Or press key to exit the searching state.

6˅If the character is not found, the prompt of “Srch fail” will be displayed.
Note:During the searching, it doesn’t search the characters in the called subprogram

3 Method to return to the program head

1) In the Program Display page of the Edit mode, press key, the cursor returns to
the program head
2) Search the program head character by the methods in Section 6.1.3 of this part.

6.1.4 Insertion of the character

Steps:

1˅Select the PRG CONTENT page in Edit mode, the page is as follows:

219
 GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual
Volume Ċ Operation

2˅Input the character to be inserted(to insert G98 code before G2 in the above figure,

input . . . ), the page is as follows:

Note 1:In the Insert mode, if the cursor is not located at the line head, a space
will be automatically generated when inserting the command address; if the cursor is
located at the line head, the space will not be generated, and it should be inserted manually.

Note 2ġIn program content edit mode or MDI mode of program state pageēpress key to
enter insertion or macro edit state.
In macro editting modeēspecial symbols can be input areġ‘[’. ‘]’. ‘=’. ‘+’. ‘>’. ‘<’. ‘/’. ‘&’. ‘|’.
Above symbols are frequently used for macro edit.

220
 Chapter6Program EditAndM anagement

Difference between Input special

Automatic space Process of character ‘O’
two states symbols
In program editting, Program switch, duplication Special symbols
Insertion state insert blank automatically and deletion can be done can not be
to separate words. by pressing ‘O’. inputted.
Blank can not be inserted Only input character ‘O’. Special symbols
Macro edit state
automatically. can be inputted.

6.1.5 Deletion of the character

Volume Ċ Operation
Steps:
1˅Select the PRG CONTENT page in Edit mode;

2˅Press key to delete the character before the cursor; press key to delete
the character where the cursor locates.

6.1.6 Modification of the character

Cancel or delete the character and re-enter new ones.

6.1.7 Deletion of a single block

This function is only applied to the block with a block No.(N command) , which is at the head of a
line and followed by blocks which are divided by space.
Steps:
1˅Select the PRG CONTENT page in Edit mode;
2˅Move the cursor to the head of the block to be deleted (column 1— where N locates), then

press key.
Note: If the block has no block No.N, key in “N”at the head of the block, and move the cursor

to “N”, then press key.

6.1.8 Deletion of the blocks

It deletes all the content (including the specified block)from the current character
where the cursor locates to the block with the specified No.(searching downward), and the

221
 GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual

specified block must has a block No..

Volume Ċ Operation

Steps
1˅Select the PRG CONTENT page in Edit mode;

2˅Press key to enter the FIND state, and key in the block No.

3˅Press key to delete blocks from G0 (block 2) to N10 (including block N10). It displays as
follows:

222
 Chapter6Program EditAndM anagement

6.1.9 Segment deletion

It deletes the content downward from the current character where the cursor
locates to the word specified.

Volume Ċ Operation
Steps
1˅Select the PRG CONTENT page in Edit mode

2˅Press key to enter the FIND state, and key in the characters (see the following figure:
input F1000)

3˅Press key, and all programs from I-20 where the cursor locates to F1000. It
displays as follows:

223
 GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual
Volume Ċ Operation

Note 1:If the specified character is not found or the specified character is
located before the current cursor, the prompt of “Srch fail” will be
displayed. If there are multiple same characters specified downward, it defaults the
nearest one to the current cursor.
Note 2: If the command address is input, both the address and the command value behind it are
Deleted.

6.2 Program annotation

To facilitate the user to search, manage and edit program, the system provides program name
annotation and block annotation functions.

6.2.1 Annotation for program name

The program annotation can be added in the brackets behind it. For exa mple: program O0005 is
used for machining bolt holes, the annotation can be added in program contents as follows:

1˅Select edit mode, and then enter program content display page.

2˅Press keyˈsearch is displayed at the left bottom of the screen, the displayed figure is
as follows:

224
 Chapter 6 Program Edit And Management

Volume Ċ Operation
3˅Input annotation behind search (input max. 50 characters except for brackets). If BOLT
PROC is inputted (bolt holes machining ), the page displayed is as follows:

4˅Press keyˈprogram annotation setting up is finishedˈthe displayed page is as follows˖

225
 GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual

6.2.2 Block annotation

Take contents in brackets ‘˄’and‘˅’as program annotation, which can be put at any position of a
block and displayed with green characters. The page is as follows:
Volume Ċ Operation

Related explanations˖
1˅Because symbols‘˄’and ‘˅’are not provided in the systemˈblock annotation can not be inputted
by edit mode in the system. If block annotation is needed to added, edit annotation on the PC and
download it to the CNC by software.
2˅The system is not support Chinese characters. If Chinese characters are edited on PC, which
will be displayed as blanks in the system after it is saved in the CNC.

Note 1ġAfter a program is set up, if the program name annotation is not added, CNC defaults
program name as program name annotation
Note 2ġProgram annotation in the CNC must be English, but the CNC supports Chinese
annotation display (except for Chinese decimal points). The way of adding Chinese
annotation is as follows: Edit Chinese annotation in the PC machine, and then download
it to the CNC by communication software.

6.2.3 Alter program annotation

Operation steps are the same as program annotation setting steps on section 6.2.1 of this
chapter.

6.3 Deletion of the Program

6.3.1 Deletion a single program
Steps:
1˅Select the PRG DISPLAY page in Edit mode;

226
 Chapter 6 Program Edit And Management

2˅Key in address key , numerical key . . . by

sequence( take program O0001 for an example);
3) Press key, program O0001 will be deleted
NoteġPress ‘DELETE ’ key in page ‘program preview’or‘file list’to delete program.

6.3.2 Deletion of all programs

Steps
1˅Select the PRG DISPLAY page in Edit mode

Volume Ċ Operation
2˅Key in address key , symbol key numerical key . . .

by sequence

3˅Press key, all the programs will be deleted.

NoteġPress ‘delete key’in page ‘file list’to delete all programs.

6.4 Selection of the Program

When there are multiple programs in CNC system, a program can be selected by the
following 4 methods:

6.4.1 Search method

1˅ Select Edit mode;

2˅ Press key to enter the PRG CONTENT page;

3˅ Press address key and key in the program No.;

4˅ Press or key, the searched program will be displayed.

Note:In step 4, if the program does not exist, a new program will be created by

CNC system after key is pressed

227
 GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual

6.4.2 Scanning method

1˅ Select Edit or Auto mode;

2˅ Press key to enter the PRG DISPLAY page;

3˅ Press address key

4˅ Press or key to display the next or previous program;

Volume Ċ Operation

5˅ Repeat step 3 and 4 to display the saved programs one by one.

6.4.3 Cursor method

1˅ In Program Preview mode (must be in non-running state);

2 ˅ Press . . or key to move the cursor to the

program name to be selected (change “PRG SIZE”, “NOTE” content as the cursor moves);

3˅Press to open the program.

6.4.4 Select file by using file list

1˅ On file list page˄Edit mode is operation mode˅

228
 Chapter 6 Program Edit And Management

Volume Ċ Operation
2˅Select program to be opened by pressing or key.

3) Open program by pressing key.

6.5 Execution of the Program

After the program to be executed is selected by the method in Section 6.4 of this part,

select the Auto mode, then press key (or press external cycle start key), the
program will be executed automatically.

6.6 Rename of the Program

1˅Select the PRG CONTENT page in Edit mode;

2˅Press address key and key in the new program name;

3˅Press key.
Note: No matter whether the program is altered or not, program annotation is changed into new
program name automatically after program is renamed.

6.7 Copy of the Program

To save the current program to a location:
1˅Select the PRG CONTENT page in Edit mode;

2˅Press address key and key in the new program No

229
 GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual

3˅Press key.

6.8 Program positioning

z To the position where the program stops last time by TO
Search for the point where the program execution stops by TO. Select edit mode to enter
program content page and press conversion key, input TO to search which is displayed at
the left bottom. Then press up or down key, searching and positioning are displayed at this
time, the cursor will move to the position where program stops last time.
Volume Ċ Operation

z Position to specified block by TOˇnum˄num is the block number specified by user. For
example: TO10000 means position to the 10000th block˅
On program content page, locate to specified block by inputing TO block number. Press
conversion key after entering program content page, input TO to search which is displayed
at the left bottom and then press up or down key, the cursor will move to the specified
program.

6.9 Program preview

In non-edit modeˈpress key to enter program preview page. In this page, program
names saved in CNC are displayed in the form of list. Max. 36 program names can be displayed In

one page, if programs saved are over 36, press key to display programs in other
page.

z Program capacity display˖

On top right window, “storage capacity”displays the max. capacity of program which can be
saved in CNC. “Used capacity”displays the capacity of saved program in CNC system.. “Program
230
 Chapter 6 Program Edit And Management

number”displays the program number saved in the CNC system. “Program size”displays the size of
the currently opened program.

z Program preview selection˖

On top left of the window, the name of currently previewed program will be displayed in blue
characters on white ground. Program size on top left window is the size of currently previewed
program. The following window displays currently previewed progam, display 5-line program.
z Usage of cursor key and conversion key˖
When select program in a program list, select the program to be previewed by cursor moving key
on MDI panel. If the size is very big, max. 36 program names can be displayed in program list. Select

Volume Ċ Operation
program by pressing right moving key or pressing conversion key directly, turn pages to display the
program list, and then select it by cursor moving key on MDI panel.
z Open a program˖
In edit, auto, MDI modes, when open the program on program preview window, this
program can be opened by pressing EOB key on MDI panel. At the same time, the name of currently
opened program is displayed on top right page.
z Deletion of program

Move cursor to the program will be deleted, press delete key and then press Y key or N key on
multiple select manue to select wether delete it or not

231
 GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual

CHAPTER 7 AUTO OPERATION

Noteʽ
The keys functions of this 980MDa machine panel are defined by Ladder;
please refer to the respective materials by the machine builder for the function
significance.
Please note that the following function introduction is described based on the

7.1Auto Run
Volume Ċ Operation

7.1.1 Selection of the program to be run

1. Search method
1˅Select the Edit or Auto mode;

2˅Press key to enter the PRG CONTENT page;

3˅Press the address key and key in the program No.

4˅Press or key, the program retrieved will be shown on the screen, if the
program doesn’t exist an alarm will be issued
Note In step 4, if the program to be retrieved does not exist, a new program will be

setup by CNC system after pressing key.

2 Scanning method
1˅Select the Edit or Auto mode

2˅ Press key to enter the PRG display page

3˅Press the address key

4˅Press the or key to display the next or previous program;

5˅Repeat the step 3, 4 above to display the saved program one by one.

232
 Chapter 7 Auto Operation

3 Cursor method
a) Select the Auto mode (must in non-run state)

b) Press key to enter the PRG LIST page;

c) Press . . . key to move the cursor to the

name of the program to be selected;

d) Press key.

Volume Ċ Operation
4. File open method
Select the edit or operation mode:

1˅Press key twice to enter the page of file list.˗

2˅Press ˈ keys to move the cursor to the file will be selected.

3˅Press key to select a file.

4˅Press key to open the selected file.

Note: The file can not be opened if the expanded name is not“.CNC”.

7.1.2 Program start

1. Press key to select the Auto mode

2. Press key to start the program, and the program execution begins
Note Since the program execution begins from the block where the cursor

locates, before pressing the key, make a check whether the cursor is located at
the block to be executed. If begins from the start line, but the cursor is not in this line, move
the cursor to the line.

7.1.3 Stop of the auto run

233
 GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual

Ɣ Stop by command (M00)

the block containing M00 is executed, the auto run is stopped. So the modal function and state

are all reserved. Press the key or the external Run key, the program execution continues.

Ɣ Stop by a relevant key

1 In Auto run, by pressing key or external dwell key, the machine remains at the
following state:
Volume Ċ Operation

˄1˅The machine feed decelerate to stop;

˄2˅During the execution of the dwell command (G04), it pauses after G04 command execution
is finished.

˄3˅The modal function and state are saved;

˄4˅The program execution continues after pressing the key

2 Stop by Reset key

˄1˅All axes movement is stopped.

˄2˅M, S function output is invalid (the automatic cut-off of signals such as spindle CCW/CW,

lubrication, cooling by pressing key can be set by the parameters)

˄3˅Modal function and state is held on after the auto run.

3 Stop by Emergency stop button

If the external emergency button (external emergency signal valid) is pressed under the
dangerous or emergent situation during the machine running, the CNC system enters into
emergency state, and the machine moving is stopped immediately, all the output (such as spindle
rotation, coolant) are cut off. If the Emergency button is released, the alarm is cancelled and CNC
system enters into reset mode.

4 By Mode switching

When the Auto mode is switched to the Machine zero, MPG/Step, the current block
“dwells”immediately; when the Auto mode is switched to the Edit, MDI mode, the “dwell”is not
displayed till the current block is executed.
Note 1 Ensure that the fault has been resolved before cancelling the emergency alarm.

234
 Chapter 7 Auto Operation

Note 2 The electric shock to the device may be decreased by pressing the Emergency
button before power on and off.
Note 3 The Machine zero return operation should be performed again after the emergency
alarm is cancelled to ensure the the coordinate correctness (but this operation is unallowed if
there is no machine zero in the machine)

Note 4 Only the BIT3 (ESP) of the bit parameter No.017 is set to 0, could the external
emergency stop be valid.

7.1.4 Auto run from an arbitrary block

Volume Ċ Operation
1. Press key to enter the Edit mode, press key to enter the Program

interface, or press key several times to select the PRG CONTENT page:

2. Move the cursor to the block to be executed (for example, move the cursor to the 3th line head if
it executes from the 3th line);

3. If the mode ˄G, M, T, F command˅of the current block where the cursor
locates is defaulted and inconsistent with the running mode of this block, the corresponding
modal function should be executed to continue the next step.

4. Press key to enter the Auto mode, then press key to start the program.

235
 GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual

7.1.5 Adjustment of the feedrate override, rapid override

In Auto mode, the running speed can be altered by adjusting the feedrate override, rapid override
with no need to change the settings of the program and parameter.
ƽ Adjustment of the feedrate override
Volume Ċ Operation

Press the or key in , it can realize 16-level real time feedrate

adjustment.

Press the key each time, the feedrate override ascends a gear level till 150%

Press the key each time, the feedrate override decends a gear level till 0;

Note 1 The actual feedrate value is specified by F in program feedrate override

adjustment;
Note 2 Actual feedrate= value specified by F× feedrate override

Ɣ Adjustment of rapid override

It can realize the 4-level real time rapid override FO. 25ˁ. 50ˁ. 100ˁ adjustment by pressing the

or key in .

Press the key each time, the rapid override ascends a level till 100%;

Press the key each time, the rapid override decends a level till F0

Note 1 The max. rapid traverse speeds of X, Y, Z axis are set by bit parameter No.059, No.060,
No.061 respectively;
X axis actual rapid traverse rate = value set by parameter No.059×rapid override

Y axis actual rapid traverse rate = value set by parameter No.060×rapid override

236
 Chapter 7 Auto Operation

Z axis actual rapid traverse rate = value set by parameter No.061×rapid override
Note 2 When the rapid override is F0, the rapid traverse rate is set by bit parameter
No.069.

7.1.6 Spindle override adjustment

While the spindle speed is controlled by the analog voltage output in Auto mode, it can be adjusted
by spindle override.

Volume Ċ Operation
Press the or key in to adjust the spindle override for the spindle speed, it
can realize 8-level real-time override adjustment between 50ˁ̚120ˁ.

Press the key each time, the feedrate override ascends a level till 120%

Press the key each time, the rapid override decends a level till 50%.

Note 1 The actual output analog voltage=analog voltage by parameter×spindle override

Example: When the bit parameter No.101 is set to 9999, No.100 to 645, execute
S9999 command to select the spindle override 70%, the actual output analog voltage§10×70%=7V

7.2 DNC running

This CNC system has a DNC function, by the connection of the DNC communication software
with this system, the high speed, high capacity program can be performed in this system.

In Auto mode, press the key, it enters the DNC mode. Then press the key to
start the program DNC machining under the condition that the PC is get ready
Please refer to the DNC communication software for details.

7.3 Running state

7.3.1 Single block execution
When the program is to be executed for the 1st time, to avoid the programming errors, it may
select Single block mode to execute the program.
In Auto mode, the methods for turning on single are as follows.

237
 GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual

Press the key to make the single block indicator in State area to
light up, it means that the single block function has been selected
In Single block mode, when the current block execution is finished , the CNC system stops;if

next block is to be executed,it needs to press the key.

Note Even at the mid point, the single block stops in G28,G29, G30 commands

7.3.2 Dry run

Volume Ċ Operation

Before the program is to be executed, in order to avoid the programming errors, it may select the Dry
run mode to check the program. And the machine runs by a constant speed other than the speed
specified by the program.
In Auto mode, the method for turning on the Dry run switch are as follows.

Press key to make the dry run indicator in State area to light up, it means that the dry
run function is selected
The speed specified by the program is invalid in Dry run, and actural feedrate is
set by the DATA parameter No.174.

7.3.3 Machine lock

In Auto mode, the ways to make machine lock function valid are as follows.

Press the key to make the machine lock indicator in State area to light up, it
means that it has enterd the machine lock state.
While in the machine lock mode:
1. The machine carriage doesn’t move, the “MACHINE”in the INTEGRATED POS page of the
POSITION interface doesnt’ vary too. The RELATIVE POS and ABSOLUTE POS,
DIST TO GO are refreshed normally
2. M, S, T commands can be executed normally.

7.3.4 MST lock

In Auto mode, the ways to make MST lock function valid are as follows.

Press the key to make the MST lock indicato in State area to light up, it means
that it has entered the MST lock state. And the carriage move is not performed by M, S, T

238
 Chapter7AutoOperation

commands
Note: When the MST lock is valid, it has no effect on the execution of M00, M30, M98,M99.

7.3.5 Block skip

If a block in program is not needed to be executed and not to be deleted, this block skip function
can be used. When the block is headed with “/”sign and Block skip function is valid, this block is
skipped without execution in Auto mode
In Auto mode, the way to make block skip function valid is as follows.

Press the key to make the block skip indicator in State area to light up, it means

Volume Ċ Operation
that the block skip function is valid.
Note While the block skip function is invalid, the blocks headed with
“/”signs are executed normally in Auto mode.

7.3.6 Optional stop

In AUTO mode, the valid optional stop function is as follows:

Press key to enter optional stop and the indicator lights up.

The program will be “stopped” at command M01. Press key again to continue program
execution.

7.4 Memorizing at power-down

7.4.1 Program interruption in non-DNC auto operation

Operation method 1 (Manual)

1. After power on, press conversion key ĺpress letter “T”+letter“O”ĺup, down moving keys on
pages“program content, edit” to the block where the execution stops last time.
2. Switch to the pages “coordinate & program, machine zero”.
3. Enter the next step after machine zero is performed.
4. Switch to manual or MDI mode. Locate to the block where it stops last time. (At this moment,
it is necessary to confirm whether it is at state G40, G49, G54. Ensure that tools are in a safe
range during positioning.)
5. Switch to manual mode, press conversion key. It prompts “Locate to the block where it stops
last time. It will recover the mode before power-down˄Y/N˅”.
6. Press Y to recover the mode before power-down.
7. Switch to auto mode, press cycle start key to execute the block continuously from where it
stops last time.

239
 GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual

Operation method 2 (Auto)

1. After power on, press conversion key ĺpress letter “T”+letter“O”ĺup, down moving keys
on pages“program content, edit” to the block where the execution stops last time.
2. Switch to the pages “coordinate & program, machine zero”.
3. Perform machine zero operation.
4. After machine zero is performed, press conversion key. It prompts at the bottom of the screen:
“Locate to the block automatically where it stops last time. It will recover the mode before
power-down˄Y/N˅”. Input Y (Ensure that tools moving path is in a safe range at this moment.).
Coordinates start move, it locates to the block where it stops last time, and recovers the mode
before power-down.
Volume Ċ Operation

5. Switch to auto mode, press cycle start key to execute the block continuously where it stops
last time.

7.4.2 Interruption at power-down on DNC auto operation

Operation method (Auto)
1. Switch to “coordinate program, machine zero return” after power on.
2. Execute machine zero return.
3. After machine zero return is finished, press conversion key. It prompts at the bottom of the
screen: “Locate to the block automatically where it stops last time. It will recover the mode
before power-down˄Y/N˅”. Input Y (Make sure tools moving path is in a safe range at this
moment.). Coordinates start move, it locates to the block where it stops last time, and
recovers the mode before power-down.
4. Switch to the highlighted block when DNC, CNC power down.
5. Search for the interrupted block in DNC transmission software, then press RESET key on
panel to continue PC software transmission. Press cycle start key to continue execution.

240
 Chapter8 M achineZeroOperat
ion

CHAPTER 8 MACHINE ZERO RETURN OPERATION

8.1 Machine Zero

The machine coordinate system is a basic coordinate system for CNC coordinate calculation.
It is an inherent coordinate system of the machine. The origin of the machine coordinate
system is called machine zero (or mechanical reference point). It is defined by the zero
return switches fixed on the machine. Usually the switch is fixed on the positive max. Strokes of X, Y,
Z axes.

Volume Ċ Operation
8.2Machine Zero Return Steps

1 Press key, it enters the Machine zero mode, the bottom line of the screen page shows
“REF”, the figure is as follows:

2 Press or or key to select the machine zero of X, Y or Z axis

3 The machine moves along the machine zero direction, and returns to the machine zero via the
deceleration signal, zero signal detection. And the axis stops with the machine zero finish indicator
lighting up.

Machine zero finish indicators

Note1˖If the machine zero is not fixed on the machine, machine zero operation
B/C/D is unallowed.
Note2˖While the coordinate is moved out from the machine zero, the machine zero finish
indicators go out.
Note3˖After the machine zero operation, the cancellation of the tool length offset for the

241
 GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual

CNC is set by the BIT7 of the bit parameter No.22

Note4˖See details in the 3rd part INSTALLATION AND CONNECTION for the
parameters concerning with the machine zero.
Note 5: When machine zero return, bit parameter ʋ011 ZNIK determines whether axis
movement is locked automatically.
Note 6: Only machine zero D mode can be used for rotary axis.
Volume Ċ Operation

242
 Chapter 9 Data Setting , Backup And Restore

CHAPTER 9 DATA SETTING, BACKUP and RESTORE

9.1Data Setting
9.1.1 Switch setting
In SWITCH SETTING page, the ON-OFF state of PARM SWT (parameter switch), PROG SWT
(program switch), AUTO SEG (auto sequence No.) can be displayed and set, the figure is as follows:

Volume Ċ Operation
1 Press key to enter the Setting interface, then press or key to enter
SWITCH SETTING page

2 Press or key to move the cursor to the item to be set

3 Press . and . key to shift the ON-OFF state, press or

key, “*”moves to the left to set the switch for OFF, Press or key, “*”moves to
the right to set the switch for ON.
Only the PARM SWT is set to ON, could the parameter be altered; so are PROG SWT and AUTO
SEG

Note 1: When parameter switch is shifted from “off”to“on”for the first time, CNC alarm occurs. Press ,

keys together to eliminate the alarm. Alarm will not occur when parameter switch is shifted
again. For security, set parameter switch to “off” after parameter alteration is finished.
Note 2: When parameter switch is shifted from “off”to“on”, CNC alarm occurs. Alarm will occur again when

parameter switch is shifted from “on”to“off”for the first time. Press , keys together to
eliminate the alarm.

9.1.2 Graphic setting

243
 GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual

Press key to enter graphic interface. Press or key to access the following
graphic parameter page.
Volume Ċ Operation

A˖The way of setting graphic parameter

1. In MDI mode, press or key to move the cursor to the parameter to be set,
2. Input corresponding valus,

3. Press keyˈand the setting is finished.

B˖Significance of graphic parameter
Coordinate selection: Display view angle of the graphic path can be selected by setting different
values. Corresponding coordinate for 0~7is as follows.
Scaling: Display the scaling of current graphic path.
Graphic center: Display the center of each axis.
Maximum, minimum: Set the maximum and minimum scope can be displayed by each axis.

C˖ Graphic track operation

Graphic track is as follows:

244
 Chapter 9 Data Setting , Backup And Restore

Volume Ċ Operation
Vertical move: Display upper and lower part of the graphic.
Horizontal move: Display right and left part of the graphic.
Scaling: Display scaling of current graphic.
Absolute coordinate: Display the absolute coordinate of the program.
S˖Start drawing, S is highlighted by pressing S key. Display drawing track.
T˖Stop drawing, T is highlighted by pressing S key. I t stops drawing.
R˖Clear graphic track, clear graphic track displayed before.
K˖Switch view angle, coordinate value can be switched between 0~7 by pressing K key each
time.
J˖ Display graphic in the center, that is, vertical move and horizontal move are 0.
I˖Scale up the track, the graphic is scaled up 2 fold by pressing I key once.
M˖Scale down the track, the graphic is scaled down 2 fold by pressing M key once.

˖Graphic moving up, down, left ,right.

9.1.3 Parameter setting

By the parameter setting, the characteristics of the drive unit and machine can be adjusted. See
Appendix 1 for their significance

245
 GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual

Press key to enter the Parameter interface, then press or key to switch
the parameter page, the figure is as follows:
Volume Ċ Operation

A Alteration of the bit parameter

1 Byte alteration
1˅ Turn on the parameter switch
2˅ Enter the MDI mode
3˅ Move the cursor to the parameter No. to be set

Method 1: Press or key to enter the page containing the

parameter to be set, press or key to move the cursor to the

No. of the parameter to be set;

Method 2: Press address key , key in parameter No, then press key.
4˅ Key in the new parameter value

5˅ Press key, the parameter value is entered and displayed

6˅ For security , the PARM SWT needs to be set to OFF after all parameters setting is
finished

Example:
Set the BIT5 (DECI) of the bit parameter No.004 to 1, and the other bits unchanged.
Move the cursor to No.004, key in 01100000 by sequence in the prompt line, the figure is as follows:

246
 Chapter 9 Data Setting , Backup And Restore

Volume Ċ Operation
Press key to finish the parameter alteration. The page is as follows:

2 Bit alteration
1˅ Turn on the parameter switch
2˅ Enter the MDI mode
3˅ Move the cursor to the No. of the parameter to be set

Method 1: Press or key to enter the page of the parameter to be set,

press or key to move the cursor to the No. of the parameter to be set

Method 2: Press address key key in parameter No., then press key

4˅ Press and hold key for 2 seconds or press key to skip to a bit of the

parameter, and the bit is backlighted. Press or key to move the cursor to
the bit to be altered, then key in 0 or 1
5˅ After all parameters setting is finished, the PARM SWT needs to be set for OFF for security

247
 GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual

Note: After entering a bit of the parameter, press and hold key for 2 seconds or

press key, it may skip out of the bit and back to the parameter No.

Example:
Set the BIT5 (DECI) of the bit parameter No.004 to 1, and the other bits unchanged Move the

cursor to “No.004” by the steps above, press and hold key for 2 seconds or
Volume Ċ Operation

press key to skip to a bit of the parameter, the figure is as follows:

Move the cursor to “BIT5” by pressing or key, the figure is as follows:

Key in “1” to finish the alteration

248
 Chapter 9 Data Setting , Backup And Restore

Volume Ċ Operation
B Alteration of the data parameter, pitch data
1 Data parameter alteration
1˅ Turn on the parameter switch;
2˅ Enter the MDI mode
3˅ Move the cursor to the No. of the parameter to be set
4˅ Key in the new parameter value

5˅ Press key, the value is entered and displayed

6˅ After all parameters setting is finished, the PARM SWT needs to be set to OFF for
security
Example 1: Set the data parameter ʋ059 to 4000.
Move the cursor to “ʋ059” by the steps above, key in “4000” by sequence in the prompt line, the
figure is as follows:

Press key to finish the alteration. The page is as follows

249
 GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual
Volume Ċ Operation

Example 2: Set the X axis value of the pitch data No.000 to 12, set the value of Z axis to 30
Move the cursor to pitch data No.000 by the steps above, key in “X12” by sequence in the cue line,
the figure is as follows:

Pres key to finish the alteration. The page is as follows:

The same as above, key in “Z30”by sequence in the prompt line, press key to finish the
alteration. The page is as follows:

250
 Chapter 9 Data Setting , Backup And Restore

Volume Ċ Operation
9.2 The Password Setting and Alteration
To prevent the part programs, CNC parameters from malignant alteration, this GSK980MD
provides an authority setting function that is graded for 4 levels. By decending sequence, they
are machine builder (2nd) level, equipment management (3rd ) level, technician (4th ) level,
machining operation (5th) level
The 2nd level: Modification of the CNC bit parameter, data parameter, pitch data, tool offset
data, part program edit, PLC ladder transmission etc. are allowed
The 3rd level: initial password 2345, the CNC bit parameter, data parameter, tool offset data,
part program edit operations are allowed;
The 4th level: initial password 1234, tool offset data (for tool setting), macro variables, part
program edit operations are allowed; but the CNC bit parameter, data parameter, pitch data
operations are unallowed.
The 5th level: no password. Only the machine panel operation is allowed, and the operations of
part program edit and selection, the alteration operations of CNC bit parameter, data parameter,
pitch data, tool offset data are unallowed

After entering the authority setting page, the cursor locates at the “INPUT PASSWORD:”line. It

251
 GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual

may press the or key to move the cursor to the corresponding item.

z Press key once, the cursor shifts a line upward. If the current cursor locates at the “SET

LOWER LEVEL”line (1st line) , press key, the cursor shifts to the “UPDATE PASS:”line
(end line)

z Press key once, the cursor shifts a line upward. If the current cursor locates at the end

line, by pressing key once, the cursor moves to the 1st line.
Volume Ċ Operation

9.2.1 Entry of the operation level

1 After entering the PASSWORD SETTING page, move the cursor to the “INPUT
PASSWORD:”line;
2 Key in the password (an “*”sign added each time inputting a character)

3 Press key to finish the inputting, and it will enter the corresponding password level.
Note The length of this GSK980MD system password corresponds to the operation
level, which can’t be added or decreased by user at will.

Operation Initial
level Password length password
3rd 5 bits 12345

4th 4 bits 1234

5th No No

Example: The current CNC level is t he 4th level, as the following page shows. The 3rd level
password of CNC is 12345, please alter the current level to the 3rd level.

252
 Chapter 9 Data Setting , Backup And Restore

Move the cursor to the “INPUT PASSWORD:”line, key in 12345, then press the key, the
CNC prompts “Modify parameter and edit program”, “Password passed”, and the current level is the
3rd level. The page is as follows:

Volume Ċ Operation
Note: When current operation authority is lower than or equal to the 3rd level (3rd, 4th, 5th
level), the password level is not changed if repower the CNC system. If previous level is
rd
higher than the 3 level (0, 1st, or 2nd level), it defaults the 3rd level.

9.2.2 Alteration of the password

Steps for password alteration:
1 After entering the PASSWORD SETTING page, enter the password by the methods in
Section10.3.2;
2 Move the cursor to the“ALTER PASSWORD:”line;

3 Key in the new password, and press key

4 The CNC system prompts “PLEASE INPUT USER PASSWORD AGAIN”, the page is as
follows:

253
 GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual

5 After reinputting the password, press key, if the two passwords input are identical, CNC
prompts “PASSWORD UPDATED”. So the password alteration is successful.
Volume Ċ Operation

6 If the two passwords input are not identical, CNC prompts “PASSWORD CHECKOUT ERROR.”,
the page is as follows:

9.2.3 Lower level set

The demotion of the operation level is used to enter a lower level from a higher level, the steps
are as follows:
1 After entering the PASSWORD SETTING page, key in the password by the method in
Section 10.3.2
2 Move the cursor to the“SET LOWER LEVEL”line, if the current CNC operation is the 3rd
level, the page is as follows:

254
 Chapter 9 Data Setting , Backup And Restore

Volume Ċ Operation
3 Press key, the CNC prompts “CURRENT LEVEL TO 4, OK ? ”;
the page is as follows:

4 Press key again, if the demotion is successful, the page is as follows:

Note If the current level is the 5th level, the demotion operation is unallowed.

255
 GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual

9.3 Data Restore and Backup

The user data (such as bit parameter and pitch data) can be backup (saved) and restored
(read) in this GSK980MD system. It doesn’t affect the part programs stored in
the CNC system while backuping and restoring these data. The backup page is as follows:

Press key repeatedly, “PASSWORD SETTING” and “DATA BACKUP” pages can be
switched.
Volume Ċ Operation

z Turn on the parameter switch

z Press key to enter the MDI mode, then press key ( or key if
necessary) to enter PASSWORD SETTING page;

z Press , and switch to the Data Backup page.

z Move the cursor to the desired item;

z Press . keys together.

Note Don’t cut off the power in the backup and restore operation of the data, and no
other operation is suggested to be performed before the aforesaid operation is prompted to
be finished.
Example: to restore the CNC parameter to 1ȝ level servo standard parameter, the steps are as
follows:
Turn on the parameter switch, and enter the Backup PAR. page of MDI mode, move the
cursor to “Recover Default PAR. (1ȝ level)”, as the following figure shows:

256
 Chapter 9 Data Setting , Backup And Restore

Volume Ċ Operation
Press keys together, the CNC system prompts “SERVO PAR BACKUP
RECOVERED (POWER ON )”.

257
 GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual

CHAPTER 10 ADVANCE OPERATION

Advance operation interface of GSK980MDa, which is as follows, is started by connecting CNC

to USB. In this interface, communication between CNC & USB and system update operations can be
done. Its transmission speed is much faster than traditional serial communication speed, greatly
increases the efficiency of file transmission. More over, USB is easy to carry, to use and it supports
hot plugging, plug and play at once.
Volume Ċ Operation

10.1 Operation path

USB operation in 980MDa is searching and setting up destination list on U disk with its number.
Therefore, the system with different number is corresponding to different U disk list in advance
operation.
Example: If the number of system A is CT1010MDa, the list of advance operation on U disk is as
follows:

If the number of system B is CT2138MDa, the list of advance operation on U disk is as follows:

258
 Chapter10AdvanceOperation

If the system has no number, the list of advance operation on U disk is as follows:

Note: The number of the system can be found in version information page of diagnosis.
The following contents are described by list of gsk980mda_backup.

¾ Path explanations

Volume Ċ Operation
Path file folder Explanation
Target position for parameter and PLC file
backup and restore
user\
Target position for part program file backup
prog\
and restore

¾ File specification
File name Expended Remark
name
Parameter Para1, Para2, .par Case sensitive
file Para3
Part program O0000 ~ O9999 .CNC Case sensitive
PLC file plc ~ plc7 .ldx Case sensitive

¾ Operation authority
Parameter Authority level 3 (including level
3)
Backup Part program Authority level 3 (including
operation level 3)
Ladder diagram Authority level 3 (including
level 3)
Parameter Authority level 3 (including
level 3)
Restore Part program Authority level 3 (including
operation level 3)
Ladder diagram Authority level 2 (including
level 2)

259
 GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual

Note: Level 2 or above authority is needed for part program operation above number 9000.

10.2 Operation instructions

¾ Key descriptions

Cursor moving˖Press direction keys to move the cursor.

Menu selection: Press key to select the operation item which cursor is in.
Volume Ċ Operation

Menu cancellation: Press key to cancel the operation item which cursor is in.

Operation execution˖Press key to execute all operation items selected in current

column.

Operation confirmation˖Execution needs to be confirmed, please press key to confirm

or press key to cancel the execution.

¾ Parameter restore and backup

Backup the parameter: Copy all parameter states and values to
U:\gsk980MDa_backup\user\ of USB memory unit in the form of file Para1.parˈPara2.parˈ
Para3.par. If the above-mentioned file does not exist, set up a new one: If the file exists, this file
will be overwritten by the new one.
Restore the parameter: Copy parameter files from USB memory unit
U:\gsk980MDa_backup\user\ back to the CNC system to restore the system parameter. Restore
operation cannot be done if the above-mentioned path is moved or altered or irregular file name is
renamed.
Note: Repower the CNC system after parameter load is successful.

¾ Part program restore and backup

Backup the part parameter: Copy all part programs of current system to
U:\gsk980MDa_backup\user\prog\ of USB memory unit in the form of file .CNC. If the
above-mentioned file does not exist, set up a new one: If the file exists, this file will be overwritten
by the new one.
Restore the part program: Copy all part programs from USB memory unit
U:\gsk980MDa_backup\user\prog\ back to the CNC system to restore the part program. Restore
operation cannot be done if the above-mentioned path is moved or altered or irregular file name is
renamed.

260
 Chapter 10 Advance Operation

¾ Ladder diagram (PLC) restore and backup

The ladder diagram backup: Copy all ladder diagrams (.ldx file) of the current system to
U:\gsk980MDa_backup\user\ of USB memory unit. If the above-mentioned file does not exist, set
up a new one: If the file exists, this file will be overwritten by the new one.
Restore the ladder diagram: Copy parameter files from USB memory unit
U:\gsk980MDa_backup\user\ back to the CNC system to restore the ladder diagram. Restore
operation cannot be done if the above-mentioned path is moved or altered or irregular file name is
renamed.
Note: Repower the CNC system after the ladder diagram restore is successful.

10.3 Attentions

Volume Ċ Operation
¾ Notice˖If a file or list on target path has the same name as the one will be copied, it will be
overwritten and replaced by the system automatically. Therefore, to prevent the file or list
from overwriting or replacing, please copy and save it separately.
¾ It forbids doing any other operation in advance operation. Once operation is performed, it can
not be interrupted until it is finished.
¾ If the file to be saved or restored is large, operation time will be long. Please wait.
¾ Pull out USB if abnormal conditions occur, then connect it again.

261
 GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual

CHAPTER 11 FLASH OPERATION

11.1. File list

Press or key to select˷MDI˹or [EDIT] mode, press key to enter˷file list

interface, the page is as follows˖
Volume Ċ Operation

In edit or MDI mode, press key to identify U disk.

If identification is unsuccessful, it prompts: “Fail to connect U disk”. If identification is
successful, the following file list will be displayed.

Special explanation:
The list information of disk CNC is displayed at the page left and list information of disk USB is
displayed at the page right. The display column will not display any information if U disk is not
detected. Character entry box, file attributes information and user operation prompts are displayed at
the bottom of the page.
1. Current list page only display the list information of the currently opened folder.
2. U disk can be identified in edit or MDI mode.

262
 Chapter 11 Flash Operation

3. It not support Chinese complex characters.

4. It not support Chinese long file name, only the first three characters .+“̚1”of this file name
can be displayed.
5. Non-CNC file of C disk and U disk is displayed.

Note: The file nameˈwhich consists of “O”+“4 digits”+“.CNC ”, is considered to be CNC format file.

11.2. Introduction of general file operation function

11.2.1 Open and close file folder

Volume Ċ Operation
Move the cursor to the folder will be opened.

Press key to open the folder. The list which the file locates is displayed in the first line
(long list is scrolling display)

Press key to close the folder and return to the next higher level of the list.

263
 GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual
Volume Ċ Operation

11.2.2 Copy the file by one key(current list in C diskĸĺcurrent list in U disk)

In “edit”mode, select the CNC format file, press key to copy it. See the following figure˖

ķ Select CNC file, press ˗

ĸ After duplication is successful, the cursor moves to the next file in current list. The list on the
other side is refreshed at once.

264
 Chapter 11 Flash Operation

Volume Ċ Operation
Special explanation˖Duplication can not be done under 5-level authority.

11.2.3 CNC file search

In “EDIT”and“AUTO”mode, input target program number in input column, and press

or to search this program.

If program search is successful after input “O5”, the cursor moves to target program. If this
program can not be searched, “the file dose not exist” will be prompted at message column.

265
 GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual
Volume Ċ Operation

11.2.4 Open CNC file

1. In“EDIT”and“AUTO”mode, select the CNC format file when there is no program

execution.

2. Press key to open the file. Current page is switched to˷program content˹page.

Special explanations:
1. The program above number 9000 can not be opened with authority level 3 or under

266
 Chapter 11 Flash Operation

level 3.
2. The program file can not be opened with authority level 5.

Attentions:
1. In “program content”, it is not allowed to do any operation on U disk. These
operations are: setting-up, duplication, rename, deletion, editing, save, etc..
Process and check operations can be done for programs on U disk in
page“program content”.
2. The called subprogram in auto-run should in a same level of list with main
program.
3. Pull out U disk when it is open, system alarm occurs“U disk is not connected”.

Volume Ċ Operation
At this time, plug in U disk again, press key to detect U disk in MDI

mode, or press + keys to clear the alarm.

267
 GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual
Volume Ċ Operation

268
 

VOLUME ċ INSTALLATION

269
 GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual
Volume ċ Installation

270
 Chapter 1 Installation Layout

CHAPTER 1 INSTALLATION LAYOUT

1.1 GSK980MDa Connection

1.1.1 GSK980MDa back cover interface layout

9
9
9
9
9
&1 9
9
&1 &1 &1 &1 &1 ᠟䕂 9
03* 9
=䕈 <䕈 ;䕈 ㄀䕈 㓪ⷕ఼
&1 &1 &1 $;,6= $;,6< $;,6; $;,6 (1&2'(5

Volume ċ Installation
䕧ܹ 䕧ߎ ㄀䕈gЏ䕈 &1 &1
,1387 287387 $;,6g63,1'/( Іষ䗮䆃 ⬉⑤
&203257 32:(56833/<

Fig 1-1 GSK980MDa back cover interface layout

1.1.2 Interface explanation

z Power box: GSK-PB2,for +5V, +24V, +12V, -12V, GND power supply
z CN11: X axis, 15-core DB female socket,for connecting X axis drive unit
z CN12: Y axis, 15-core DB female socket,for connecting Y axis drive unit
z CN13: Z axis, 15-core DB female socket,for connecting Z axis drive unit
z CN14: 4th axisˈ15-core DB female soket,for connecting 4th axis drive unit
z CN21: coder, 15-core DB female socket,for connecting Encoderd
z CN51: inverter, 9-core DB male socket,for connecting pc RS232 interface
z CN15: 5th axis&spindle port, 25-core DB male socket,for connecting inverter & 5th axis
z CN31: handwheel, 26-core 3 line famele socket,for connecting handwheel;
z CN62: ouputˈ44-core 3 lines famele socketˈfor sending the signal of CNC to machine
z CN61:input, 44-core 3 line male socketˈfor sending the signal of machine to CNC

271
 GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual

1.2 GSK980MDa Installation

1.2.1 GSK980MDa external dimensions

1
/
Volume ċ Installation

Fig. 1-2 GSK980MDa external dimensions

1.2.2 Installation conditions of the cabinet

z The dust, cooling liquid and organic resolution should be effectively prevented from entering
the cabinet;
z The designed distance between the CNC back cover and the cabinet should be not less
than 20cm, the inside and outside temperature difference of the cabinet should
be no les than 10ć temperature rises when the cabinet inside temperature rises;
z Fans should be fixed in the cabinet to ventilate it;
z The panel should be installed in a place where the coolant can’t splash;
z The external electrical interference should be taken into consideration in
cabinet design to prevent it from transferring to CNC system.

1.2.3 Protection methods against interference

In order to ensure the CNC stable working, the anti-interference technology such
as space electromagnetic radiation shielding, impact current absorbing, power mixed
wave filtering are employed in CNC design.And the following measures are necessary
during CNC connection:
1. Make CNC far from the interference devices (inverter, AC contactor, static
generator, high-pressure generator and powered sectional devices etc.);
2. To supply the CNC via an isolation transformer , the machine with the CNC

272
 Chapter 1 Installation Layout

should be grounded, the CNC and drive unit should be connected with independent grounding
wires at the grounding point;
3. To supress interference: connect parallel RC circuit at both ends of AC coil (Fig.
1-4), RC circuit should approach to inductive loading as close as possible; reversely
connect parallel freewheeling diode at both ends of DC coil (Fig. 1-5); connect parallel surge
absorber at the ends of AC motor coil (Fig. 1-6);

0V

220V̚

Fig.1-4 +24V Fig.1-5

KM

Surge

Volume ċ Installation
M absorber
3̚

Fig.1-6

4. To employ with twisted shield cable or shield cable for the leadout cable of CNC, the cable
shield tier is grounded by single end at CNC side, signal cable should be as short as possible;
5. In order to decrease the mutual interference between CNC cables or CNC
cables with strong-power cables,the wiring should comply to the following principles:

273
 GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual

Group Cable type Wiring requirement

AC power line Tie up A group cables with a clearance at least

AC coil 10cm from that of B, C groups, or shield A group
A AC contactor cables from electromagnetism

DC coil˄24VDC˅
DC relay˄24VDC˅
Cables between CNC and
strong-power cabinet Tie up B and A group cables separately or
B shield B group cables; and the further B group
Cables between CNC and cables are from that of C group, the better it is
machine
Cables between CNC Tie up C and A group cables separately, or
shield C group cables; and the cable distance
and servo drive unit
between C group and B group is at least
Position feedback cable 10cm with twisted pair cable applied.
C Position encoder cable

MPG cable
Other cables for shield
Volume ċ Installation

274
 Chapter 2 Definition &Connection of Interface Signals

CHAPTER 2 DEFINITION&CONNECTION OF INTERFACE SIGNALS

2.1 Connection to Drive unit

2.1.1 Drive interface definition

1˖CPn+ 9˖ CPn-
2˖DIRn+ 10˖DIRn- Signal Explanation
3˖PCn 11˖GND
4˖+24V 12˖VCC CPn+, CPn- Command pulse signal
5˖ALMn 13˖VCC
6˖SETn 14˖GND DIRn+, DIRn- Command direction sigal
7˖ENn 15˖GND PCn Zero signal
8˖RDYn/ZSDn
ALMn Drive unit alarm signal
ENn Axis enable signal
SETn Pusle disable signal
Fig.2-1 CN11, CN12, CN13
interface˄DB15 female˅

Volume ċ Installation
2.1.2 Command pulse and direction signals
nCP+ˈnCP- are command pulse signals, nDIR+ˈnDIR- are command direction signals. These
two group signals are both difference output˄AM26LS31˅, the interior circuit for them is shown in Fig.
2-2.

2.1.3 Drive unit alarm signal

The low or high level of the drive unit alarm level is set by the CNC bit parameter No.009 BIT0̚
BIT4᧨whose interior circuit is shown in Fig. 2-3:

ALMn

Fig.2-3 interior circuit of drive unit alarm signal

275
 GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual

This input circuit requires that the drive unit transmits signal by the following types in Fig. 2-4:

Type 1: Type 2:

Fig.2-4 Signal types of drive unit

2.1.4 Axis enable signal ENn

nEN signal output is valid as CNC works normally (nEN signal to 0V); when the drive unit alarm
or emergency alarm occurs, CNC cuts off nEN signal output (nEN signal to0V off). The interior
interface circuit is shown in Fig.2-5:
Volume ċ Installation

Fig.2-5 interior interface circuit for axis enable signal

2.1.5 Pulse disable signal SETn

nSET signal is used to control servo input disable which can enhance the anti-disturbance
capability between CNC and drive unit. This signal is at low level if there is pulse output from CNC,
high resistance if not. The interior interface circuit of it is shown in Fig. 2-6:

Fig.2-6 Interior interface circuit for pulse disable signal

2.1.6 Zero signal nPC

The one-rotation or approach switch signal is taken as zero signal for machine zero return. Its
interior connection circuit is shown in Fig.2-7.

276
 Chapter 2 Definition &Connection of Interface Signals

Fig.2-7 Zero signal circuit

Note: nPC signal uses +24V level.

a) The connection for NPN Hall elements taken as both deceleration signal and zero signal is
shown in Fig. 2-8:

Volume ċ Installation
b) The connection for PNP Hall elements taken as both deceleration signal and zero signal is
shown in Fig. 2-9:
+24V

PNP Hall element

DECn

PCn

Fig 2-9 Connection using PNP Hall elements

2.1.7 Connection to drive unit

The connection of GSK 980MDa to GSK drive unit is shown in Fig. 2-10:

277
 GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual

)5-/&C
%0 '$$ FTKXGWPKV
%0%0 UKIPCNKPVGTHCEG

3 3 6 6 $&
8 8 , , /=
/ / * * 0&
66 1 1 2
   0




*6.0'D&1ˈ '$%'$%FTKXGWPKV &3Q
UKIPCNKPVGTHCEG

&
3
Q
Q

3
8
/
6
  




&1ˈ&1  &3Q 

&
3


3
8
/
6
 ',5Q 

6
,
*
1
   ',5Q 

6
,
*
1
 $/0Q 
 ',5Q 

6 '& &
2 *= 2
1


 3&Q 
$
/
0
Q&

$
/
0





9
 ',5Q 


&
=

3
Q


 

6
2
1



06
7
   



5'')
3
*&
'

9



/GVCNUJGNN

**6




=




&
2
0

 

7
3


/GVCNUJGNN /GVCNUJGNN /GVCNUJGNN

'

<FTKXGWPKV *6.0'D &(FTKXGWPKV

UKIPCNKPVGTHCEG
*6.0'D&1

&&''
3
3



UKIPCNKPVGTHCEG
&
3
3


˄&1&1&1
&1&1

,
&'
,

&3Q &3Q

5,

5
 

 &3Q   &3Q 

5
'
,
5

 ',5Q   ',5Q 

9

2
8
7)
5
&(
2
0(

9

5
'
<

 ',5Q   ',5Q 

9

(
1


   

$
/
0)
5
&(
2
0(
5
'
<

   9 

9

9

(
1

 $/0Q 
Volume ċ Installation

 $/0Q 
   
/GVCNUJGNN /GVCNUJGNN /GVCNUJGNN /GVCNUJGNN

Fig.2-10 Connection of 4th axis interface to drive unit

2.2 Connection of 4th axis

2.2.1 4th axis interface definition

Signal Explanation
CP4+, CP4- Command pulse signal
1˖CP4+ 9˖ CP4-
DIR4+, DIR4- Command direction signal
2˖DIR4+ 10˖DIR4-
3˖PC4 11˖GND PC4 Zero signal
4˖+24V 12˖VCC
5˖ALM4 13˖VCC ALM4 Drive alarm signal
6˖SET4 14˖GND EN4 Axis enable signal
7˖EN4 15˖GND
8˖RDY4/ZSD4 SET4 Pulse disable signal

Fig.2-11 Interface CN14˄'%IHPDOH˅

278
 Chapter 2 Definition &Connection of Interface Signals

2.2.2 Connection of 4th axis interface as linear axis

'$%'$%FTKXG
UKIPCNKPVGTHCEG

&
3&



3
8
/
6
  




*6.0'D&1

3


3
8
/
6
6
,
*
1
 

6
,
*
1
 ',5 

$
/

03

$
/
0=
 ',5 


& 6 '&&
2
&

 

1


 




9

*=





2
0

 

/GVCNUJGNN /GVCNUJGNN

'$$ FTKXGWPKV
*6.0'D&1 UKIPCNKPVGTHCEG
&
3&



3
/8
8
6
   0




3


366
/,
6 *
1
 

,
*
1 2
 ',5 
$
/
03
&

$
/=
0
 ',5  &
&6


Volume ċ Installation
  2
1



 




9

'&&
*=2


0


 
5
6
7
3


/GVCNUJGNN
*'
'



*)


6
7
3


/GVCNUJGNN

'
)



'

< FTKXGWPKV FTKXGWPKV

UKIPCNKPVGTHCEG
*6.0'D&1
UKIPCNKPVGTHCEG
&&
33'
,


*6.0'D˄&1
&&''5(5(
33,,'1'1
55<<


&3 &3
5
5
 

 &3   &3 
'
,


 ',5   ',5 

9

9

2
8
7)

&5
2(
0(

 ',5   ',5 
9

   
$
/
0)

&5
2(
0(

   9 

9

9

 $/0   $/0 
   
/GVCNUJGNN /GVCNUJGNN /GVCNUJGNN /GVCNUJGNN
Fig.2-12 Connection of 4th axis interface to drive unit

279
 GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual

2.2.3 Connection of 4th axis interface as rotary axis

'$3URKPFNGFTKXG
*6.0'D&1 WPKV%0KPVGTHCEG

&
3



3
8
/
6
  




&
3


3
8
/
6
6
,
*
1
 

6
,
*
1
 ',5 

$
/
0
&

$
/
0
 ',5 

3



 


 =287





9
&20



 621
  &20
 =287
/GVCNUJGNN /GVCNUJGNN
Fig.2-13 Connection of 4th axis interface to spindle drive unit

2.3 Connection of spindle port

2.3.1 Definition of signal

Volume ċ Installation

CP5+, CP5- Spindle pulse signal

1˖CP5+
2˖DIR5+ 14˖CP5- DIR5+, DIR5- Spindle direction signal
3˖GND 15˖DIR5- ALM5 Spindle alarm signal
4˖ALM5 16˖GND RDY5 Spindle is ready
5˖X5.0 17˖+24V PC5 Spindle zero signal
6˖X5.2 18˖SET5 SVC Output of voltage
7˖RDY5 19˖EN5
SET5 Spindle disable signal
8˖X5.1 20˖Y5.0
EN5 Spindle enable signal
9˖GND 21˖Y5.1
22˖Y5.2 PLC Address,only For
10˖PC5 X5.0~X5.2
23˖Y5.3 these,Lower voltage is valid
11˖+24V
12˖GND 24˖GND Y5.0~Y5.3 PLC address
13˖SVC 25˖GND

Fig.2-14 CN15 Spindle Prot

2.3.2 Spindle zero signal

Except for the PC5 signal, other fixed signals of the spindle interface are the same as that of the
X,Y,Z, 4th axes. the PC5 interface circuit is shown as follows:

280
 Chapter 2 Definition &Connection of Interface Signals

Fig.2-15 Spindle zero signal interface circuit

2.3.3 Linear axis

'$%'$%FTKXG

WPKVUKIPCNKPVGTHCEG

&
3
3


3
83
/
6
  




*6.0'D&1

&


86
/
6
,
*
1
 

6
,
*
1 0 2
 ',5 

$
0&
/


$
/
 ',5 


&
= 6'
3

 

1


 



9

*=




&&
0
2

 

/GVCNUJGNN /GVCNUJGNN

Volume ċ Installation
'$$FTKXGWPKV
*6.0'D&1 UKIPCNKPVGTHCEG
&
3&
3


33 6 6
8
/8
6
6






/,
1
*


 
,$
*
10=1 2

 ',5 
$
03
/
&

 ',5 


&

 
6 '=
2



 
*
& &5
&2
0 3



9


06


7**6

 
/GVCNUJGNN
'')





7
3


/GVCNUJGNN
Fig.2-16 Connection of spindle interface to drive unit

2.3.4 Connected with inverter

The connection of GSK980MDa with convertor is shown in Fig. 2-17:

9

a CN I

 69&

Fig.2-17 Connection of GSK980MDa to inverter

281
 GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual

2.3.5 Connection of spindle interface as rotary axis

'$3 URKPFNGFTKXG
*6.0'D&1 WPKV%0KPVGTHCEG

&
3



3
8
/
6
  




&
3


3
8
/
6
6
,
*
1
 

6
,
*
1
 ',5 

$
/
0
&

$
/
0
 ',5 

3

 



  =287
&20


9
=287



 621
  &20
/GVCNUJGNN /GVCNUJGNN

Fig.2-18 Connection of spindle to DAP03

2.3.6 Connection of spindle interface as “CS” axis

'$3URKPFNGFTKXG
*6.0'D&1 WPKV%0KPVGTHCEG
&
3&
3


33 6 6
/8
8
66 *
 1






/,*

 
,$
10

 ',5 
$
03
/
&

 ',5 

Volume ċ Installation

 
  =287



 621



9

&20


=287
  &20
 69&  9&0'
 69&*1'  9&0'
/GVCNUJGNN  6)5
 659
 67$2
 6(/2 <CFTGUU
 63
 63
 63
 =6/
 $567
 93
 =63
 6$5 ;CFTGUU
 &2,1
 932
/GVCNUJGNN

Fig.2-19 Connection of spindle to DAP03

2.3.7 SVC Signal explanation

The analog spindle interface SVC can output 0~10V voltage, its interior signal circuit is shown in
Fig. 2-20:

282
 Chapter 2 Definition &Connection of Interface Signals

SVC

Fig 2-20 SVC Signal circuit

2.4 Connection to Spindle Encoder

2.4.1 Spindle encoder interface definition

8˖MPA+ 15˖GND Name Explanation

7˖MPA- 14˖GND
6˖MPB+ MPA-/MPA+ Encode A phase pulse
13˖VCC MPB-/MPB+ Encode B phase pulse
5˖MPB- 12˖VCC
4˖MPZ+ 11˖GND MPZ-/MPZ+ Encode Z phase pulse
3˖MPZ- 10˖
2˖ 9˖
1˖

Volume ċ Installation
Fig.2-21 CN21 Encode interface
˄'%PDOHVRFNHW˅

2.4.2 Signal Explanation

MPZ-/MPZ+, MPB-/MPB+, MPA-/MPA+ are the encoder Z, B, A phase differential input signals
respectively, which are received by 26LS32; MPB-/MPB+, MPA-/MPA+ are normal square wave of
phase shift 90°with the maximum signal frequency less than 1MHz; the encoder pulses for
GSK980MDa are set by data parameter No.109, whose range is from 100 to 5000.
Its interior connection circuit is shown in Fig. 2-22:᧤n=A, B, C᧥

MPn

MPn-
AM26LS32

Fig.2-22 Encode signal circuit

2.4.3 Connection of spindle encoder interface

The connection of GSK980MDa to spindle encoder is shown in Fig. 2-23, twisted pair cables are
used to connection.

283
 GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual

'PEQFGVGTOKPCNU

==%%$$

*6.0'D˄&1˅

03=
 03=
 03%
 03%
 03$


9

9
 03$


9

9


OGVCNUJGNN

Fig.2-23 Connection of GSK980MDa to encoder

2.5 Connection to Handwheel

2.5.1 Handwheel interface definition

13˖GND 26˖
12˖GND 25˖ Signal Explanation
11˖GND 24˖ HA+, HA- Handwheel A phase signal
10˖GND 23˖X6.5
Volume ċ Installation

9˖X6.3 22˖X6.4 HB+, HB- Handwheel B phase signal

8˖X6.2 21˖ X6.0~X6.5 PLC adress
7˖ 20˖
6˖X6.1 19˖ +24V
Direct current
5˖X6.0 18˖+24V VCC, GND
4˖HB- 17˖+24V
3˖HB+ 16˖+5V
2˖HA- 15˖+5V
1˖HA+ 14˖+5V

Fig.2-24 CN31 handwheel interface

˄OLQHDB26 male socket˅

2.5.2 Signal explanation

“HA+”, ”HA-“, ”HB+”, ”HB-“ are the input singals of handwheel A and B phases. Its interior
connection circuit is shown in Fig. 2-25:

284
 Chapter 2 Definition &Connection of Interface Signals

R93 470R U55

XHA- TLP181
VCC

4
D47
1N4148

3
XHA+ R94
GND
1K
R96 470R U57
XHB- TLP181
VCC

4
D49
1N4148

3
XHB+ R98
GND
1K

Fig.2-25 Handwheel signal circuit

The connection of GSK980MDa to handwheel is shown in Fig. 2-26˖

*CPFYJGGN *CPFYJGGN


$
$
*6.0'D˄&1˅ *6.0'D˄&1˅


+$ +$

9

 +% %  +$


9

 9  +% %


9
 9  +% %
PWNN


9
 +$  9

Volume ċ Installation
 +%  9
OGVCNUJGNN OGVCNUJGNN PWNN
5KIPNGKPRWV FQWDNGKPRWV
Fig.2-26 Connection of GSK980MDa to handwheel

2.6 Connection of GSK980MDa to PC

2.6.1 Communication interface definition

Signal Explanation
1˖ 6˖ RXD For date reception
2˖RXD 7˖
3˖TXD 8˖ TXD For date transmiting
4˖ 9˖ GND For signal grounding
5˖GND

Fig.2-27 CN51 communication interface

(DB9 female socket)

2.6.2 Communication interface connection

The communication between GSK980MDa and PC can be done via RS232 interface
(GSK980MDa communication software needed), The connection of them is shown in Fig.2-28

285
 GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual

3&56KPVGTHCEG

7
;
'

5
;
';
*6.0'D&1

7*
''
 

*
1
'

1
 5;' 
 
OGVCNUJGNN OGVCNUJGNN
Fig.2-28 Connection of GSK980MDa to PC

The communication of a GSK980MDa to another GSK980MDa can be made via their CN51
interfaces, and the connection of them is shown in Fig.2-29:

7
;
'

57*
;
';
*6.0'D&1 *6.0'D&1

''
 

*
1
'

1
 5;' 
 
OGVCNUJGNN OGVCNUJGNN
Fig.2-29 Communication connection of GSK980MDa to GSK980MDa

2.7 Connection of Power Interface

GSK-PB2 power box is applied in this GSK980MDa, which involves 4 groups of voltage: +5V
˄3A˅, +12V
˄1A˅ , -12V˄0.5A˅, +24V
˄0.5A˅
, and its commom terminal is COM . The connection
˄0V˅
Volume ċ Installation

of GSK-PB2 power box to GSK980MDa CN1 interface has been done for its delivery from factory, and
the user only need to connect it to a 220V AC power in using:
The interface definition of GSK980MDa CN1 is shown below:

 /
9 1
*1'
9 9
*6.3%
*1' 9
9 9
*1'
9 *1'
9
32:(56833/<
&1
)LJ.

286
 Chapter 2 Definition &Connection of Interface Signals

2.8 I/O Interface Definition˖

CN61˖44-core (3-line) male socket

NO. Address NO. Address NO. Address NO. Address

1 X0.0 12 X1.3˄DECZ˅ 23 GND 34 X2.5(DEC5)
2 X0.1 13 X1.4 24 GND 35 X2.6
3 X0.2 14 X1.5 25 36 X2.7
4 X0.3˄DECX˅ 15 X1.6 26 37 X3.0
5 X0.4 16 X1.7 27 38 X3.1
6 X0.5˄ESP˅ 17 28 39 X3.2
7 X0.6 18 29 X2.0 40 X3.3
8 X0.7 19 30 X2.1 41 X3.4
9 X1.0 20 31 X2.2 42 X3.5˄SKIP˅
10 X1.1 21 GND 32 X2.3˄DECY˅ 43 X3.6
11 X1.2 22 GND 33 X2.4˄DEC4˅ 44 X3.7

CN62˖44-core (3-line) female socket

Volume ċ Installation
NO. Address NO. Address NO. Address NO. Address
1 Y0.0 12 Y1.3 23 +24V 34 Y2.5
2 Y0.1 13 Y1.4 24 +24V 35 Y2.6
3 Y0.2 14 Y1.5 25 +24V 36 Y2.7
4 Y0.3 15 Y1.6 26 GND 37 Y3.0
5 Y0.4 16 Y1.7 27 GND 38 Y3.1
6 Y0.5 17 GND 28 GND 39 Y3.2
7 Y0.6 18 GND 29 Y2.0 40 Y3.3
8 Y0.7 19 GND 30 Y2.1 41 Y3.4
9 Y1.0 20 +24V 31 Y2.2 42 Y3.5
10 Y1.1 21 +24V 32 Y2.3 43 Y3.6
11 Y1.2 22 +24V 33 Y2.4 44 Y3.7
Note 1: The I/O function of GSK980MDa drilling and milling CNC is defined by ladder diagram;
Note 2:If output function is valid, the output signal is on to 0V. If output function is invalid, the output signal
is cut off by high impendance;
Note 3: If input function is valid, the input signal is on to 24V. If input function is invalid, the input signal is cut
off with it;
Note 4: The effectiveness of +24V, 0V is equal to GSK980MD power box terminals that have the same name;
Note 5: XDEC, YDEC, ZDEC, DEC4, DEC5, ESP, SKIP are fixed signals that can’t be altered.

2.8.1 Input Signal

Input signal means the signal from machine to CNC, when this signal is on with +24V, the input
is valid; when it is off with +24V, the input is invalid. The contact point of input signal at
machine side should meet the following conditions:

287
 GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual

The capacity of the contact point: DC30V, 16mA above

Leakage current between contact points in open circuit: 1mA below
Voltage drop between contact points in closed circuit: 2V below (current 8.5mA, including cable
voltage drop)
There are two external input types for input signals: one type is input by trigger point switch
whose signals are from keys, stroke switch and contacts of relay at machine side, as is shown in Fig
2-31:

+ 5V CNC
Machin

Fig.2-31

The other type is input by switch with no contacts (transistor), as is shown in Fig. 2-32, 2-33
+24V

CNCջ +5V
Volume ċ Installation

䕧ܹ ֵো

)LJ.&RQQHFWLRQRI131

+24V

CNCջ +5V
䕧ܹ ֵো

Fig.2-33 Connection of PNP

288
 Chapter 2 Definition &Connection of Interface Signals

2.8.2 Output signal

The output signal is used for the machne relay and indicator, if it is on with 0V, the output function
is valid; if it is off with 0V, the output function is invalid. There are total 36 digital volume outputs in
I/O interface that they all have the same structure as is shown in Fig.2-34:
CNC Machine

Fig.2-34 Circuit for digital volume output module

The logic signal OUTx output from the main board is sent to the input terminal of inverter
(ULN2803) via a connector. And there are 2 output types for nOUTx: output with 0V, or high
impedance. Its typical application is shown in follows:
z To drive LED
A serial resistance is needed to limit the current (usually 10mA) that goes through the LED by
using ULN2803 output to drive LED, which is shown in Fig.2-35

CNC Machine

Volume ċ Installation
+24V

ULN2803
ULN2803 output
䕧ߎ

Fig.2-35

z To drive filament indicator

An external preheat resistance is needed to decrease the current impact at power on by using
ULN2803 output to drive filament indicator, and this resistance value should be within a range that the
indicator cann’t light up. It is shown in Fig.2-36:

+24V
CNC
Machine
ULN2803䕧ߎ
ULN2803 output

Fig. 2-36

289
 GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual

z To drive inductive load (relay etc.)

To use ULN2803 output to drive an inductive load, it requires to connect a freewheeling diode
near the coil to protect output circuit and deduce interference. It is shown in Fig.2-37:

+24V
CNC Machine

ULN2803䕧ߎ
ULN2803 output
Relay
㒻⬉఼

Fig.2-37

2.9 Machine Zero

z Relative signal

DECX X axis deceleration signal PCX X axis zero signal

DECY Y axis deceleration signal PCY Y axis zero signal
DECZ Z axis deceleration signal PCZ Z axis zero signal
Volume ċ Installation

DEC4 4th axis deceleration signal PC4 4th axis zero signal
DEC5 5th axis deceleration signal PC5 5th axis zero signal

z CNC diagnosis
0 0 0 DEC5 DEC4 DECZ DECY DECX
Corresponding CN61.34 CN61.33CN61.12CN61.32 CN61.4
pin-out
PLC address X2.5 X2.4 X1.3 X2.3 X0.3

0 0 8 PC5 PC4 PCZ PCY PCX

Corresponding CN15.1 CN14. CN13.3 CN12. CN11.3
pin-out 0 3 3

z Bit parameter
0 0 4 DECI
DECI =1: Deceleration signal is on with 24V for deceleration when machine zero return is
performed
=0: Deceleration signal is off 24V for deceleration when machine zero return is performed

0 0 6 ZM5 ZM4 ZMZ ZMY ZMX

ZMX =1˖X axis machine zero return type C;
=0˖X axis machine zero return type B.
ZMY =1˖Y axis machine zero return type C;

290
 Chapter 2 Definition &Connection of Interface Signals

=0˖Y axis machine zero return type B.

ZMZ =1˖Z axis machine zero return type C;
=0˖Z axis machine zero return type B.
ZM4 =1˖4th axis machine zero return type C;
=0˖4th axis machine zero return type B.
ZM5 =1˖5th axis machine zero return type C;
=0˖5th axis machine zero return type B.

0 0 7 ZC5 ZC4 ZCZ ZCY ZCX

ZCX =1˖The deceleration signal ᧤DECX᧥and one-rotation signal ᧤PCX᧥of X axis are in parallel
connection during machine zero return ( a proximity switch acting as both the
deceleration signal and zero signal );
=0˖The deceleration signal ᧤DECX᧥and one-rotation signal ᧤PCX᧥of X axis are connected

independently during machine zero return᧤the indepent deceleration signal and zero

signal are required᧥.

ZCY =1˖The deceleration signal ᧤DECY᧥and one-rotation signal ᧤PCY᧥of Y axis are in parallel
connection during machine zero return ( a proximity switch acting as both the deceleration
signal and zero signal );

Volume ċ Installation
=0˖The deceleration signal ᧤DECY᧥and one-rotation signal ᧤PCY᧥of Y axis are connected
independently during machine zero return (the indepent deceleration signal and zero
signal are required᧥.

ZCZ =1˖The deceleration signal ᧤DECZ᧥ and one-rotation signal ᧤PCZ᧥of Z axis are in parallel
connection during machine zero return ( a proximity switch acting as both the deceleration
signal and zero signal );
=0˖The deceleration signal᧤DECZ᧥ and one-rotation signal ᧤PCZ᧥of Z axis are connected

independently during machine zero return᧤the indepent deceleration signal and zero

signal are required᧥.

ZC4 =1˖The deceleration signal ᧤DEC4᧥ and one-rotation signal ᧤PC4᧥of 4th axis are in parallel
connection during machine zero return ( a proximity switch acting as both the deceleration
signal and zero signal );
=0˖The deceleration signal᧤DEC4᧥ and one-rotation signal ᧤PC4᧥of 4th axis are connected

independently during machine zero return᧤the indepent deceleration signal and zero

signal are required᧥.

ZC5 =1˖The deceleration signal ᧤DEC5᧥ and one-rotation signal ᧤PC5᧥of 5th axis are in parallel
connection during machine zero return ( an proximity switch acting as both the
deceleration signal and zero signal );
=0˖The deceleration signal᧤DEC5᧥ and one-rotation signal᧤PCZ᧥of 5th axis are connected

291
 GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual

independently during machine zero return᧤the indepent deceleration signal and zero

signal are required᧥.

0 1 1 ZNIK
ZNLK =1˖The direction keys are locked as machine zero return is performed,by pressing the
direction key once,it moves to the machine zero automatically and stops,By pressing the

key at the machine zero return,the motion stops immediately;

=0˖The direction keys are not locked as machine zero return is performed, but the direction
keys should be pressed and held on

0 1 2 ISOT
ISOT =1˖Manual rapid traverse valid prior to machine zero return;
=0˖Manual rapid traverse invalid prior to machine zero return.

0 1 4 ZRS5 ZRS4 ZRSZ ZRSY ZRSX

ZRSZ, ZRSX, ZRSY, ZRS4, ZRS5 =1: To select machine zero return type B, C, which have
machine zero, it needs to detect deceleration and zero signals in machine zero return;
=0: To select machine zero return type A, which has
no machine zero, it does not detect deceleration and zero signals in machine zero return.
Volume ċ Installation

0 2 2 MZR5 MZR4 MZRZ MZRY MZRX

MZRX, MZRZ, MZRY, MZR4, MZR5 =1˖The direction of zero return is negative for X, Z, Y ,4th,5th
axes;
=0˖The direction of zero return is positive for X, Z, Y,4th ,5th axes
z Date parameter
089 Low speed of machine zero return of X axis
090 Low speed of machine zero return of Y axis
091 Low speed of machine zero return of Z axis
092 Low speed of machine zero return of 4th axis
093 Low speed of machine zero return of 5th axis

094 High speed of machine zero return of X axis

095 High speed of machine zero return of Y axis
096 High speed of machine zero return of Z axis
097 High speed of machine zero return of 4th axis
098 High speed of machine zero return of 5th axis

130 X axis machine zero offset (0.001)

131 Y axis machine zero offset (0.001)
132 Z axis machine zero offset (0.001)
133 The 4th axis machine zero offset (0.001)
134 The 5th axis machine zero offset (0.001)

292
 Chapter 2 Definition &Connection of Interface Signals

145 st
X machine coordinate of the 1 reference point (0.001mm)
146 st
Y machine coordinate of the 1 reference point (0.001mm)
147 st
Z machine coordinate of 1 reference point (0.001mm)
148 st
4th machine coordinate of the 1 reference point (0.001mm)
149 st
5th machine coordinate of the 1 reference point (0.001mm)

150 nd
X machine coordinate of the 2 reference point (0.001mm)
151 nd
Y machine coordinate of the 2 reference point (0.001mm)
152 nd
Z machine coordinate of the 2 reference point (0.001mm)
153 nd
4th machine coordinate of the 2 reference point (0.001mm)
154 nd
5th machine coordinate of the 2 reference point (0.001mm)

155 X machine coordinate of the 3rd reference point (0.001mm)

156 Y machine coordinate of the 3rd reference point (0.001mm)
157 Z machine coordinate of the 3rd reference point (0.001mm)
158 4th machine coordinate of the 3rd reference point (0.001mm)
159 5th machine coordinate of the 3rd reference point (0.001mm)

Volume ċ Installation
160 X machine coordinate of the 4th reference point (0.001mm)
161 Y machine coordinate of the 4th reference point (0.001mm)
162 Z machine coordinate of the 4th reference point (0.001mm)
163 4th machine coordinate of the 4th reference point (0.001mm)
164 5th machine coordinate of the 4th reference point (0.001mm)

z Signal connection
The interior wiring circuit of deceleration signal is shown in Fig.2-37

Machine CNC
CNCջ

DECn
*DECn

Fig.2-37

z achine zero return type B by regarding servo motor one-rotation signal as zero signal
ķIts sketch map is shown in follows:

293
 GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual

ĸ The circuit of deceleration signal (for three axes)

Volume ċ Installation

Fig.2-40

Ĺ Action time sequence of machine zero return

When ZMn(n is X,Y,Z,4th,5th axis) of the bit parameter No.006, ZCn(n=X, Y, Z, 4th, 5th) of bit
parameter No.007 and the BIT5˄DECI˅of the bit parameter No.004 are all set to 0, the deceleration
signal low level is valid. The action time sequence of machine zero return is shown in follows

Fig.2-41

294
 Chapter 2 Definition &Connection of Interface Signals

ĺMachine zero return process

A˖Select machine zero return mode, press the manual positive or negative feed
key(machine zero return direction i s set by bit parameter No.022), the corresponding
axis moves to the machine zero by a rapid traverse speed. As the axis press down the
deceleration switch to cut off deceleration signal, the feed slows down immediately, and it
continues to run in a fixed low speed.
B᧶When the deceleration switch is released, the deceleration signal contact point is closed
again. And CNC begins to detect the encoder one-rotation signal, if the signal level
changes, the motion will be stoped. And the corresponding zero indicator on
the operator panel lights up for machine zero return completion

z Machine zero return type B as an proximity switch is taken as both deceleration and zero
signals
ķ Its sketch map is shown in follows:

Volume ċ Installation
Fig.2-42

ĸ Wiring of the deceleration signal

See details in Section 2.1.6 of this chapter
Ĺ Action time sequence of machine zero return
When ZMn (n is X,Y,Z,4th ,5th axis )of the bit parameter No.006 and the BIT5˄DECI˅of the bit
th th
parameter No.004 are all set to 0, ZCn (n is X,Y,Z,4 ,5 axis )of the bit parameter No.007 is set to 1,
the deceleration signal low level is valid . The action time sequence of zero return is shown in
follows:

295
 GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual

nDEC /n PC

Fig.2-43 the action time sequence of zero return

ĺ Machine zero returns process

A˖Select the Machine Zero mode, press manual positive or negative (zero return
direction set by bit parameter No.183) feed key, the corresponding axis will move to the zero at a
traverse speed.
B˖As the approach switch touches the tongue for the first time, the deceleration signal is valid
and it slows down immediately to run in a low speed.
C˖As the approach switch detaches the tongue, the deceleration signal is invalid, it moves at a
fixed low speed after deceleration and starts to detect zero signal (PC).
D˖As the approach switch touches the tongue for the second time, the zero
signal is valid and the movement stops. The indicator for zero return on the panel lights up.
Volume ċ Installation

z Machine zero return type C as servo motor one-rotation signal taken as zero signal
ķ Its sketch map is shown below:

ĸ Circuit of the deceleration signal

9


'(&;
System
'(&<


'(&=
&RQWUROXQLW

Fig.2-45


296
 Chapter 2 Definition &Connection of Interface Signals

Ĺ Action time sequence of machine zero return

th th
When ZMn (n is X,Y,Z,4 ,5 axis) of the bit parameter No.006 are all set for 1, ZCn (n is
X,Y,Z,4th ,5th axis)of the bit parameter No.007 are all set for 0, the BIT5˄DECI˅of the bit parameter
No.004 is set for 0, and the deceleration signal low level is valid. The action time sequence of
machine zero return is shown in follows

Q'(&

Q3&
Y ᓔྟ‫ޣ‬䗳

催䗳ಲ䳊
ᓔྟ䖨৥
ಲ䳊ᅠ៤

Ԣ䗳ಲ䳊 W

ᓔྟẔ⌟
䳊⚍ֵো

Fig.2-46

Volume ċ Installation
ĺ Machine zero returns process
A᧶Select the Machine Zero mode, press manual positive or negative (zero
return direction set by bit parameter ʋ022) feed key, the corresponding axis will move
to the machine zero at a traverse speed. Then it touches the tongue and presses
down the deceleration switch, and moves forward. When the tongue detaches
the deceleration switch, the axis slows down to zero, then moves reversely
and accelerates to a fixed low speed for continuous moving
B˖As the tongue touches the deceleration switch for the second time, it moves on till the
tongue detaches the deceleration switch. And it begins to detect the zero signals. If the
zero signal level changes, the movement stops. Then zero return indicator of the
corresponding axis on the panel lights up and machine zero operation is finished.

z Machine zero return type C as an proximity switch is taken as both deceleration and zero
signals

ķ Its sketch map is shown below:

297
 GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual

Fig.2-47

ĸ Circuit of the deceleration signal

See details in Section 2.1.6 of this chapter

Ĺ Action time sequence of machine zero return

th th th th
When ZMn (n is X,Y,Z,4 ,5 axis) of the bit parameter No.006 and ZCn (n is X,Y,Z,4 ,5 axis)of
the bit parameter No.007 are all set to 1, the BIT5˄DECI˅of the bit parameter No.004 is set to 0, the
deceleration signal low level is valid. The action time sequence of machine zero return is shown in
follows:
Volume ċ Installation

Fig.2-48
ĺ Machine zero returns process
A˖Select the Machine Zero mode, press manual positive or negative (zero
return direction is set by bit parameter No.183) feed key, the corresponding axis will
move to the machine zero at a traverse speed. Then it touches the tongue and
presses down the deceleration switch, and moves forward. When the tongue
detaches the deceleration switch, the axis slows down to zero speed, then moves
reversely and accelerates to a fixed low speed for continuous moving
B˖As the tongue touches the deceleration switch for the second time, it begins to detect the
zero signal. It moves on till the tongue detaches the deceleration switch, the movement
stops immediately. Then zero return indicator of the corresponding axis on the
panel lights up and machine zero return operation is finished.

298
 Chapter 3 Parameter

CHAPTER 3 PARAMETER
In this chapter the CNC bit and data parameters are introduced. Various functions can be set by
these parameters.

3.1 Parameter Description (by sequence)

3.1.1 Bit parameter

The expression of bit parameter is shown in follows˖

Parameter BIT7 BIT6 BIT5 BIT1 BIT0

BIT4 BIT3 BIT2
NO.

0 0 1 *** *** *** ACS HWL *** *** ***

ACS =1: Analog voltage control of spindle speed;
=0: Switching control of spindle speed.
HWL =1: MPG mode;
=0: Step mode.

Volume ċ Installation
0 0 2 *** *** *** LIFJ MDITL LIFC NRC TLIF
LIFJ =1: Tool life management group skip valid;
=0: Tool life management group skip invalid.
MDITL =1: Tool life management valid in MDI mode;
=0: Tool life management invalid in MDI mode.
LIFC =1: Tool life counting type 2, by times;
=0: Tool life counting type 1, by times.
NRC =1: Tool nose radius compensation valid;
=0: Tool nose radius compensation invalid.
TLIF =1: Tool life management valid;
=0: Tool life management invalid.

0 0 3 *** *** PCOM *** *** *** D/R ***

P
PCOMP =1: Screw-pitch error compensation valid;
=0: Screw-pitch error compensation invalid.
D/R =1: Tool offset D is diameter value;
=0: Tool offset D is radius value.

0 0 4 *** RDRN DECI *** PROD *** *** SCW

RDRN =1˖In G00 dry run mode, speed=feedrate × speed of dry run;
=0˖G00 speed = rapid override × rapid tranverse speed.
DECI =1˖Deceleration signal high level for machine zero return;
=0˖Deceleration signal low level for machine zero return.

299
 GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual

PROD =1˖Relative coordinate displayed in POSITION page is programming position;

=0˖Relative coordinate displayed in POSITION page involving tool compensation.
SCW =1˖Inch output(inch system)valid after repower;
=0˖Metric output(metric system)valid after repower
The functions of metric and inch system
There are two kinds of input and output units for CNC numerical control system: metric unit,
millimeter (mm) and English unit (inch).
Output increement unit is set by Bit0˄SCW˅of bit parameter ʋ004 in GSK980MDa system.
SCW=0 indicates that minimum command increment, parameter and screw–pitch values are in metric
units; SCW=1 indicates that minimum command increment, parameter and screw–pitch values are in
inches units. The setting of this parameter depends on machine tool.
G code: By selecting G20/G21 code, it is able to set whether minimum input increment values
are in inch or in metric. Executing G21 indicates that minimum input increment values are in metric;
and executing G20 indicates that values are in inch,

0 0 5 *** *** SMAL M30 *** *** PPD PCMD

SMAL =1˖Spindle manual gear shift for S command;
=0˖Spindle auto gear shift for S command.
M30 =1˖Cursor returns to beginning after M30 execution;
=0˖Cursor not to beginning after M30 execution.
PPD =1˖Relative coordinate set by G92;
Volume ċ Installation

=0˖Relative coordinate not set by G92.

PCMD =1˖Axial output wave form is pulse;
=0˖Axial output wave form is square.

Square outputˈmax. output frequency 266KPPS

Pulse outputˈmax. output frequency 266KPPSˈ

Pulse width 1­s.

0 0 6 *** *** *** ZM5 ZM4 ZMZ ZMY ZMX

ZM5 =1˖5th zero return type C;
=0˖5th zero return type B.
ZM4 =1˖4th zero return type C;
=0˖4th zero return type B.
ZMZ =1˖Z zero return type C;
=0˖Z zero return type B.
ZMY =1˖Y zero return type C;
=0˖Y zero return type B.
ZMX =1˖X zero return type C;
=0˖X zero return type B.

300
 Chapter 3 Parameter

0 0 7 AVGL *** SMZ ZC5 ZC4 ZCZ ZCY ZCX

On the condition that blocks smoothing transition is valid, more smooth velocity link and
better machining quality will be obtained during the path transition from line to line or from line to
arc by properly changing the linear feedrate.
So the actual output speed may be different to the programming speed when using this
function. And it may also differ as regard to the linear segment with the same programming speed.
The deviation is not more than 15mm/min between the actual output speed and the programming
speed on the condition that the programming speed F is less than 1200mm/min

AVGL =1˖When SMZ=0 linear smoothing is valid,i.e. smoothing transition function is valid;
=0˖Linear smoothing transition function is invalid.

SMZ =1˖To execute next block till all moving blocks executed;
=0˖For smooth transition between blocks.

ZC5 =1˖Deceleration signal (DEC5)and one-rotation signal (PC5) of 5th axis are in parallel
connection(a proximity switch taken as both deceleration signal and zero signal) during
machine zero return;
=0˖Deceleration signal (DEC5) and one-rotation signal (PC5) of 5th axis are connected
independently (independent deceleration signal and zero signal are required) during
machine zero return.

Volume ċ Installation
ZC4 =1˖Deceleration signal (DEC4)and one-rotation signal (PC4) of 4th axis are in parallel
connection (a proximity switch taken as both deceleration signal and zero signal) during
machine zero return;
=0˖Deceleration signal (DEC4) and one-rotation signal (PC4) of 4th axis are connected
independently (independent deceleration signal and zero signal are required) during
machine zero return.

ZCZ =1˖Deceleration signal (DECZ) and one-rotation signal (PCZ) of Z axis are in parallel
connection a proximity switch taken as both deceleration signal and zero signal) during
machine zero return;
=0˖Deceleration signal (DECZ) and one-rotation signal (PCZ) of Z axis are connected
independently (independent deceleration signal and zero signal are required) during
machine zero return.

ZCY =1˖Deceleration signal (DECY) and one-rotation signal (PCY) of Y axis are in parallel
connection a proximity switch taken as both deceleration signal and zero signal) during
machine zero return;
=0˖Deceleration signal (DECY) and one-rotation signal (PCY) of Y axis are connected
independently (independent deceleration signal and zero signal are required) during
machine zero return.

ZCX =1˖Deceleration signal (DECX)and one-rotation signal (PCX) of X axis are in parallel
connection a proximity switch taken as both deceleration signal and zero signal) during

301
 GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual

machine zero return;

=0˖Deceleration signal (DECX) and one-rotation signal (PCX) of X axis are connected
independently (independent deceleration signal and zero signal are required) during
machine zero return.

0 0 8 DISP *** *** DIR5 DIR4 DIRZ DIRY DIRX

DISP =1˖Enter absolute page after power on;
=0˖Enter relative page after power on.
DIR5 =1˖Direction signal (DIR)is high level as 5th axis moves positively;
=0˖Direction signal (DIR)is low level as 5th axis moves negatively.
DIR4 =1˖Direction signal (DIR)is high level as 4th axis moves positively;
=0˖Direction signal (DIR)is low level as 4th axis moves negatively.
DIRZ =1˖Direction signal (DIR)is high level as Z axis moves positively;
=0˖Direction signal (DIR)is low level as Z axis moves negatively.
DIRY =1˖Direction signal (DIR)is high level as Y axis moves positively;
=0˖Direction signal (DIR)is low level as Y axis moves negatively.
DIRX =1˖Direction signal (DIR)is high level as X axis moves positively;
=0˖Direction signal (DIR)is low level as X axis moves negatively.

0 0 9 *** *** *** ALM5 ALM4 ALMZ ALMY ALMX

Volume ċ Installation

ALM5 =1˖5th axis low level alarm signal (ALM5);

=0˖5th axis high level alarm signal (ALM5).
ALM4 =1˖4th axis low level alarm signal (ALM4);
=0˖4th axis high level alarm signal (ALM4).
ALMZ =1˖Z axis low level alarm signal (ALMZ);
=0˖Z axis high level alarm signal (ALMZ).
ALMY =1˖Y axis low level alarm signal (ALMY);
=0˖Y axis high level alarm signal (ALMY).
ALMX =1˖X axis low level alarm signal (ALMX);
=0˖X axis high level alarm signal (ALMX).

0 1 0 CPF7 CPF6 CPF5 CPF4 CPF3 CPF2 CPF1 CPF0

CPF0̚CPF7˖ Setting values of backlash compensation pulse frequency.
Set frequency =˄27×CPF7+26×CPF6+25×CPF5+24×CPF4+23×CPF3+22×CPF2+21×CPF1+CPF0˅
Kpps

0 1 1 BDEC BD8 *** *** *** ZNIK *** ***

BDEC =1˖Backlash compensation type B, the compensation data are output by ascending type
and the set frequency is invalid.;
=0˖Backlash compensation type A, the compensation data are output by the set frequency (by
bit parameter No.010) or 1/8 of it.
BD8 =1˖Backlash compensation is done by the 1/8 of the set frequency;
=0˖Backlash compensation is done by the set frequency.

302
 Chapter 3 Parameter

ZNIK =1˖Direction keys locked during zero return, homing continues to end by pressing direction
key once;
=0˖Direction keys unlocked but should be held on during zero return.

0 1 2 *** *** *** TMANL *** *** EBCL ISOT

TMANL =1˖Manual tool change for T code;
=0˖Auto tool change for T code.
EBCL =1˖Program end sign EOB displays “;”(semicolon);
=0˖Program end sign EOB displays “*”(asterisk).
ISOT =1˖Prior to machine zero return after power on, manual rapid traverse valid;
=0˖Prior to machine zero return after power on, manual rapid traverse invalid.

0 1 3 SCRD G01 RSCD *** *** *** SKPI G31P

SCRD =1˖Coordinate system holding on at power down;
=0˖Coordinate system not holding on at power down, G54 coordinate system is set after
power on.
G01 =1˖G01 status when power on;
=0˖G00 status when power on.
RSCD =1˖G54 coordinate system when reset 4;

Volume ċ Installation
=0˖Coordinate system not changed when reset.
SKPI =1˖High level valid for skip signal;
=0˖Low level valid for skip signal.
G31P =1˖G31 immediately stops when skip signal is valid;
=0˖G31 slows down to stop when skip signal is valid.

0 1 4 *** *** *** ZRS5 ZRS4 ZRSZ ZRSY ZRSX

th
ZRS5 =1: There are machine zero point in 5 axis, it detects deceleration signal and zero signal
when performing machine zero return;
=0: There are no machine zero point in 5th axis, it returns to machine zero without detecting
deceleration signal and zero signal when performing machine zero return.

ZRS4 =1: There are machine zero point in 4th axis, it detects deceleration signal and zero signal
when performing machine zero return;
=0: There are no machine zero point in 4th axis, it returns to machine zero without detecting
deceleration signal and zero signal when performing machine zero return.

ZRSZ =1: There are machine zero point in Z axis, it detects deceleration signal and zero signal
when performing machine zero return;
=0: There are no machine zero point in Z axis, it returns to machine zero without detecting
deceleration signal and zero signal when performing machine zero return.

ZRSY =1: There are machine zero point in Y axis, it detects deceleration signal and zero signal
when performing machine zero return;

303
 GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual

=0: There are no machine zero point in Y axis, it returns to machine zero without detecting
deceleration signal and zero signal when performing machine zero return.

ZRSX =1: There are machine zero point in X axis, it detects deceleration signal and zero signal
when performing machine zero return;
=0: There are no machine zero point in X axis, it returns to machine zero without detecting
deceleration signal and zero signal when performing machine zero return.

0 1 5 LPTK RPTK NAT BRCH *** *** *** ***

LPTK =1˖Hole locating is done by cutting feed on line continuous drilling;

=0˖Hole locating is done by rapid feed on line continuous drilling;
RPTH =1: Hole locating is cutting path in circle and rectangle continuous drilling;
=0˖Hole locating is rapid path in circle and rectangle continuous drilling;
NAT =1 Define the range of user macro program asin, atan;
=0˖Not define the range of user macro program asin, atan;
BRCH =1˖Plane returning is selected by G98 and G99 in continous drilling;
=0˖Plane returning is selected by G99 in continous drilling

0 1 7 *** MST MSP MOT MESP *** *** ***

MST =1˖External cycle start signal (ST) invalidˈ
Volume ċ Installation

=0˖External cycle start signal (ST) valid.

MSP =1˖External stop signal (SP) invalidˈ
=0˖External stop signal (SP) valid with external stop switch connected, otherwise CNC shows
“stop” .
MOT =1˖Not detect software stroke limit;
=0˖Detect software stroke limit.
MESP =1˖Emergency stop invalid;
=0˖Emergency stop valid.

0 1 8 *** *** *** ESCD *** *** *** ***

ESCD =1˖S code off at emergency stop;
=0˖S code not off at emergency stop.

0 1 9 KEY1 *** *** HNG5 HNG4 HNGZ HNGY HNGX

KEY1 =1˖Prog. switch ON after power on;
=0˖Prog. switch OFF after power on.
HNG5 =1˖5th MPG:ccw:+,cw:-;
=0˖5th MPG:ccw:-,cw:+.
HNG4 =1˖4th MPG:ccw:+,cw:-;
=0˖4th MPG:ccw:-,cw:+.
HNGZ =1˖Z MPG:ccw:+,cw:-;
=0˖Z MPG:ccw:-,cw:+.

304
 Chapter 3 Parameter

HNGY =1˖Y MPG:ccw:+,cw:-;

=0˖Y MPG:ccw:-,cw:+.
HNGX =1˖X MPG:ccw:+,cw:-;
=0˖X MPG:ccw:-,cw:+.

0 2 0 SPFD SAR THDA VAL5 VAL4 VALZ VALY VALX

SPFD =1˖Cutting feed stops if spindle stops;
=0˖Cutting feed not stop after spindle stop.
SAR =1˖Detect spindle SAR signal prior to cutting;
=0˖Not detect spindle SAR signal prior to cutting.
THDA =1˖Thread machining adopts exponential acceleration and deceleration;
=0˖Thread machining adopts linear acceleration and deceleration.
VAL5 =1˖For 5th axis move key,Ĺ is positiveˈĻis negative;
=0˖For 5th axis move key, Ļis positiveˈĹis negative.
VAL4 =1˖For 4th axis move key,Ĺ is positiveˈĻis negative;
=0˖For 4th axis move key, Ļis positiveˈĹis negative.
VALZ =1˖For Z axis move key,Ĺ is positiveˈĻis negative;
=0˖For Z axis move key, Ļis positiveˈĹis negative.
VALY =1˖For Y axis move key,Ĺ is positiveˈĻis negative;
=0˖For Y axis move key, Ļis positiveˈĹis negative.

Volume ċ Installation
VALX =1˖For X axis move key, ĺis positiveˈĸis negative;
=0˖For X axis move key, ĸis positiveˈĺis negative
0 2 2 CALH SOT *** MZR5 MZR4 MZRZ MZRY MZRX
CALH =1˖Length offset not cancelled in reference point return;
=0˖Length offset cancelled in reference point return.
SOT =1˖Software limit is valid after zero return at power on;
=0˖Software limit is valid once power on.
MZR5 =1˖Machine zero return in negative 5th axis;
=0˖Machine zero return in positive 5th axis.
MZR4 =1˖Machine zero return in negative 4th axis;
=0˖Machine zero return in positive 4th axis.
MZRZ =1˖Machine zero return in negative Z axis;
=0˖Machine zero return in positive Z axis.
MZRY =1˖Machine zero return in negative Y axis;
=0˖Machine zero return in positive Y axis.
MZRX =1˖Machine zero return in positive X axis;
=0˖Machine zero return in negative X axis.

0 2 5 RTORI *** RTPCP *** *** RTCRG *** ***

RTORI=1˖Spindle performs zero return when M29 is executed;

=0˖Spindle does not perform zero return when M29 is executed.

305
 GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual

RTPCP=1˖Rigid tapping is the high-speed deep hole cycle(G73 mode);

=0˖Rigid tapping is the high-speed deep hole cycle (G83 mode).
RTCRG=1˖Do not wait for G61.0 to be 1 as excuting next program block after rigid tapping cancelled;
=0˖Do wait for G61.0 to be 1 as excuting next program block after rigid tapping cancelled.

0 2 6 A4IS1 A4IS0 *** RCS4 *** *** ROS4 ROT4

RCS4 =1˖4th Cs function is valid(power on);

=0˖4th Cs function is invalid(power on).
Note: Only when the rotary axis function is valid (ROT4=1), can the RCS4 be set valid.
ROS4, ROT4˖Set the type of 4th;
Linear Rotary A Rotary B invalid
ROT4 0 1 1 0
ROS4 0 0 1 1

A4IS1, A4IS0:Selecte increment system of 4th.

A4IS1 A4IS0 Increment System of 4TH

0 0 Same to the X, Y, Z
0 1 IS-A
Volume ċ Installation

1 0 IS-B
1 1 IS-C

0 2 7 *** RRT4 *** *** *** RRL4 RAB4 ROA4

RRT4 =1˖Zero mode D is used on 4th rotary axis (power on);

=0˖Zero mode A,B,C are used on 4th rotary axis (power on).
RRL4 =1˖4th rel.coor.cycle func.is valid (power on);
=0˖4th rel.coor.cycle func.is invalid(power on).
RAB4 =1˖4th rotates according to symbol direction;
=0˖4th rotates according to nearby rotation.
ROA4 =1˖4th abs.coor.cycle func.is valid (power on);
=0˖4th abs.coor.cycle func.is invalid(power on).
Note 1: Parameter ROA4 is valid for only rotary axis (ROT4=1),
Note 2: Only parameter ROA4 =1, is RAB4 valid
Note 3: Only parameter ROA4 =1, is RRL4 valid

0 2 8 A5IS1 A5IS0 *** RCS5 *** *** ROS5 ROT5

RCS5 =1˖5th Cs function is valid(power on);

=0˖5th Cs function is invalid(power on).
Note: Only rotary axis function is valid (ROT5=1), is RCS5 valid.

ROS5, ROT5˖Set the type of 5th;

306
 Chapter 3 Parameter

Linear Rotary A Rotary B invalid

ROT5 0 1 1 0
ROS5 0 0 1 1

A5IS1, A5IS0: Selecte increment system of 5th..

A5IS1 A5IS0 Increment System of 5TH

0 0 Same to the X, Y, Z
0 1 IS-A
1 0 IS-B
1 1 IS-C

0 2 9 *** RRT5 *** *** *** RRL5 RAB5 ROA5

RRT5 =1˖Zero mode D is used on 5th rotary axis (power on);

=0˖Zero mode A,B,C are used on 5th rotary axis (power on).
RRL5 =1˖5th rel.coor.cycle func.is valid (power on);
=0˖5th rel.coor.cycle func.is invalid(power on).
RAB5 =1˖5th rotates according to symbol direction;
=0˖5th rotates according to nearby rotation.

Volume ċ Installation
ROA5 =1˖5th abs.coor.cycle func.is valid (power on);
=0˖5th abs.coor.cycle func.is invalid(power on).

Note1: ROA5 is valid to only rotary axis (ROT5=1);

Note2: Only when parameter ROA4 =1, is RAB4 valid;
Note3: Only when parameter ROA4 =1, is RRL4 valid;

0 3 8 ISC *** *** *** *** *** *** ***

ISC =1˖Minimum increment system is IS-C(need restart);

=0˖Minimum increment system is IS-B(do not need restart).

0 3 9 *** *** *** ABP5 ABP4 ABPZ ABPY ABPX

ABPx =1˖Output axis pulse by two right-angle intersection phases(need restart);

=0˖Output axis pulse by pulse and direction (do not need restart).

0 4 0 *** *** *** *** *** L2 L1 L0

L2, L1, L0˖Interface language selection:

307
 GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual

Language L2 L1 L0
Chinese 0 0 0
English 0 0 1
Frence 0 1 0
Spanish 0 1 1
Germen 1 0 0
Italian 1 0 1
Russian 1 1 0
Korean 1 1 1

3.1.2 Data parameter

0 4 9 CMRX˖X axis multiplier coefficient

0 5 0 CMRY˖Y axis multiplier coefficient
0 5 1 CMRZ˖Z axis multiplier coefficient
0 5 2 CMR4˖4th axis multiplier coefficient
0 5 3 CMR5˖5th axis multiplier coefficient
Setting range˖ 1̚32767
Volume ċ Installation

0 5 4 CMDX˖X axis frequency division coefficient

0 5 5 CMDY˖Y axis frequency division coefficient
0 5 6 CMDZ˖Z axis frequency division coefficient
0 5 7 CMD4˖4th axis frequency division coefficient
0 5 8 CMD5˖5th axis frequency division coefficient
Setting range˖ 1̚32767

setting range˖ 1̚32767

S u 360 Z M
u
D u L ZD
CMR
Electronic gear ratio formula˖ CMD
S˖min. command output unit ZM˖belt wheel teeth of lead screw
Į: motor rotation angle for a pulse ZD˖Wheel teeth of motor belt
L˖Screw lead

0 5 9 X axis max. rapid traverse speed

0 6 0 Y axis max. rapid traverse speed
0 6 1 Z axis max. rapid traverse speed
0 6 2 4th axis max. rapid traverse speed
0 6 3 5th axis max. rapid traverse speed
Setting range˖10̚99999999˄Unit˖mm/min˅

308
 Chapter 3 Parameter

0 6 4 Acceleration&deceleration time constant of X axis rapid traverse

(ms)
0 6 5 Acceleration&deceleration time constant of Y axis rapid traverse
(ms)
0 6 6 Acceleration&deceleration time constant of Z axis rapid traverse
(ms)
0 6 7 Acceleration&deceleration time constant of 4th axis rapid traverse
(ms)
0 6 8 Acceleration&deceleration time constant of 5th axis rapid traverse
(ms)
Setting range˖10̚4000˄Unit˖ms˅

0 6 9 Rapid traverse speed when rapid override is F0

Setting range˖6̚4000˄Unit˖mm/min˅

0 7 0 Axes top feedrate of cutting

Setting range˖10̚4000˄Unit˖mm/min˅

0 7 1 Exponential acceleration start speed and deceleration end speed in

cutting feed

Volume ċ Installation
Setting range˖0̚8000˄Unit˖mm/min˅

0 7 2 Exponential acceleration&deceleration time constant of cutting

Setting range˖10̚4000˄Unit˖ms˅

0 7 3 Start speed in manual feed.

Setting range˖0̚8000˄Unit˖mm/min˅

0 7 4 Exponential acceleration&deceleration time constant of manual

feed
Setting range˖10̚4000˄Unit˖ms˅

0 7 5 Threading axes start speed

Setting range˖6̚8000˄Unit˖mm/min˅

0 7 7 Initial speed of acc.&dec.speed of CS axis

Setting range˖0̚5000˄Unit˖deg/min˅

0 7 8 Acc.&dec.time constant of CS axis

Setting range˖10̚10000˄Unit˖ms˅

309
 GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual

0 8 1 Initial speed of linear acceleration/deceleration in rigid tapping

Setting range˖0̚5000˄Unit˖mm/min˅

0 8 2 Linear acc.&dec. time constant in rigid tapping tool infeed

Setting range˖10̚10000˄Unit˖ms˅

0 8 3 Linear acc.&dec. time constant in rigid tapping tool retract

Setting range˖0̚4000˄Unit˖ms˅, 082 setting value is used when it is set to 0.

0 8 4 Override value in rigid tapping tool retract(0: override is set to

100%)
Setting range˖0̚200, 0: override is set to 100%

0 8 5 Tool retract amount in deep hole rigid tapping(high-speed,

standard)
Setting range˖0̚32767000˄Unit˖0.001mm˅

0 8 9 Low speed of X axis machine zero return

0 9 0 Low speed of Y axis machine zero return
0 9 1 Low speed of Z axis machine zero return
Volume ċ Installation

0 9 2 Low speed of 4th axis machine zero return

0 9 3 Low speed of 5th axis machine zero return
Setting range˖10̚1000˄Unit˖mm/min˅

0 9 4 High speed of X axis machine zero return

0 9 5 High speed of Y axis machine zero return
0 9 6 High speed of Z axis machine zero return
0 9 7 High speed of 4th axis machine zero return
0 9 8 High speed of 5th axis machine zero return
Setting range˖10̚921571875˄Unit˖mm/min˅

0 9 9 Voltage compensation for 0V analog voltage output

Setting range˖-1000̚1000˄Unit˖mV˅

1 0 0 Voltage offset value when spindle max. speed analog voltage 10V
output
Setting range˖-2000̚2000˄Unit˖mV˅

1 0 1 Max spindle speed of 1st gear when analog voltage output is 10V
1 0 2 Max.spindle speed of 2nd gear when analog voltage output is 10V
1 0 3 Max.spindle speed of 3rd gear when analog voltage output is 10V
1 0 4 Max.spindle speed of 4th gear when analog voltage output is 10V
Setting range˖10̚9999˄Unit˖r/min˅

310
 Chapter 3 Parameter

1 0 7 Spindle speed resches to signal detection delay time

Setting range˖0̚4080˄Unit˖ms˅

1 0 8 Max. spindle speed fluctuation allowed by system

Setting range˖50̚1000˄Unit˖r/min˅

1 0 9 spindle encoder pulses

Setting range˖0̚5000˄Unit˖p/r˅, It is drilling holes when 0 indicates G74 and G84 cycle.
1 1 0 Transmission ratio of encoder and spindle- spindle gear teeth
1 1 1 Transmission ratio of encoder and spindle- encoder gear teeth
Setting range˖1̚255

1 1 5 X axis backlash offset

1 1 6 Y axis backlash offset
1 1 7 Z axis backlash offset
1 1 8 4th axis backlash offset
1 1 9 5th axis backlash offset
Setting range˖0̚2000(Unit:0.001mm)

Volume ċ Installation
1 2 0 Interval of X axis screw-pitch error compensation
1 2 1 Interval of Y axis screw-pitch error compensation
1 2 2 Interval of Z axis screw-pitch error compensation
1 2 3 Interval of 4th axis screw-pitch error compensation
1 2 4 Interval of 5th axis screw-pitch error compensation
Setting range˖10000̚999999 (Unit:0.001mm)

1 2 5 Screw-pitch error compensation position number of X axis machine zero

1 2 6 Screw-pitch error compensation position number of Y axis machine zero
1 2 7 Screw-pitch error compensation position number of Z axis machine zero
1 2 8 Screw-pitch error compensation position number of 4th axis machine zero
1 2 9 Screw-pitch error compensation position number of 5th axis machine zero
Setting range˖0̚255

1 3 0 X axis machine zero offset

1 3 1 Y axis machine zero offset
1 3 2 Z axis machine zero offset
1 3 3 4th axis machine zero offset
1 3 4 5th axis machine zero offset
Setting range˖-99999̚99999 (Unit:0.001mm)

311
 GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual

1 3 5 Max. X coordinate value of software limit

1 3 6 Max. Y coordinate value of software limit
1 3 7 Max. Z coordinate value of software limit
1 3 8 Max. 4th coordinate value of software limit
1 3 9 Max. 5th coordinate value of software limit
1 4 0 Min. X coordinate value of software limit
1 4 1 Min. Y coordinate value of software limit
1 4 2 Min. Z coordinate value of software limit
1 4 3 Min. 4th coordinate value of software limit
1 4 4 Min. 5th coordinate value of software limit
Setting range˖-9999999̚+9999999 (Unit:0.001mm)

1 4 5 X machine coordinate of 1st reference point

1 4 6 Y machine coordinate of 1st reference point
1 4 7 Z machine coordinate of 1st reference point
1 4 8 4th machine coordinate of 1st reference point
1 4 9 5th machine coordinate of 1st reference point
1 5 0 X machine coordinate of 2nd reference point
1 5 1 Y machine coordinate of 2nd reference point
Volume ċ Installation

1 5 2 Z machine coordinate of 2nd reference point

1 5 3 4th machine coordinate of 2nd reference point
1 5 4 5th machine coordinate of 2nd reference point
1 5 5 X machine coordinate of 3rd reference point
1 5 6 Y machine coordinate of 3rd reference point
1 5 7 Z machine coordinate of 3rd reference point
1 5 8 4th machine coordinate of 3rd reference point
1 5 9 5th machine coordinate of 3rd reference point
1 6 0 X machine coordinate of 4th reference point
1 6 1 Y machine coordinate of 4th reference point
1 6 2 Z machine coordinate of 4th reference point
1 6 3 4th machine coordinate of 4th reference point
1 6 4 5th machine coordinate of 4th reference point
Setting range˖-9999999̚+9999999 (Unit:0.001mm)

1 7 2 Initial value of cutting feedrate when power on

Setting range˖10̚15000 (Unit:mm/min)

1 7 4 Feedrate of dry run

Setting range˖10̚99999999 (Unit:mm/min)

312
 Chapter 3 Parameter

1 7 5 Arc radius error limit

Setting range˖0̚1000 (Unit:0.001mm), On arc code ˄G02,G03˅, if error exceeds the difference
excuting limit between initial point radius and end point radius, alarm will be issued.

1 7 6 Retraction amount of G73 high deep hole drilling cycle

Setting range˖0̚32767000 (Unit:0.001mm),

1 7 7 Cutting initial point of G83 high deep hole drilling cycle

Setting range˖0̚32767000 (Unit:0.001mm),

1 7 8 G110,G111,G134,G135 Lead of helical tool infeed

Setting range˖0̚999999˄unit 0.001mm˅
If setting value is less than 10, helical feeding is invalid for rough milling command G110,
G111, G134, G135, and it feeds by linear type.
If setting value is more than or equal to 10, it feeds by helical type for rough milling command
G110, G111, G134, G135.
Rough milling command˄G110,G111,134,G135˅helical feed function:
Namely, for Z axis depth cutting of rough milling command G110, G111, 134, G135, the tool
feeds not by linear type, but by helical type. So the workpiece with no groove may be rough milled
directedly.

Volume ċ Installation
Note 1 when the Z axis cutting depth is less than 10ȝm each time, the helical feeding is invalid.
Note 2 when the tool radius is less than 1mm, the helical feeding is also invalid.
The helical feeding path is shown in follows:
Tool diameter 2r

Tool
Helical feeding lead (97#paremeter)

Workpiece

Tool diameter 2r

313
 GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual

1 8 9 Movement per rotation of the 4th axis

1 9 0 Movement per rotation of the 5th axis
Setting range˖1̚9999999˄unit˖0.001deg˅

2 0 1 Allowded valid ey number at the same time

Setting range˖2̚5

2 0 2 Define the name of the 4th axis(A:65, B:66, C:67)

2 0 3 Define the name of the 5th axis(A:65, B:66, C:67)
Setting range˖65̚67 65-Aˈ66-Bˈ67-C

2 1 3 Total tool number selection

Setting range˖1̚32

2 1 4 Reset output time

Setting range˖16̚4080˄unit˖ms˅
Volume ċ Installation

2 1 5 Serial communication baudrate

Setting range˖1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, 115200˄unit˖bit/s˅

2 1 6 Block No. increment for block No.auto insertion

Setting range˖1̚100

3.2 Parameter description (by function sequence)

3.2.1 Axis control logic

0 0 8 DISP *** *** DIR5 DIR4 DIRZ DIRY DIRX

DIR5 =1˖Direction signal (DIR)is high level as the 5th axis moves positively;
=0˖Direction signal (DIR)is low level as the 5th axis moves negatively.
DIR4 =1˖Direction signal (DIR)is high level as the 4th axis moves positively;
=0˖Direction signal (DIR)is low level as the 4th axis moves negatively.
DIRZ =1˖Direction signal (DIR)is high level as Z axis moves positively;
=0˖Direction signal (DIR)is low level as Z axis moves negatively.
DIRY =1˖Direction signal (DIR)is high level as Y axis moves positively;
=0˖Direction signal (DIR)is low level as Y axis moves negatively.
DIRX =1˖Direction signal (DIR)is high level as X axis moves positively;
=0˖Direction signal (DIR)is low level as X axis moves negatively.

314
 Chapter 3 Parameter

0 0 9 *** *** *** ALM5 ALM4 ALMZ ALMY ALMX

th
ALM5 =1˖the 5 axis low level alarm signal (ALM5);
=0˖the 5th axis high level alarm signal (ALM5).
ALM4 =1˖the 4th axis low level alarm signal (ALM4);
=0˖the 4th axis high level alarm signal (ALM4).
ALMZ =1˖Z axis low level alarm signal (ALMZ);
=0˖Z axis high level alarm signal (ALMZ).
ALMY =1˖Y axis low level alarm signal (ALMY);
=0˖Y axis high level alarm signal (ALMY).
ALMX =1˖X axis low level alarm signal (ALMX);
=0˖X axis high level alarm signal (ALMX).

0 1 9 KEY1 *** *** HNG5 HNG4 HNGZ HNGY HNGX

HNG5 =1˖the 5th MPG:ccw:+,cw:-;

=0˖the 5th MPG:ccw:-,cw:+.
HNG4 =1˖the 4th MPG:ccw:+,cw:-;
=0˖the 4th MPG:ccw:-,cw:+.
HNGZ =1˖Z MPG:ccw:+,cw:-;
=0˖Z MPG:ccw:-,cw:+.

Volume ċ Installation
HNGY =1˖Y MPG:ccw:+,cw:-;
=0˖Y MPG:ccw:-,cw:+.
HNGX =1˖X MPG:ccw:+,cw:-;
=0˖X MPG:ccw:-,cw:+.

0 2 0 SPFD SAR THDA VAL5 VAL4 VALZ VALY VALX

VAL5 =1˖For the 5th axis move key,Ĺ is positiveˈĻis negative;
=0˖For the 5th axis move key, Ļis positiveˈĹis negative.
VAL4 =1˖For the 4th axis move key,Ĺ is positiveˈĻis negative;
=0˖For the 4th axis move key, Ļis positiveˈĹis negative.
VALZ =1˖For Z axis move key,Ĺ is positiveˈĻis negative;
=0˖For Z axis move key, Ļis positiveˈĹis negative.
VALY =1˖For Y axis move key,Ĺ is positiveˈĻis negative;
=0˖For Y axis move key, Ļis positiveˈĹis negative.
VALX =1˖For X axis move key, ĺis positiveˈĸis negative;
=0˖For X axis move key, ĸis positiveˈĺis negative

315
 GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual

0 4 9 CMRX˖X axis multiplier coefficient

0 5 0 CMRY˖Y axis multiplier coefficient
0 5 1 CMRZ˖Z axis multiplier coefficient
0 5 2 CMR4˖4th axis multiplier coefficient
0 5 3 CMR5˖5th axis multiplier coefficient
Setting range: 1̚32767

0 5 4 CMDX˖X axis frequency division coefficient

0 5 5 CMDY˖Y axis frequency division coefficient
0 5 6 CMDZ˖Z axis frequency division coefficient
0 5 7 CMD4˖4th axis frequency division coefficient
0 5 8 CMD5˖5th axis frequency division coefficient
Setting range˖ 1̚32767
S u 360 Z M
u
D u L ZD
CMR
Electronic gear ratio formula˖ CMD
S˖Min. command output unit ZM˖belt wheel teeth of lead screw
Į: motor rotation angle for a pulse ZD˖Wheel teeth of motor belt
Volume ċ Installation

L˖Screw lead

3.2.2 Acceleration & deceleration control

0 0 4 *** RDRN DECI *** PROD *** *** SCW

RDRN =1˖G00 rapid traverseˈ speed = federate ×dry run speed;
=0˖G00 speed = rapid override × rapid tranverse speed .

0 1 2 *** *** *** TMANL *** *** EBCL ISOT

ISOT =1˖Prior to machine zero return after power on, manual rapid traverse valid;
=0˖Prior to machine zero return after power on, manual rapid traverse invalid.

0 5 9 X axis max. rapid traverse speed

0 6 0 Y axis max. rapid traverse speed
0 6 1 Z axis max. rapid traverse speed
0 6 2 4th axis max. rapid traverse speed
0 6 3 5th axis max. rapid traverse speed
Setting range:10̚1843143750˄unit˖mm/min˅

316
 Chapter 3 Parameter

0 6 4 Acceleration&deceleration time constant of X axis rapid traverse (ms)

0 6 5 Acceleration&deceleration time constant of Y axis rapid traverse (ms)
0 6 6 Acceleration&deceleration time constant of Z axis rapid traverse (ms)
0 6 7 Acceleration&deceleration time constant of 4th axis rapid traverse (ms)
0 6 8 Acceleration&deceleration time constant of 5th axis rapid traverse (ms)
Setting range:10̚4000(unit˖ms)
0 6 9 Rapid traverse speed when rapid override is F0
Setting range:6̚4000˄unit˖mm/min˅

0 7 0 Axes top feedrate of cutting

Setting range:10̚15000˄unit:mm/min˅

0 7 1 Exponential acceleration start speed and deceleration end speed in

cutting feed
Setting range:0̚8000˄unit:mm/min˅

0 7 2 Exponential acceleration&deceleration time constant of cutting

Setting range:10̚4000˄unit˖ms˅

Volume ċ Installation
0 7 3 Start speed in manual feed.
Setting range:0̚8000˄unit:mm/min˅
0 7 4 Exponential acceleration&deceleration time constant of manual
feed
Setting range:10̚4000˄unit˖ms˅

3.2.3 Machine protection

0 1 7 *** MST MSP MOT MESP *** *** ***

MST =1˖External cycle start signal (ST) invalidˈ
=0˖External cycle start signal (ST) valid.
MSP =1˖External stop signal (SP) invalidˈ
=0˖External stop signal (SP) valid with external stop switch connected, otherwise CNC shows
“stop” .
MOT =1˖Not detect software stroke limit;
=0˖Detect software stroke limit.
MESP =1˖Emergency stop invalid;
=0˖Emergency stop valid

0 1 8 *** *** *** ESCD *** *** *** ***

ESCD =1˖S code off at emergency stop;
=0˖S code not off at emergency stop

317
 GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual

0 2 2 CALH SOT *** MZR5 MZR4 MZRZ MZRY MZRX

SOT =1˖Software limit valid after zero return at power on;
=0˖Software limit valid after power on.

1 3 5 Max. X coordinate value of software limit

1 3 6 Max. Y coordinate value of software limit
1 3 7 Max. Z coordinate value of software limit
1 3 8 Max. 4th coordinate value of software limit
1 3 9 Max. 5th coordinate value of software limit
1 4 0 Min. X coordinate value of software limit
1 4 1 Min. Y coordinate value of software limit
1 4 2 Min.Z coordinate value of software limit
1 4 3 Min. 4th coordinate value of software limit
1 4 4 Min. 5th coordinate value of software limit
Setting range˖-9999999̚+9999999˄unit˖0.001mm˅

3.2.4 Thread function

0 2 0 SPFD SAR THDA VAL5 VAL4 VALZ VALY VALX

THDA =1˖Threading machining adopts exponential acceleration and deceleration;
Volume ċ Installation

=0˖Threading machining adopts linear acceleration and deceleration.

0 7 5 Threading axes start speed

Setting range˖6̚8000˄unit:mm/min˅

3.2.5 Spindle control

0 0 1 *** *** *** ACS HWL *** *** ***

ACS =1: Analog voltage control of spindle speed;
=0: Switching control of spindle speed.

0 9 9 Voltage compensation for 0V analog voltage output

Setting range˖-1000̚1000 ˄unit:mV˅

1 0 0 Voltage offset value when spindle max. speed analog voltage 10V
output
Setting range˖-2000̚2000˄unit˖mV˅

318
 Chapter 3 Parameter

1 0 1 Max spindle speed of 1st gear when analog voltage output is 10V
1 0 2 Max.spindle speed of 2nd gear when analog voltage output is 10V
1 0 3 Max.spindle speed of 3rd gear when analog voltage output is 10V
1 0 4 Max.spindle speed of 4th gear when analog voltage output is 10V
Setting range˖10̚9999 ˄unit:r/min˅

1 0 7 Delay of spindle speed in-position signal detection

Setting range˖0̚4080 ˄unit:ms˅

1 0 8 Max. spindle speed fluctuation allowed by system

Setting range˖50̚1000˄unit:r/min˅

1 0 9 spindle encoder pulses/rev

Setting range˖0̚5000 ˄unit˖p/r˅0: Not detect spindle encoder in G74, G84 tapping.

1 1 0 Transmission ratio of encoder and - spindle gear teeth

1 1 1 Transmission ratio of encoder and - encoder gear teeth
Setting range:1̚255

Volume ċ Installation
3.2.6 Tool function

0 0 2 *** *** *** LIFJ MDITL LIFC NRC TLIF

LIFJ =1: Tool life management group skip valid;
=0: Tool life management group skip invalid.
MDITL =1: Tool life management valid in MDI mode;
=0: Tool life management invalid in MDI mode.
LIFC =1: Tool life counting type 2 by times;
=0: Tool life counting type 1 by times.
NRC =1: Tool nose radius compensation valid;
=0: Tool nose radius compensation invalid.
TLIF =1: Tool life management valid;
=0: Tool life management invalid

0 1 2 *** *** *** TMAN *** *** EBCL ISOT

L
TMANL =1˖Manual tool change for T code;
=0˖Auto tool change for T code.

2 1 3 Total tool number selection

Setting range˖1̚32

319
 GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual

3.2.7 Edit and Display

0 0 4 *** RDRN DECI *** PROD *** *** SCW

PROD =1˖Relative coordinate displayed in POSITION page is programming position;
=0˖Relative coordinate displayed in POSITION page is position involving tool offset.

0 0 8 DISP *** *** DIR5 DIR4 DIRZ DIRY DIRX

DISP =1˖Enter absolute page after power on;
=0˖Enter relative page after power on.

0 1 2 *** *** *** TMANL *** *** EBCL ISOT

EBCL =1˖Program end sign EOB displays “;”(semicolon);
=0˖Program end sign EOB displays “*”(asterisk).

0 4 0 *** *** *** *** *** L2 L1 L0

L2, L1, L0˖Interface language selection;
Language L2 L1 L0
Chinese 0 0 0
English 0 0 1
Frence 0 1 0
Volume ċ Installation

Spanish 0 1 1
Germen 1 0 0
Italy 1 0 1
Russian 1 1 0
Korean 1 1 1

2 1 6 Block No. increment for block No.auto insertion

Setting range˖1̚100

3.2.8 Precision compensation

0 0 3 *** *** PCOMP *** *** *** D/R ***

PCOMP =1: Screw-pitch error compensation valid;

=0: Screw-pitch error compensation invalid.
D/R =1: Tool offset D value is diameter input;
=0: Tool offset D value is radius input.

0 1 0 CPF7 CPF6 CPF5 CPF4 CPF3 CPF2 CPF1 CPF0

CPF0̚CPF7˖ Setting values of backlash compensation pulse frequency.
The set frequency =
˄27×CPF7+26×CPF6+25×CPF5+24×CPF4+23×CPF3+22×CPF2+21×CPF1+CPF0˅Kpps

320
 Chapter 3 Parameter

0 1 1 BDEC BD8 *** *** *** ZNIK *** ***

BDEC =1˖Backlash compensation type B, the compensation data are output by ascending or
decending type and the set frequency is invalid.;
=0˖Backlash compensation type A, the compensation data are output by the set frequency
(set by bit parameter No.010) or 1/8 of it.
BD8 =1˖Backlash compensation is done by the 1/8 of the set frequency;
=0˖Backlash compensation is done by the set frequency.

0 2 2 CALH SOT *** MZR5 MZR4 MZRZ MZRY MZRX

CALH =1˖Length offset not cancel in reference point return;
=0˖Length offset cancel in reference point return.

1 1 5 X axis backlash offset

1 1 6 Y axis backlash offset
1 1 7 Z axis backlash offset
1 1 8 4th axis backlash offset
1 1 9 5th axis backlash offset
Setting range˖0̚2000˄unit:0.001mm˅

Volume ċ Installation
1 2 0 Interval of X axis screw-pitch error compensation
1 2 1 Interval of Y axis screw-pitch error compensation
1 2 2 Interval of Z axis screw-pitch error compensation
1 2 3 Interval of 4th axis screw-pitch error compensation
1 2 4 Interval of 5th axis screw-pitch error compensation
Setting range˖ 1000̚999999˄unit˖0.001mm ˅

1 2 5 Screw-pitch error compensation number of X axis machine zero

1 2 6 Screw-pitch error compensation number of Y axis machine zero
1 2 7 Screw-pitch error compensation number of Z axis machine zero
1 2 8 Screw-pitch error compensation number of the 4th axis machine zero
1 2 9 Screw-pitch error compensation number of the 5th axis machine zero
Setting range˖ 0̚255

3.2.9 Communication setting

2 1 5 Serial communication baudrate

Setting range˖1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, 115200 (unit:bit/s)

321
 GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual

3.2.10 Machine zero return

0 0 4 *** RDRN DECI *** PROD *** *** SCW

DECI =1˖Deceleration signal high level for machine zero return;

=0˖Deceleration signal low level for machine zero return.

0 1 1 BDEC BD8 *** *** *** ZNIK *** ***

ZNIK =1˖Direction keys locked during zero return, homing continues to end by pressing direction
key once;
=0˖Direction keys unlocked but should be held on during zero return

0 0 6 *** *** *** ZM5 ZM4 ZMZ ZMY ZMX

ZM5 =1˖5th zero return type C;
=0˖5th zero return type B.
ZM4 =1˖4th zero return type C;
=0˖4th zero return type B.
ZMZ =1˖Z zero return type C;
Volume ċ Installation

=0˖Z zero return type B.

ZMY =1˖Y zero return type C;
=0˖Y zero return type B.
ZMX =1˖X zero return type C;
=0˖X zero return type B.

0 0 7 AVGL *** SMZ ZC5 ZC4 ZCZ ZCY ZCX

ZC5 =1˖The deceleration signal (DEC5) and one-rotation signal (PC5) of 5th axis in parallel
connection (a proximity switch acting as both the deceleration signal and zero signal)
during machine zero return;
=0˖The deceleration signal (DEC5) and one-rotation signal (PC5) of 5th axis are connected
independently (the indepent deceleration signal and zero signal are required) during
machine zero return.

ZC4 =1˖The deceleration signal (DEC4) and one-rotation signal (PC4) of 4th axis in parallel
connection (a proximity switch acting as both the deceleration signal and zero signal)
during machine zero return;
=0˖The deceleration signal (DEC4) and one-rotation signal (PC4) of 4th axis are connected
independently (the indepent deceleration signal and zero signal are required) during
machine zero return.

ZCZ =1˖The deceleration signal (DECZ) and one-rotation signal (PCZ) of Z axis in parallel
connection (a proximity switch acting as both the deceleration signal and zero signal)

322
 Chapter 3 Parameter

during machine zero return;

=0˖The deceleration signal DECZ) and one-rotation signal (PCZ) of Z axis are connected
independently (the indepent deceleration signal and zero signal are required) during
machine zero return.

ZCY =1˖The deceleration signal (DECY) and one-rotation signal (PCY) of Y axis in parallel
connection (a proximity switch acting as both the deceleration signal and zero signal)
during machine zero return;
=0˖The deceleration signal (DECY)and one-rotation signal PCY) of Y axis are connected
independently (the indepent deceleration signal and zero signal are required) during
machine zero return.

ZCX =1˖The deceleration signal (DECX) and one-rotation signal (PCX) of X axis in parallel
connection (a proximity switch acting as both the deceleration signal and zero signal)
during machine zero return;
=0˖The deceleration signal (DECX) and one-rotation signal (PCX) of X axis are connected
independently (the indepent deceleration signal and zero signal are required) during
machine zero return.

0 1 4 *** *** *** ZRS5 ZRS4 ZRSZ ZRSY ZRSX

Volume ċ Installation
ZRS5 =1: There are machine zero point in the 5th axis, it detects deceleration signal and zero signal
when performing machine zero return;
=0: There are no machine zero point in the 5th axis, it returns to machine zero without detecting
deceleration signal and zero signal when performing machine zero return.

ZRS4 =1: There are machine zero point in the 4th axis, it detects deceleration signal and zero signal
when performing machine zero return;
=0: There are no machine zero point in the 4th axis, it returns to machine zero without detecting
deceleration signal and zero signal when performing machine zero return.

ZRSZ =1: There are machine zero point in Z axis, it detects deceleration signal and zero signal
when performing machine zero return;
=0: There are no machine zero point in Z axis, it returns to machine zero without detecting
deceleration signal and zero signal when performing machine zero return.

ZRSY =1: There are machine zero point in Y axis, it detects deceleration signal and zero signal
when performing machine zero return;
=0: There are no machine zero point in Y axis, it returns to machine zero without detecting
deceleration signal and zero signal when performing machine zero return.

ZRSX =1: There are machine zero point in X axis, it detects deceleration signal and zero signal
when performing machine zero return;
=0: There are no machine zero point in X axis, it returns to machine zero without detecting
deceleration signal and zero signal when performing machine zero return.

323
 GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual

0 2 2 CALH SOT *** MZR5 MZR4 MZRZ MZRY MZRX

CALH =1˖Length offset not cancel in reference point return;
=0˖Length offset cancel in reference point return.
MZR5 =1˖Machine zero return in negative the 5th axis;
=0˖Machine zero return in positive the 5th axis.
MZR4 =1˖Machine zero return in negative the 4th axis;
=0˖Machine zero return in positive the 4th axis.
MZRZ =1˖Machine zero return in negative Z axis;
=0˖Machine zero return in positive Z axis.
MZRY =1˖Machine zero return in negative Y axis;
=0˖Machine zero return in positive Y axis.
MZRX =1˖Machine zero return in positive X axis;
=0˖Machine zero return in negative X axis.

0 8 9 Low speed of X axis machine zero return

0 9 0 Low speed of Y axis machine zero return
0 9 1 Low speed of Z axis machine zero return
0 9 2 Low speed of the 4th axis machine zero return
0 9 3 Low speed of the 5th axis machine zero return
Volume ċ Installation

Setting range˖10̚1000˄unit˖mm/min˅

0 9 4 High speed of X axis machine zero return

0 9 5 High speed of Y axis machine zero return
0 9 6 High speed of Z axis machine zero return
0 9 7 High speed of the 4th axis machine zero return
0 9 8 High speed of the 5th axis machine zero return
Setting range˖10̚921571875 (unit:mm/min)

1 3 0 X axis machine zero offset

1 3 1 Y axis machine zero offset
1 3 2 Z axis machine zero offset
1 3 3 The 4th axis machine zero offset
1 3 4 The 5th axis machine zero offset
Setting range˖-99999̚99999(unit˖0.001mm)

324
 Chapter 3 Parameter

1 4 5 X machine coordinate of the 1st reference point

1 4 6 Y machine coordinate of the 1st reference point
1 4 7 Z machine coordinate of the 1st reference point
1 4 8 The 4th machine coordinate of the 1st reference point
1 4 9 The 5th machine coordinate of the 1st reference point
1 5 0 X machine coordinate of the 2nd reference point
1 5 1 Y machine coordinate of the 2nd reference point
1 5 2 Z machine coordinate of the 2nd reference point
1 5 3 The 4th machine coordinate of the 2nd reference point
1 5 4 The 5th machine coordinate of the 2nd reference point
1 5 5 X machine coordinate of the 3rd reference point
1 5 6 Y machine coordinate of the 3rd reference point
1 5 7 Z machine coordinate of the 3rd reference point
1 5 8 The 4th machine coordinate of the 3rd reference point
1 5 9 The 5th machine coordinate of the 3rd reference point
1 6 0 X machine coordinate of the 4th reference point
1 6 1 Y machine coordinate of the 4th reference point
1 6 2 Z machine coordinate of the 4th reference point
1 6 3 The 4th machine coordinate of the 4th reference point

Volume ċ Installation
1 6 4 The 5th machine coordinate of the 4th reference point
Setting range˖-99999999̚99999999 (unit:0.001mm)

3.2.11 Rotary axis function

0 2 5 RTORI *** RTPCP *** *** RTCRG *** ***

RTORI =1˖M29 is executed,Spindle need to return zero;
=0˖M29 is executed,Spindle need not to return zero.
RTPCP =1˖Rigid tapping is the high-speed deep hole cycle(G73);
=0˖Rigid tapping is the high-speed deep hole cycle (G83).
RTCRG =1˖Do not wait for G61.0 to be 1 as excuting next program block after rigid tapping
cancelled;
=0˖Do wait for G61.0 to be 1 as excuting next program block after rigid tapping cancelled.

0 2 6 *** *** *** RCS4 *** *** ROS4 ROT4

RCS4 =1˖Cs function of 4th axis is valid(power on);

=0˖Cs function of 4th axis is invalid(power on).
ROS4, ROT4˖Set the type of 4th axis;

325
 GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual

Linear Rotary A Rotary B invalid

ROT4 0 1 1 0
ROS4 0 0 1 1

0 2 7 *** RRT4 *** *** *** RRL4 RAB4 ROA4

RRT4 =1˖Zero mode D is used on the 4th rotary axis (power on);
=0˖Zero mode A,B,C are used on the 4th rotary axis (power on).
RRL4 =1˖the 4th rel.coor.cycle func.is valid (power on);
=0˖the 4th rel.coor.cycle func.is invalid(power on).
RAB4 =1˖the 4th rotates according to symbol direction;
=0˖the 4th rotates according to nearby rotation.
ROA4 =1˖the 4th abs.coor.cycle func.is valid (power on);
=0˖the 4th abs.coor.cycle func.is invalid(power on).

0 2 8 *** *** *** RCS5 *** *** ROS5 ROT5

RCS5 =1˖Cs function of the 5th axis is valid(power on);

Volume ċ Installation

=0˖Cs function of the 5th axis is invalid(power on).

ROS5, ROT5˖Set the type of 5th;
Linear Rotary A Rotary B invalid
ROT5 0 1 1 0
ROS5 0 0 1 1

0 2 9 *** RRT5 *** *** *** RRL5 RAB5 ROA5

RRT5 =1˖Zero mode D of the 5th axis (power on) ;

=0˖Zero mode A, B, C of the 5th axis (power on) .
RRL5 =1˖the 5th rel.coor.cycle func.is valid (power on);
=0˖the 5th rel.coor.cycle func.is invalid(power on).
RAB5 =1˖the 5th rotation according to symbol direction;
=0˖the 5th rotation according to nearby direction.
ROA5 =1˖the 5th abs.coor.cycle func.is valid (power on);
=0˖the 5th abs.coor.cycle func.is invalid(power on).
RRT4 =1˖Zero mode D is used on the 5th rotary axis (power on);
=0˖Zero mode A,B,C are used on the 5th rotary axis (power on).
RRL4 =1˖the 5th rel.coor.cycle func.is valid (power on);
=0˖the 5th rel.coor.cycle func.is invalid(power on).
RAB4 =1˖5th rotates according to symbol direction;
=0˖5th rotates according to nearby rotation.
ROA4 =1˖the 5th abs.coor.cycle func.is valid (power on);

326
 Chapter 3 Parameter

=0˖the 5th abs.coor.cycle func.is invalid(power on).

0 7 7 Initial speed of acc.&dec in using CS funciton

Setting range˖ 0̚5000˄Unit:deg/min˅

0 7 8 Acc.&dec.time constant in using CS function

Setting range˖ 10̚10000˄Unit:ms˅

0 8 1 Initial speed of linear acceleration/deceleration in rigid tapping

Setting range˖ 0̚5000˄Unit:mm/min˅

0 8 2 Linear time constant in rigid tapping tool infeed

Setting range˖ 10̚10000˄Unit:ms˅

0 8 3 Time constant in rigid tapping tool retract

Setting range˖ 0̚4000˄Unit:ms˅, 082 setting value is used when it is set to 0.

0 8 4 Override value in rigid tapping tool retract(0: override is set to 100%)

Setting range˖ 0̚200, 0: override is set to 100%

Volume ċ Installation
0 8 5 Tool retract amount in deep hole rigid tapping(high-speed, standard)
Setting range˖0̚32767000,˄Unit:0.001mm˅

1 8 9 One-rotaton increment of the 4th axis

1 9 0 One-rotaton increment of 5th axis
Setting range˖1̚9999999,˄Unit:0.001deg˅

2 0 1 Amount of valid keys pressed simultaneously

Setting range˖2̚5

2 0 2 Define the name of the 4th axis (A:65, B:66, C:67)

2 0 3 Define the name of the 5th axis (A:65, B:66, C:67)
Setting range˖65̚67 65-Aˈ66-Bˈ67-C

327
 GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual

CHAPTER 4 MACHINE DEBUGGING METHODS AND STEPS

The trial run methods and steps at initial power on for this GSK980MDa are
described in this chapter. The corresponding operation can be performed after the debugging by
the following steps.

4.1 Emergency Stop and Stroke Limit

This GSK980MDa system has software limit function, it is suggested that the stroke limit
switches are fixed in the positive or negative axes for hardware limit. The connection is shown in
follows:˄The chart is designed for X, Y, Z axes˅
Volume ċ Installation

So the MESP of bit parameter No.17should be set to 0.

And the CNC diagnostic message ESP can monitor the state of emergency stop input signal.
In Manual or MPG mode, slowly move the axes to test the validity of stroke limit
switch, correctness of alarm display, validity of overtravel release button.When the overtravel occurs
or Emergency Stop button is pressed,“emergency stop” alarm will be issued by CNC system. The
alarm can be cancelled by pressing down the Overtravel button and moving reversely.

4.2 Drive unit Unit Setting

Set BIT4̚BIT0 of bit parameter No.009 according to alarm logic level of drive unit. The BIT4̚
BIT0 of bit parameter No.009 for our drive unit are all set for 1 .
If the machine moving direction is not consistent with the moving command,
modify the BIT4ᨺBIT0 of bit parameter No.008᧨BIT4̚BIT0 of bit parameter No.019, BIT4ᨺBIT0 of
bit parameter No.20.

328
 Chapter 4 Machine Debugging Methods

4.3 Gear Ratio Adjustment

The data parameter No.049ᨺNo.058 can be modified for electronic gear ratio adjustment to
meet the different mechanical transmission ratio if the machine travel distance
is not consistent with the displacement distance displayed by the CNC coordinate.

Calculation formula:
G u 360
u
D u L
CM R ZM
CM D Z D
CMR: command multiplier coefficient (data parameter ʋ049, ʋ050, ʋ051, ʋ052, ʋ053)
CMD: command frequency division coefficient (data parameter ʋ054, ʋ055, ʋ056, ʋ057,

D :: pulse volume, motor rotation angle for a pulse

ʋ058)

L: lead
į: min. input command unit of CNC (0.0001 for all axes of GSK980MDa)
ZM: gear teeth of lead screw
ZD: gear teeth of motor
If the electronic gear ratio numerator is greater than the denominator, the allowed CNC max.
speed will decrease. For example: the data parameter No.051᧤CMRZ᧥=2᧨ʋ056᧤CMDZ᧥=1, so

Volume ċ Installation
the allowed Z axis max. speed is 8000mm/min.
If the electronic gear ratio numerator is not equal to the denominator, the allowed CNC
positioning precision will decrease. For example: when the data parameter No.051᧤CMRZ᧥=1 and

ʋ056᧤CMDZ᧥=5, the pulse is not output as the input increment is 0.004, but a pulse is output if the
input increment is up to 0.005.
In order to ensure the CNC positioning precision, speed index and match with digit servo with
electronic gear ratio function, it is suggested that the CNC electronic gear ratio is set for 1:1 or the
electronic gear ratio calculated is set to the digital servo.
When matching with the step drive, choose the drive unit with step division
function as far as possible, and properly select mechanical transmission ratio. The 1:1
electronic gear ratio should be ensured to avoid the too large difference between the numerator and
the denominator of this CNC gear ratio.

Example:
Match GSK980MDa with DA98B, take X axis for example: set command multiplier coefficient and
command frequency division coefficient to 1. Calculation formula is shown below.

G u 360 Z M
u
CNC˖

D u L ZD
CMR 1
CMD 1
The following conclusions can be reached:
į u 360 Z M
Į u (deg/pulse)
L ZD
Drive unit˖
Parameters 12, 13 of drive unit correspond to position command pulse frequency division

329
 GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual

PuG 4u N uC
molecule and denominator. Calculation formula of drive unit gear ratio is shown as follows:

360 / D
P˖Correspondence between required pulse volume for motor rotates 3600 and CNC end˖
P
G˖ Electronic gear ratio of drive unit, G= position command pulse frequency division
molecule/ position command pulse frequency division denominator
N˖ Set motor rev number to 1
C˖ Wire number of feedback encoder: DA98B is 2500p/r.

D 4 u N u C G u 360 Z M
The following conclusions can be reached:
4u N uC
G 4u N uC u u u
P 360 360 L ZD
10 u Z M
Lu ZD
Set molecule and denominator of caculated ratio to drive unit 12, 13 separately.

4.4 Acceleration&deceleration Characteristic Adjustment

Adjust the relative CNC parameters according to the factors such as the
drive unit, motor characteristics and machine load:
Volume ċ Installation

Data parameter ʋ059̚ʋ063˖X, Y, Z, 4th, 5th axis rapid traverse rate;

Data parameter ʋ064̚ʋ068: linear acceleration & deceleration time constant of X,
Y, Z, 4th, 5th axis rapid traverse rate;
Data parameter ʋ069: rapid traverse speed when rapid override is F0
Data parameter ʋ070: upper limit of axes cutting feedrate;
Data parameter ʋ071: Start/end speed of exponential acceleration & deceleration in cutting
feeding;
Data parameter ʋ072: Exponential acceleration & deceleration time constant of cutting feeding;
Data parameterʋ073˖Start/end speed of exponential acceleration & deceleration in MPG/Step
feedrate;
Data parameterʋ074 ˖ Exponential acceleration & deceleration time constant of
MPG/STEP/manual feed;
Data parameterʋ075˖Start/end speed in thread cutting of each ax;
Data parameterʋ077˖Initial feedrate of acc.&dec in CS axis;
Data parameterʋ078˖Acc.&dec.time constant in CS axis;
Data parameterʋ081˖Initial speed of linear acceleration/deceleration in rigid tapping;
Data parameterʋ082˖Linear acceleration/deceleration time constant in rigid tapping tool infeed;
Data parameterʋ083 ˖ Linear acceleration/deceleration time constant in rigid tapping tool
retraction;
Data parameterʋ084˖Override value in rigid tapping tool retract;
Data parameterʋ172˖Initial feedrate when power on;
Data parameterʋ174˖Feedrate of DRY run;
SMZ of bit parameter ʋ007: for validity of smoothing transition between blocks

330
 Chapter 4 Machine Debugging Methods

The larger the acceleration&deceleration time constant is, the slower

tacceleration&deceleration is, the smaller the machine movement impact and the lower the
machining efficiency is.And vice versa.
If acceleration&deceleration time constants are equal, the higher the acceleration & deceleration
start/end speed is, the faster the acceleration & deceleration is, the bigger the machine movement
impact and the higher the machining efficiency is. And vice versa.
The principle for acceleration&deceleration characteristic adjustment is to properly
reduce the acceleration & deceleration time constant and increase the acceleration&deceleration
start/end speed to improve the machining efficiency on the condition that there is no alarm, motor
out-of-step and obvious machine impact. If the acceleration&deceleration time constant is set too
small, and the start/end speed is set too large, it is easily to cause drive unit alarm, motor out-of-step
or machine vibration.
When the bit parameter ʋ007 BIT3 ˄ SMZ ˅ =1, the feedrate drops
to the start speed of the acceleration&deceleration at the cutting path intersection, then
it accelerates to the specified speed of the adjacent block to obtain an accurate positioning at the path
intersection, but this will reduce the machining efficiency. When SMZ=0, the adjacent cutting path
transits smoothly by the acceleration&deceleration. The feedrate does not always drop to the start
speed when the previous path is finished and a circular transition (non-accurate positioning) will be
formed at the path intersection. The machining surface by this path transition has a
good finish and a higher machining efficiency. When the stepper motor drive unit is applied,
the SMZ of the bit parameter ʋ007 should be set to 1 to avoid the out-of-step.
When the stepper motor drive unit is applied to this system, the out-of-step may

Volume ċ Installation
occur if rapid traverse speed is too large, acceleration&deceleration time constant
is too small, acceleration&deceleration start/end speed is too large. The suggested
parameter setting is shown in follows (the electronic gear ratio is 1:1):
Data parameter ʋ059~ʋ063”5000 Data parameter ʋ064~ʋ068•350 Data parameter
ʋ071”50
Data parameter ʋ072•150 Data parameter ʋ073”50 Data parameterʋ074•150
Data parameterʋ075”100

When AC servo motor drive unit is applied to this system, the machining efficiency can be
improved by a larger start speed and smaller ACC&DEC time constant setting. If optimum ACC&DEC
characteristics are required, the ACC&DEC time constant may be set to 0ˈwhich can be got by
adjusting the AC servo ACC&DEC parameters. The suggested parameter settings are as follows
(electronic gear ratio is 1:1).
Data parameter ʋ059~ʋ063 set higher properly
Data parameter ʋ064~ʋ068”60
Data parameter ʋ071•50
Data parameter ʋ072”50
Data parameter ʋ073•50
Data parameter ʋ074”50
Data parameter ʋ075”500
The parameter settings above are recommended for use, refer to the actual conditions of the
drive unit, motor characteristic and machine load for its proper setting.

331
 GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual

4.5 Machine Zero Adjustment

Adjust the relevant parameters based on the valid level of the connection signal, zero return
type or direction applied:
˄DECI˅of the bit parameter ʋ004: valid level of deceleration signal as machine zero return
(ZM5~ZMX) of the bit parameter ʋ006: return and initial backlash direction of X, Y, Zˈ4th, 5th
axes machine zeroes at deceleration.
(ZC5~ZCX) of the bit parameter ʋ007: it is able to set whether an approach switch
taken as both deceleration and zero signals when X, Y, Z, 4th, 5th axes return to machine zero
point.
˄ZNLK˅of the bit parameter ʋ011: for direction keys lock when performing zero return
(ZRS5~ZRSX) of the bit parameter ʋ014: for deceleration and zero signals detection of X, Y, Z
axes in machine zero return.

᧤MZR5~MZRX˅of the bit parameter ʋ22: for positive or negative zero turn of X, Y, Z, 4th, 5th
axes
Data parameter ʋ089~ʋ093: low speed of X, Y, Z, 4th, 5th axes in machine zero return
Data parameter ʋ094~ʋ098: high speed of X, Y, Z, 4th, 5th axes in machine zero return
RRT4 of bit parameter ʋ027 and RRT5 of ʋ029 set the machine zero return type of the 4th and
the 5th axis separately.
Machine zero return can be done after the validity of overtravel limit swithch is
Volume ċ Installation

confirmed.Machine zero return types A, B, C can be selected for basic axes (X, Y, Z). Machine zero
return types A, B, C, D can be selected for additional axes (4th, 5th).
The machine zero is usually fixed at the max. travel point, and the effective stoke of the zero
return touch block should be more than 25mm to ensure a sufficient deceleration distance for
accurate zero return. The more rapid the machine zero return is, the longer the zero return touch
block should be. Or the moving carriage will rush through the block which may influence the zero
return precision because of the insufficient deceleration distance.

Usually there are 2 types of machine zero return connection:

1 The connection to AC servo motor: schematic diagram of using a travel switch and a servo motor
one-rotation signal separately

332
 Chapter 4 Machine Debugging Methods

By this connection type, when the deceleration switch is released in machine zero return, the
one-rotation signal of encoder should be avoided to be at a critical point after the travel switch is
released.In order to improve the zero return precisionˈit should be ensured the motor reaches the
one-rotation signal of encoder after it rotates for half circle.And the moving distance for motor half
circle rotation is the motor gear teeth/(2×lead screw gear teeth)

2 The connection to stepper motor: the schematic diagram of using a proximity

switch taken as both deceleration signal and zero signal

Volume ċ Installation
4.6 Spindle Adjustment

4.6.1 Spindle encoder

Encoder with the linear number 100~5000p/r is needed to be installed on the machine for
threading. The linear number is set by data parameter No.109. The transmission ratio(spindle
gear teeth/encoder gear teeth) between encoder and spindle is 1/255ᨺ255. The spindle
gear teeth are set by CNC data parameter No.110, and the encoder gear teethare set
by data parameter No.111. Synchronous belt transmission should be applied for it (no sliding
transmission).
The DGN.011 and DNG.012 of CNC diagnosis messages are used to check the validity of
threading signal from the spindle encoder.

4.6.2 Spindle brake

After spindle stop is executed, proper spindle brake time should be set to stop the spindle
promptly in order to enhance the machining efficiency. If the brake is employed with energy
consumption type, too long braking time may damage the motor. So the brake time is set by PLC.

333